MD110 Tech Guide Help

Dynamic Network Administration 5.
6
Technical Guide
EN/LZT 108 3855 R3I2

Copyright Aastra Technologies Limited, 2009. All rights reserved All rights reserved. No parts of this publication may be reproduced, stored in retrieval systems, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission of the publisher except in accordance with the following terms: When this publication is made available on Aastra media, Aastra gives its consent to downloading and printing copies of the content provided in this file, only for private use and not for redistribution. No parts of this publication may be subject to alteration, modification or commercial use. Aastra will not be liable for any damages arising from use of an illegal modified or altered publication.
Disclaimer
No part of this material may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of the copyright owner. The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Aastra shall have no liability for any error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents Chapter 1 Key Information Chapter 1 Key Information i 1 1
Dynamic Network Administration..........................................................................1 Compatibility.............................................................................................1 D.N.A. Server...........................................................................................2 D.N.A. Support for Extensions..................................................................2 What You Will Find In This Help Guide.................................................................3 Related Publications.................................................................................4 Conventions Used in This Guide..............................................................4 Glossary................................................................................................................4
Chapter 2 Applications Chapter 2 Applications
9 9
Description of Applications....................................................................................9 Limitations...........................................................................................................11 Add Component, Add Locale, Database Upsize, Reinstallation.............11 PPM Lite.................................................................................................11 OWS Screen Resolution.........................................................................11 SQL Server 2008 Security mode............................................................12 SQL Server 2008 Named Instances.......................................................12 Aastra Communication Assistant............................................................12 Extension Manager................................................................................12 Licenses..............................................................................................................13 Extension Manager................................................................................13 Personal Number...................................................................................13 OneBox Mailbox Integration................................................................................13 Integration of OneBox and D.N.A...........................................................13 OneBox Compatibility with Other Network Elements..............................15 Compatibility with Other Network Elements............................................17 Application Link...................................................................................................17 General Operations................................................................................17 Application Link and ACA.......................................................................18 Compatibility with Other Network Elements............................................18 Name Display in MD110......................................................................................18 Dial By Name Directory..........................................................................18 Time System Server............................................................................................19 Solidus eCare / D.N.A. Integration......................................................................20 LDAP Support in D.N.A.......................................................................................20 Other Interfaces...................................................................................................21 Directory Link.........................................................................................21 Extension Link........................................................................................21 D.N.A. CAAPI.........................................................................................22
Table of Contents
Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide
Change Log............................................................................................22 D.N.A. CTI..............................................................................................22 Mobile Executive.................................................................................................23 WAP Gateway........................................................................................23 Phone Setup...........................................................................................23 SNMP Agent.......................................................................................................25 The Monitored Objects...........................................................................26 Remote Data Monitor..........................................................................................27 Captured Filename.................................................................................28 Visitor Registration..............................................................................................29 Aastra Communication Assistant.........................................................................29
Chapter 3 License Administration Chapter 3 License Administration
30 30
License handling with D.N.A. 5.6.........................................................................30 The order and information flow............................................................................30 Generating Fingerprint file...................................................................................31 The Web application............................................................................................31 Providing access to the application.....................................................................32 Support................................................................................................................32
Chapter 4 Pre-Installation Chapter 4 Pre-Installation
33 33
About Pre-Installation..........................................................................................33 Pre-Installation Meeting .........................................................................33 PBX Hardware Requirements.............................................................................33 Configuration Options..........................................................................................34 Stand alone............................................................................................34 Single Server with Clients.......................................................................35 PC Hardware Requirements...............................................................................36 Server.....................................................................................................36 Client PC................................................................................................37 Server PC Windows Server 2008........................................................38 Configuration of IIS in Windows Server 2008.........................................39 Client PC Windows Vista Business.....................................................40 Additional Hardware Options..................................................................42 Hard Disk Requirements.....................................................................................42 Recommendation...................................................................................42 Server Disk Space Requirements.......................................................................42 Client Disk Space Requirements.........................................................................45 Software Requirements.......................................................................................46 Windows.................................................................................................46 SQL Server.............................................................................................46 Excel.......................................................................................................46 Internet Tools.........................................................................................46 Client/MD110 Connections for Operator Workstation..........................................47 Server/MD110 Connection for Operator Workstation..........................................47 Client/ MX-ONE Telephony Server Connections for Operator Workstation.....48 Server/ MX-ONE Telephony Server Connection for Operator Workstation.....49 Configuration Management Hardware Connections............................................49 Hardware Connections for Extension Manager...................................................50
ii
Table of Contents
Chapter 5 SQL Installation Chapter 5 SQL Installation
52 52
SQL Server 2005.................................................................................................52 To install SQL Server 2008....................................................................52 Upgrading to SQL Server 2005..............................................................53 Security..................................................................................................53 Memory..................................................................................................53 Dependent Packages for SQL 2008....................................................................54 SQL Server 2005.................................................................................................54 To install SQL Server 2005....................................................................54 Upgrading to SQL Server 2005..............................................................55 Security..................................................................................................55 Memory..................................................................................................55 Unattended SQL Server Installation....................................................................56 Install SQL Server 2008 Standard Edition Unattended...........................56 Install SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition Unattended...........................57 Change SQL SA password.................................................................................57 Install SQL Server Service Pack.........................................................................58 SNMP Master Agent............................................................................................58
Chapter 6 D.N.A. Installation Chapter 6 D.N.A. Installation
60 60
About Installation.................................................................................................60 Hardware Connections...........................................................................60 Software Installation...............................................................................60 Installation Checklists..........................................................................................60 Using the Checklists...............................................................................60 Application Suite Installation...............................................................................62 Installation Features...............................................................................62 Pre-Configured System..........................................................................62 Upgrading To D.N.A. 5.6.....................................................................................65 Upgrading from D.N.A. running on SQL Server 2000.............................66 Transferring D.N.A. from one computer to another................................66 Installing Enterprise License Server.......................................................67 Server Installation................................................................................................67 Auto-Run Installation..............................................................................67 Taskbar Installation................................................................................68 New Server Installation...........................................................................68 Installation Options.................................................................................72 Add Components....................................................................................73 Resize Database....................................................................................73 Client Installation.................................................................................................73 Auto-Run Installation..............................................................................74 Taskbar Installation................................................................................74 New Client Installation............................................................................74 Client Installation Options.......................................................................76 Silent Installation.................................................................................................77 Modifying the Setup (dnasuite.ini) File....................................................77 Installation Procedure.............................................................................78 Using the Setup Command....................................................................78 PPM Lite..............................................................................................................79
iii
Table of Contents
Installing with Auto-Run..........................................................................79 Installation Options.................................................................................80 Upgrade PPM Lite..................................................................................80 Post Installation......................................................................................80 PPMLite Installed on IIS 6.0...................................................................85 Aastra Communication Assistant.........................................................................89 Prerequisites..........................................................................................89 Installing with Auto-Run..........................................................................97 Installation Procedure.............................................................................98 Virtual Machine.......................................................................................98 Installation Options.................................................................................98 Upgrade Aastra Communication Assistant.............................................99 Post Installation Only if IIS 6.0 is used................................................99 Mobile Executive...............................................................................................101 Installing with Auto-Run........................................................................101 Installation Options...............................................................................102 Upgrade Mobile Executive....................................................................102 Post Installation Only if IIS 6.0 is used..............................................103 Outlook Integration............................................................................................105 Customizing Outlook Security Features...............................................107 D.N.A. Outlook Integration Logging......................................................123 Lotus Notes Integration.....................................................................................124 Installing Lotus Notes Integration Installation package on D.N.A. Server with Auto-Run.......................................................................................124 Installing D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration Templates on Domino Server .............................................................................................................124 Setting up D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration Templates..........................124 Installing D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration on Notes Client....................129 Registry Value for Message Diversion Synchronization ......................130 Registry location...................................................................................130 COMPUTER or USER ID User Defined Fields.....................................130 Help......................................................................................................131 D.N.A. Client Installation on Windows XP.........................................................131 Successful Configuration......................................................................131 Unsuccessful Configuration..................................................................132 D.N.A. Service Pack Installation........................................................................133
Chapter 7 ACC Installation Chapter 7 ACC Installation
135 135
Server Installation..............................................................................................135 Server Installation.................................................................................135 Pre-requisites.......................................................................................135 Installation Options...............................................................................136 Registration Information.......................................................................136 Virtual Directory....................................................................................136 ApplicationLink Configuration...............................................................136 Number of Sites....................................................................................137 Site Configuration.................................................................................137 Summary Information...........................................................................137 Configurations......................................................................................137 Post Installation Only if IIS 6.0 is used..............................................141 Client Installation...............................................................................................143 Installation Options...............................................................................144
iv
Table of Contents
Configurations......................................................................................145 Client Update....................................................................................................145 File Version Comparison......................................................................146 Client Installation Download and Update..............................................146 Compatibility.........................................................................................146
Chapter 8 Performance Chapter 8 Performance
147 147
Performance Enhancements.............................................................................147 Creating More Available Memory......................................................................147 Operator Workstation Supervisor......................................................................148 RDS Performance.............................................................................................148 LDB Integrity Check Feature................................................................148 Reduce I/O Completion Ports in Large Systems..................................149 Enable/Disable Incremental LDB Updates from DMG..........................149 Configure RDS to Use Fewer SQL Connections..................................150
Chapter 9 D.N.A. Server Chapter 9 D.N.A. Server
151 151
Facilities and Services.......................................................................................151 Administrative Tools..........................................................................................153 Changing Users, Servers, and Passwords........................................................155 Registry.............................................................................................................156 Registry Settings..................................................................................156 Server Identification..............................................................................157 Maintenance......................................................................................................157 SQL Database......................................................................................157 Logging Facilities Server......................................................................158 Short Message Service.....................................................................................158 Limitations............................................................................................159 Short Message Service Standby..........................................................159 Local Database Compression...........................................................................159 GICI Connection................................................................................................160 Message Diversion and Secondary and/or Shared Extension..........................160
Chapter 10 Maintenance Chapter 10 Maintenance
163 163
Archival Backup.................................................................................................163 Temporary Workspace.........................................................................163 Automatic Extraction.........................................................................................163 Performance Data Manager Operations...............................................164 Two Ways to Start the Extraction Process...........................................164 The Data Extraction Command............................................................164 Clock Synchronization..........................................................................165 Extraction Process...............................................................................165 Skip Nodes for Polling..........................................................................165 Extend Polling Time..............................................................................166 Presentation Manager.......................................................................................166 Operational Requirements....................................................................166
Table of Contents
Traffic Measurement Reports...............................................................166 Preserving Edited Reports....................................................................166 Database Utility.................................................................................................166 Options.................................................................................................166 Capacity and Limitations......................................................................167
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
168 168
Log Files............................................................................................................168 D.N.A. Server Installation Logs............................................................168 D.N.A. Client Installation Logs..............................................................168 ACA Installation Logs...........................................................................168 ACC Client Installation Logs.................................................................168 Mobile Executive Installation Logs.......................................................168 PPMLite Installation Logs.....................................................................168 Event Log Messages.........................................................................................169 Technical Support.............................................................................................182 Before Contacting Technical Support...................................................182 Reporting Your Problem....................................................................................182 Problem Description.............................................................................183 PBX......................................................................................................183 Operating System Information (mark all that apply).............................183 Configuration........................................................................................183 Network Protocol (mark all that apply)..................................................183 PC........................................................................................................183 D.N.A. Applications..............................................................................184 Directory Manager.............................................................................................184 Aastra Communication Client............................................................................187 Extension Manager...........................................................................................190 Operator Workstation........................................................................................196 OWS Supervisor................................................................................................198 Deployment Scenario 1:.......................................................................199 Deployment Scenario 2:.......................................................................200 Performance Data Manager..............................................................................201 Performance Presentation Manager..................................................................204 Essential Requirements........................................................................204 Report Limitations................................................................................205 General PPM Problems........................................................................205 Remote Data Server..........................................................................................206 Mobile Executive...............................................................................................206 Aastra Communication Assistant.......................................................................207 Call Handling problems........................................................................207 Personal Number problems..................................................................208 Trace....................................................................................................208 Service.................................................................................................209 Header Error.........................................................................................209 Fields are Disabled...............................................................................211 Slow to logon........................................................................................212 Outlook Integration & Lotus Notes Integration...................................................212 Outlook or Lotus Notes Integration would not start...............................212 Outlook or Lotus Notes Integration would not logon to the DNA Server .............................................................................................................212
vi
Table of Contents
Diversion information does not match between Outlook or Lotus Notes Integration and DNA.............................................................................212 DNA Outlook Integration and Calendar Conflicts.................................212 Troubleshooting with Remote Data Monitor.........................................213
Chapter 12 Application Data Chapter 12 Application Data
214 214
Report Generation.............................................................................................214 Directory Manager Database Organization.......................................................215 Extension Manager Database Organization......................................................220 PDM Database Organization.............................................................................235 Operator Workstation Data................................................................................236 Directory Assistance Databases...........................................................236 Operator Workstation Configuration.....................................................236
Chapter 13 MML Commands Chapter 13 MML Commands
238 238
Extension Manager...........................................................................................238 MD Support Utility.............................................................................................240 Performance Data Manager..............................................................................243 MD Support Command Line Synchronization...................................................244 Command Line Syntax.........................................................................244
Chapter 14 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 14 Frequently Asked Questions
247 247
Directory Manager.............................................................................................247 D.N.A. Server....................................................................................................248 Extension Manager...........................................................................................248 Operator Workstation........................................................................................249 Remote Data Server..........................................................................................252 Serial Communications Server..........................................................................253 Performance Data Manager..............................................................................254 D.N.A. Application Suite....................................................................................254 .............................................................................................................255 MD110..................................................................................................255 Registry................................................................................................256 ClockSync............................................................................................257 SNMP...................................................................................................257 Export...................................................................................................257 Aastra Communication Assistant.......................................................................258
Chapter 15 Configuration Chapter 15 Configuration
259 259
Networking (SNMP) Access Agent....................................................................259 Web Site Security..............................................................................................264 Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003...............................265
vii
Table of Contents
Setup D.N.A. Web Applications on Windows 2003 and IIS 6.0.........................265 Configurations setup automatically by D.N.A. installation ....................265 Configurations to Run D.N.A. Web Applications in Worker Process Isolation Mode......................................................................................265 D.N.A. Server and IIS 6.0 Server on Different Machines......................272 D.N.A. Port Assignments...................................................................................273 D.N.A. 5.6.............................................................................................273 Aastra Communication Assistant.......................................................................276 To setup end users Web browser........................................................276 To setup Aastra Communication Assistant user account.....................276 To configure Aastra Communication Assistant Server.........................276 Personal Contact Search .....................................................................280 Aastra Communication Client............................................................................283 ACC Port Usage...................................................................................283 Changing the default language setting for ACC...................................283 Using ACC with a Virtual Private Network (VPN).................................283 Monitor Feature Access for ACC..........................................................284 Restricting Display of External Numbers..............................................284 User ID and Password for ACA, ACC, and DME...............................................285 D.N.A. Directory Configuration.............................................................285 D.N.A. Directory Manager....................................................................285 User ID.................................................................................................285 Password..............................................................................................285 Operator Workstation........................................................................................285 Improving the Performance of OWS.....................................................285 E-mail Integration.................................................................................286
Chapter 16 VSI and TSS Chapter 16 VSI and TSS
287 287
Voice System Interface.....................................................................................287 Setting Up Communications and Configuration Parameters................287 The VSI Protocol..................................................................................287 Capacities and Limitations....................................................................289 Time System Server..........................................................................................290 Interface...............................................................................................290 Protocols..............................................................................................290 FLEXIM Protocol..................................................................................291 General Protocol..................................................................................297 CTR Protocol........................................................................................299 TIMECON Protocol...............................................................................305 Exchange Interface..............................................................................306 Message Types.................................................................................................306 IVR/Voice System to VSI Messages.................................................................306 IVR/Voice System from VSI Messages.............................................................308
Chapter 17 Security Chapter 17 Security
312 312
Directory Security..............................................................................................312 Services and Accounts/Rights...........................................................................314 ODBC Connection.............................................................................................316 Files Copied to Other Directories......................................................................317
viii
Table of Contents
Databases.........................................................................................................321 Registry.............................................................................................................322 Location................................................................................................322 Permissions..........................................................................................322
ix
Chapter 1 Key Information

Dynamic Network Administration
Congratulations on your selection of Dynamic Network Architecture (D.N.A.) application suite as your PBX call management system. The D.N.A. Application Suite is a comprehensive family of graphical PC-based programs and utilities supporting PBX operation and administration. D.N.A. provides PBX operational support in the following major areas: Operator Call Management Extension Management Directory Management High-level Telecommunications Network Supervision Traffic Measurement and Reporting
Compatibility
This release of the D.N.A. Application Suite is compatible with: Windows 2003 with Service Pack 1, Windows 2003 Server R2, and Windows Server 2008. Note: It is assumed that both the D.N.A. server and D.N.A. clients are in the same domain. If D.N.A. clients exist in other domains, then domain trust relationships must be established. Please refer to your Windows documentation for more details. Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2, and Windows Vista Business with Service Pack 1. MD110 PBX release BC12 MX-ONE Telephony Switch MX-ONE Telephony Server 2.0 MX-ONE Telephony Server 3.0 MX-ONE Telephony Server 3.1 MX-ONE Telephony Server 3.2 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edition Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Edition Microsoft Internet Information Server 6.0 and 7.0 Office 2003 Service Pack 2 and Office 2008.
Key Information
ApplicationLink 4.0 CT Adapter, ZAT 505 120/1 Extender Keyboard, KDT 252 001/02 D.N.A. Access Agent and SNMP application Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later Netscape 4.x, 6.x, and 7.x Notes 4.6.7, 5.0.2B and later, 6.0.x, and 6.5. Roaming User feature supported from Notes 6.0.1 is not supported by D.N.A. Notes Integration.
D.N.A. Server
The D.N.A. Server lets you administrate the D.N.A. Application Suite users. It also contains different utilities to set up the connection with PBX nodes. The central component of a D.N.A. Installation is the Remote Data Server (RDS). RDS maintains network database synchronization among all PBX nodes, the D.N.A. SQL Server, and D.N.A. Local Databases. Some of the most important database support functions are: Message Diversion Synchronization with the PBX. Message Waiting Synchronization that updates the Voice System Interface configuration utility. Application-to-Application Interactive Updates. Security and Licensing Support. D.N.A. Distributed Database Synchronization. Photo Storage and Retrieval for Operator Workstation and Directory Manager. Data File Storage and Retrieval Templates for Performance Manager and Extension Manager. Configuration File Storage and Retrieval for Operator Workstation and OCX. Administrative Task Scheduling. A tool to set up the Voice System Interface. A tool to upload directory information into MD110 phone displays. A tool to specify the replication between multiple D.N.A. Servers.
D.N.A. Support for Extensions

The following matrix shows current support for various extension types in DNA 5.6 for MD110/MX-ONE TSW /MX-ONE 3.0: MD110/MX-ONE TSW Generic IP Mobile Cordless Analog + + + + + MX-ONE 3.0 + + + + +
Dynamic Network Administration Key Information
Technical Guide
MD110/MX-ONE TSW Digital Digital POTS Data Dual Access ISDN + + + + +
MX-ONE 3.0 * * -
NOTE: Equipment change is not allowed for Digital/Digital POTS extension types, since KSEXC command is removed in MX-ONE 3.0 release. + = full support * = restricted support - = no support
What You Will Find In This Help Guide

This guide is written for technicians responsible for installing and maintaining Dynamic Network Administration (D.N.A.) applications. The D.N.A. Application Suite is a family of PC-based telephony applications for management and control of PBX operations. This guide includes the following help books. Applications - Provides a basic description of the applications. License Administration Describes the licenses handling in D.N.A. 5.6 based on the Enterprise License Manager. Pre Installation - Describes the main types of installations, PC hardware requirements, software which must be installed on the PC, and requirements for the PBX. SQL Installation - Describes SQL Server installation information, including SQL Server 2005 and 2008 installation, unattended SQL installation, change sa password, apply SQL Server service pack. D.N.A. Installation - Describes first-time installation of the D.N.A. applications, including hardware connections between the PBX and PC, and installation of the application software on the PC. ACC Installation - Describes both server and client installation for ACC including privilege needed to run installation. Performance - Describes basic steps to improve D.N.A. performance following installation. Installation problem - Describes where to find log files and event log error messages, to troubleshoot installation problem. D.N.A. Server - Describes the components that form the D.N.A. server, including the security and support platform for Dynamic Network Administration (D.N.A.) applications.
Key Information
Maintenance - Describes tasks that should be performed periodically to ensure proper operation of your applications. Troubleshooting - Describes how to resolve problems that may occur. Application Data - Report generation, data organization, and populating directory assistance databases. MML Commands - Tables of commands for Extension Manager, MDS Utilities, and Performance Data Manager. Frequently Asked Questions - Provides answers to some basic questions regarding D.N.A. Configuration - Describes other configuration items such as D.N.A. Agent Access module, Web site security and certificate request. VSI and TSS - Describes the Voice System Interface between an IVR system and D.N.A., as well as the optional Time System Server. Security - Describes D.N.A. Directory security, Service and Accounts/Rights, ODBC connection, Files copied to other directories, Database permissions, Registry location and permissions.
Related Publications
In addition to the "D.N.A. Technical Guide," getting started guides are available for the following products. Operator Workstation Extension Manager Directory Manager Performance Manager Mobile Executive
Conventions Used in This Guide

The D.N.A. server PC may be part of a larger network that uses another computer as a server for that network. Throughout this help guide, however, "server" refers to the PC set up as the server for the D.N.A. application suite, and "network" refers to the Windows LAN that is hosting the D.N.A. server PC.
Glossary
Refer to the descriptions in this section for help with understanding terms used in this guide. Alarm Unit (ALU) - MD110 circuit board that handles PBX alarm input/output. Backup Domain Controller (BDC) - A Windows configuration option. Call Origin Group - A group number defined for an operator that serves a unique call type, such as internal calls, public trunk calls, tie lines, and DID lines. An operator can be assigned to several different call origin groups.
Technical Guide
Client - A PC in a network installation that is connected to a server PC and accesses data on the server when running applications. In a D.N.A. network installation, the SQL database and the D.N.A. Server reside on a server PC, and one or more client PCs run applications that access the data on the server. For a stand-alone installation, the server and the client are the same PC. COM Port - An RS-232C serial communication interface on a PC that allows direct connection to another PC or an MD110 with a cable or indirect connection using a modem or TAU. Computer Supported Telephony Application (CSTA) - Supports Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) between the Distributed Network Architecture (D.N.A.) environment and the PBX. Computer Telephony Adaptor (CT Adapter) - Enables an Operator Workstation (OWS) PC to connect to the PBX to perform call handling. DigiBoard - A communications port multiplexor that adds COM ports to a PC. Directory Manager (DMG) - A D.N.A. application that allows administrative personnel to manage subscriber directory entries. Includes capabilities for adding, modifying, and deleting subscriber directory records. D.N.A. Applications - The set of software applications that run on PC clients and are used in combination with one or more PBXs to manage telecommunications operations. D.N.A. Mobile Executive (DME) - The D.N.A. Mobile Executive enables the user to access some of the D.N.A. Application Suite features via WAP enabled devices. The features supported are directory search, click to dial a phone number from search result, retrieve short messages, set message diversion, activate personal number profile, and manual dial. However, the features supported are dependent upon device type. D.N.A. Notes Integration (DNI) - Provides a client-side bi-directional integration to synchronize the message diversions between the Lotus Notes Calendar and D.N.A. server. The templates are supported to provide the needed fields to schedule a message diversion from Lotus Notes. D.N.A. Outlook Integration (DOI) - Provides a client-side bi-directional integration for synchronizing message diversions between Microsoft Office Outlook Calendar and the D.N.A. server. DOI invokes the Outlook Calendar appointment window with a message diversion reason code placed in the fixed calendar fields, to schedule the message diversion from Outlook. D.N.A. Server - D.N.A. platform services and utilities that reside on the server and act as the intermediary between all D.N.A. applications and databases. Aastra Communication Assistant (ACA) - A browser-based GUI end user application that provides the capabilities for directory search, message diversion, personal number profile, diversion, short messages, and call handling features. E&M Signaling Device - Electronic interface between the PBX and recorded voice announcement (RVA) equipment. See also Voice Server Unit (VSU). Extension Line Unit (ELU) - The board in an MD110 that connects to physical subscriber telephones. Extension Manager (EMG) - A D.N.A. application for managing PBX telephone data and extensions. Includes capabilities for administration of telephone and data extensions, messaging, and other PBX elements.
Key Information
General Information Communications Interface (GICI) - The logical interface for the ICU or NIU board in the PBX. Graphical User Interface (GUI) - The user interface presented by D.N.A. applications and management utilities. Hardware Compatibility List (HCL) - A list of hardware tested and verified to work with Windows. The list is available at http://www.microsoft.com/hcl. Information Computer Unit (ICU) - The board in an MD110 BC9 and earlier used for interception and message waiting services. Replaced by the NIU in BC10. Input/output Processor Unit (IPU) - A board in an MD110 that enables external devices to communicate with the MD110. Integrated Digital Network Exchange (IDNX) - For ISDN networks, the IDNX uses routing access information to enhance PBX performance. This unit helps achieve efficient bandwidth utilization, high network reliability and availability, and control over the usage of network resources. Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - ISDN uses a 64 kbit/s channel for transmitting digitally coded speech and data. This digital medium is normally used for circuit-switched connections, packet-switched connections, and semipermanent connections. The complete digital interface (2B+D) consists of two Bchannels for speech/data and one D-channel for signaling. Each MD110 Line Interface Module (LIM) supports up to 240 individual external ISDN lines. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Service (LDAP) - Directory lookup and modification services for LDAP clients accessing the directory databases. Local Area Network (LAN) - A computer network based on one or more centralized server PCs and one or more locally or remotely connected client PCs. Man-Machine Language (MML) - Command interface for PBX controls. MD110 - The Aastra PBX. MD Support (MDS) - A D.N.A. administrative utility that synchronizes PBX configuration data with D.N.A. application databases. Additional capabilities include synchronization connections for serial, Telnet, and Serial Communications Services. Also called MD110 Support. Modem Modulator / demodulator. A communications device that converts digital information from computers into analog electrical signals that can be transmitted over telephone lines and vice versa. A modem may be used to connect a PC to a remote PBX. Modem/Loop Extender - Communications adapter that enables the connection of a PC to a remote (150 feet or more away) MD110 ICU, IPU, or NIU. MX-ONE TSW MX-ONE Telephony Switch. This is equivalent to the BC13 release. MX-ONE TSE MX-ONE Telephony System - Telephony Server. Network Interface Unit (NIU) - MD110 I/O Board interface supporting V.24, Ethernet, and SCSI communications. An NIU V.24 port configured as a network port (Ethernet) provides Telnet service via logical network / MML ports. Up to six logical network / MML ports can be initiated on an NIU. The NIU serves as an alternative to the Input/Output Processor (IPU) interface. Windows File System (NTFS) The Windows file system.
Technical Guide
Operator Workstation (OWS) - A D.N.A. application that enables operators to manage PBX telephone traffic through subscriber databases. Performance Data Manager (PDM) - See Performance Manager. Performance Manager (PMG) - The D.N.A. application that is used to collect traffic data and generate reports. Performance Manager actually consists of two applications: Performance Data Manager (PDM), and Performance Presentation Manager (PPM). PDM is used to extract traffic measurement data from one or more PBX nodes, and PPM is used to generate reports based on data extracted by PDM. Performance Presentation Manager (PPM) - See Performance Manager. Performance Presentation Manager Lite (PPM Lite) - A Web-based application that provides a sub set of the PPM functionality by providing the user with a limited number of reports which may be viewed with a browser. Primary Domain Controller (PDC) - A Windows configuration option. Private Branch Exchange (PBX) - Telephone switching system that supports a private community of subscribers, typically a business environment. Usually managed from a central operator console, PBXs interconnect internal subscribers to one another, and to other subscribers in the public network. Also known as Private Business Exchange and Private Automated Business Exchange (PABX). Remote Data Server (RDS) - D.N.A. Server Utility that allows you to configure the Remote Data Server for D.N.A. database and application support roles, including network database synchronization between PBX nodes, the D.N.A. SQL Server, and D.N.A. Local Databases (LDBs). Serial Communications Server (SCS) - D.N.A. Server Utility that allows you to manage direct, Telnet, SCS, and third party serial communications port settings. Server - The central PC for a D.N.A. network installation. In a network installation, the SQL database and the D.N.A. Server software reside on a server. One or more client PCs may run D.N.A. applications that access the data on the server. The server acts as a database "referee," providing data security, centralized file access, management services, and controlling ID master files and external subscriber directories. For a stand-alone installation, the server and the client is the same physical PC. Stand-alone - An installation of D.N.A. applications on a single PC instead of a network of PCs. In a network installation, the SQL database and the D.N.A. Server reside on a server PC, and one or more client PCs run D.N.A. applications that access the data on the server. In a stand-alone installation, all of these elements (SQL database, D.N.A. Server, and D.N.A. applications) are installed on a single PC. Terminal Adapter Unit (TAU) - Terminal Adapter Unit, a device that enables connection of a PC to a remote MD110. Replaced by the CT-adapter. Time System Server (TSS) Configuration - An optional D.N.A. module that allows connection to an external time monitoring system. Through this interface, diversions can be entered in the time monitoring system and registered in the D.N.A. directory database. TSS also allows control signals for message waiting indications to be sent from D.N.A. to the time monitoring system. Trunk Manager (TRM) - Enables you to assign easily recognizable names to incoming trunks for efficient operator identification and routing.
Key Information
Voice Server Unit (VSU) - Line Interface Module (LIM) hardware for storing voice messages. Voice System Interface (VSI) - An optional D.N.A. module that allows voice mail integration. VSI acts as a compatibility interface between the PBX and Voice Message Processing Systems. Capabilities include call diversion options, support for Message Waiting Indicators (MWI), and increased reliability of voice processing operations. WAP - Wireless Application Protocol. Wide Area Network (WAN) - Inter-office private communication network.
Chapter 2 Applications
Description of Applications
The D.N.A. application suite is an integrated set of applications that allow you to operate and manage your PBX communications resources from stand-alone or networked PCs. The application suite includes the following applications. Application D.N.A. Server * Description The operational and administrative platform for the D.N.A. utilities and data structures. Includes system configuration and maintenance utilities for supporting D.N.A. applications. Localized into the following languages: French | German | Spanish Directory Manager (DMG) OWS support and administrative application that enables you to add, modify, and delete D.N.A. Directory entries. ** Localized into the following languages: Danish | Dutch | Chinese (Simplified) | Finnish | French | German | Italian | Norwegian (Bokmal) | Spanish | Swedish Operator Workstation (OWS) ** Localized into the following languages: Danish | Dutch | Chinese (Simplified) | Finnish | French | German | Italian | Norwegian (Bokmal) | Spanish | Swedish Extension Manager (EMG) D.N.A. application for management of PBX telephone data (extensions, extension groups, equipment assignments, and other resources). ** Localized into the following languages: Dutch | French | German | Spanish Performance Manager (PMG) A traffic measurement and reporting application for network performance analysis. Allows analysts and administrators to capture traffic data and generate D.N.A. traffic management application. Allows operators to access D.N.A. Directory subscriber information and route telephone traffic.
Applications
Application **
Description reports. This application consists of Performance Data Manager (PDM), and Performance Presentation Manager (PPM), two separate applications. PDM extracts traffic measurement data from one or more PBX nodes. PPM creates reports from data extracted by PDM. Localized into the following languages: French | German | Spanish
Aastra Communication Assistant (ACA) *
This application provides directory services to a corporate-wide phone directory on a corporate intranet or to external customers on the internet. You can search a phone directory with your web browser. No other plug-ins are necessary. In addition to the searching the corporate phone directory, Aastra Communication Assistant allows you to send and receive short text messages, set and view message diversion, and make calls. Localized into the following languages: Danish | Dutch | Chinese (Simplified) | Finnish | French | German | Italian | Norwegian (Bokmal) | Spanish | Swedish
Aastra Communication Client (ACC) *
Aastras IP-based software telephony client. ACC offers IP based business class telephony along with directory search, message diversion and personal number management. Localized into the following languages: Danish | Dutch | Finnish | French | German | Italian | Norwegian (Bokmal) | Spanish | Swedish
PPM Lite **
An Internet Server-based version of Performance Presentation Manager. The application is installed as a Web site. Users point their browsers to the PPM Lite server and log on to view traffic analysis reports. Localized into the following languages: French | German | Spanish
D.N.A. Mobile Executive (DME) ***
A WAP application allowing users to access the D.N.A. directory, Message Diversion and Personal Number functions via a WAP enabled device like a cellular phone. Localized into the following languages: Danish | Dutch | Finnish | French | German | Italian | Norwegian (Bokmal) | Spanish | Swedish
*
10
Available in GUI and online Help
Applications
** Available in GUI, online Help, and as electronic Getting Started Guide (Getting Started Guide for DMG, EMG and PMG are in English only). *** Available in GUI and electronic Getting Started Guide Note: All applications are offered in English.
Limitations
Add Component, Add Locale, Database Upsize, Reinstallation
If a component, locale, server database upsize, or reinstallation is needed, these actions must be performed from Control Panel > Add/Remove instead of the CD-ROM (media kit). The side effect of performing the above mentioned activities from the CD-ROM, is that the service pack version information in the About Boxes will be incorrect.
PPM Lite
Observe the following requirements for reliable PPM Lite operation. PPM Lite will not function properly without a session state. The Session Timeout feature for your PPM Lite website must not be disabled. PPM Lite output must be viewed using monitors with minimum display capabilities of 256 colors, and 800 x 600 resolution.
OWS Screen Resolution

The minimum screen resolution requirement for the OWS is 800 x 600 for the Traditional mode, and 1024 x 768 for the Modern mode. The following items will take effect for OWS with the Modern appearance mode when running in a resolution of less than 1024 x 768: The Appearance menu item will be disabled, so the OWS user cannot switch to the Modern appearance mode. If the OWS user previously was running in the Modern mode, a warning message box will be displayed indicating that the Modern mode cannot be supported with the current display resolution, and the traditional appearance mode will be shown. Note: In this case, the OWS Background Color setting for the background of the directory search list will remain in the blue color for the Modern appearance mode. To change this to be compatible with the traditional appearance, change the Background Color setting to gray. If the OWS user switches to a lower resolution while running OWS in the Modern mode, a warning message box will be displayed indicating that the Modern mode cannot be supported with the current display resolution, and the traditional appearance mode will be shown. Note: The warning message will be displayed for Windows XP only. For other operating systems, the traditional appearance mode will be shown without a warning message.
11
Applications
SQL Server 2008 Security mode

D.N.A. 5.6 will only work if the SQL 2008 server is installed with "Mixed mode" / "SQL Server and Windows" security mode. D.N.A. 5.6 does NOT support the "Windows authentication mode" / "Windows only" security mode.
SQL Server 2008 Named Instances

D.N.A. 5.6 supports the new SQL Server 2008 installation option "named instances," but the following feature does NOT work using this option: Call Accounting API. If you are installing SQL 2008 embedded from the D.N.A. installation program using the provided .iss files, you will get a default instance of SQL Server 2008 running in mixed security mode.
Aastra Communication Assistant

Analog phone
When two calls are placed with an analog phone, users cannot toggle between the two calls. When the call on hold is selected in the Call Handling window or Hook Flash pressed on the analog phone, the "talking" call is dropped instead of going on hold.
Screen resolution
If screen resolution is set higher than 1280 x 1024, the background image will tile when the browser window is maximized, or made large enough to display more than 1280 x 1024 pixels inside the window.
Outlook integration
When configuring the Outlook integration in Aastra Communication Assistant, the Microsoft Transaction Server Package user must have Administrator privileges on the Aastra Communication Assistant server computer.
Personal Number Profile Configuration

Only the users primary extension profile can be configured. If a user's profile cannot be configured or you cannot activate another profile, check the following: A D.N.A. account SYSTEM is created with EMG privileges granted. If the "Local System account" has been changed in the D.N.A. RDS service's Properties, you need to add this new user in D.N.A. User Configuration Utility. This new user needs at least privileges for EMG, and all nodes related to users in ACA. Verify that this user can logon to EMG and connect to all the PBX nodes granted to it.
Extension Manager
When Extension Manager is used as a service by ACA, ACC, DME, or ExtLink to update Personal Number, it cannot be run as an application on the D.N.A. server. The Extension Manager application must be run from another machine.
12
Applications
Licenses
Extension Manager
Extension Manager provides the capability to view available licenses for MD sale objects. To view this from Extension Manager, select the Properties menu and then select the License tab. A list of sale objects information, including whether licenses are available, will be displayed. If trial licenses are used, the expiration date will also be displayed in the dialog. Extension Manager interacts with licenses by allowing or disallowing certain sale objects to be initiated, changed, or deleted. Note: If you have modified a license file in the MD with new values for certain objects (e.g., updating a Personal Number license from a Trial license of 0 to 100 new licenses), use MD Support to synchronize the D.N.A. Database with the updated license information. A full synchronization is not required, only a feature that includes the updated license information (e.g., Operator Message Diversion).
Personal Number
Personal Number is the only PBX feature that requires licenses in ACA and ACC. There are different types of Personal Number licenses supported in PBX. ACA and ACC check licenses in the following sequence: 1. If a Trial license is not activated, or already expired, all Personal Number users will be allowed up to five profiles. 2. If a Trial license is activated, and not expired, ACA and ACC will check for the existence of a Personal Number license. All Personal Number users will be allowed up to five profiles, if the Personal Number license is activated. However, ACA and ACC will not check for the license limit and will rely on the PBX to reject the Personal Number initiation if the license limit is reached. 3. If a Trial license and Personal Number license are not activated, ACA and ACC will check for Repeated-Individual-Diversion (RID) license. If it is set, all Personal Number users will be allowed one profile. 4. If there is no Trial license, Personal Number license, or RID license activated, all Generic extensions (including cordless extensions, IP extensions, and mobile extensions) will be allowed one profile.
OneBox Mailbox Integration

PBX systems with a OneBox mailbox can access voice mail, e-mail, or fax mail messages from a unified interface such as Microsoft Outlook or their telephone.
Integration of OneBox and D.N.A.

You may create, modify or delete OneBox mailboxes from the D.N.A. Directory Manager and Extension Manager applications. During D.N.A. setup, the system administrator can assign one or more OneBox servers to an MD110 node via the MD110 Support utility. Supported attributes include a OneBox Server name or IP address, password, and extension ranges.
13
Applications
OneBox Controls
OneBox mailbox integration allows you to configure the following basic mailbox attributes. Extension Callout Capabilities Local or Long Distance Enabling/Disabling of Message Waiting Indicators
14
Applications
Message Retention Duration Message Clearing Options Set-up of Tutorial Prompts Desktop Options on OneBox Message Manager
Automatic Mailbox Creation/Deletion

OneBox mailboxes are automatically created or deleted when assigned subscribers are created or deleted in the D.N.A. Directory Manager.
OneBox Database Synchronization

There is no synchronization between the OneBox Directory and the D.N.A. Directory Manager Database. There is only one-way communication, from Directory Manager towards OneBox. If a mailbox is created with the OneBox System Administration, Directory Manager is not informed. Communication between OneBox and the D.N.A. Server is conducted via Local Area Network (LAN).
OneBox Compatibility with Other Network Elements

This integration is available for D.N.A. Directory Manager and Extension Manage. It is not compatible with D.N.A. Application Suite for Mobility Server or the Application Suite for Business Phone.
OneBox Integration with D.N.A. Voice System Interface

Subscribers have six possible options for initiating message diversions. Any diversion reason that is entered is stored on the D.N.A. Application Suite Server. These options are: Entering a diversion code on the numeric keypad. E.g., * 23 * 4 *1300 # for "Lunch until 1300" From the Aastra Communication Assistant Web interface D.N.A. users can initiate a diversion from Microsoft Outlook D.N.A. users can initiate a diversion from Lotus Notes
15
Applications
Through the Telephone User Interface (TUI) of OneBox An Operator using D.N.A. Operator Workstation can initiate a diversion for any subscriber.
Using Diversion Reasons

OneBox can query diversion reasons from the D.N.A. Server. OneBox can use this information to play an appropriate voice prompt to a caller matching the diversion reason, e.g., "Gina is out for lunch and will be back at 13:00. Please leave a message after the tone, or dial zero for operator."
Note: Communication between OneBox and the D.N.A. Server requires a serial link.
OneBox Intercept Capabilities

Integration with D.N.A. provides OneBox with the ability to: Accept Intercept Call Diversion requests entered by a subscriber Store the diversion information Provide audio intercept messages to callers trying to reach the mailbox subscriber Support various "next action" options presented to the caller Audio intercept messages can present callers a selected set of "next action" options, including: Leaving a message Transfer to operator or personal assistant Hang-up Transfer to another number Hear choices in another language
16
Applications
Messages left in mailboxes are available to mailbox users through normal Voice Mail services. When a caller chooses the "transfer to operator" option, and the call is forwarded from OneBox to the PABX Operator, the original called extension is displayed for the operator. The operator can also retrieve the diversion reason from the D.N.A. Database. The OneBox Telephone User Interface (TUI) is the only means of initiating message diversions from a remote location, without having access to a PC. This integration is available for D.N.A. Directory Manager.
Compatibility with Other Network Elements

MD110 Business Phone
Application Link
MD110 Application Link is a software interface for Computer Telephony Integration. It provides a command and status link between the MD110 and the D.N.A. computer. Application Link allows computer controlled call management. Application Link supports applications provided by computer vendors, by Aastra, or applications developed directly by D.N.A. customers.
General Operations
Using a D.N.A. PC as a telephone console, users can send telephony requests from the PC to the switch through MD110 Application Link. The D.N.A. PC can also receive MD110 events as well as A-party and B-party information through the MD110 Application Link. This information can be used by the computer to route the call or call-related data to a computer display.
17
Applications
Through its Computer Supported Telephony (CSTA) based interface, MD110 Application Link supports a variety of Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), including Dialogic's CT Connect, IBM's Call Path, Novell's TSAPI and Tandem's CAM. MD110 Application Link also supports Microsoft's TAPI via its proprietary protocol. Any MD110 Application Link can be configured to support either CSTAbased API's or TAPI, however one server cannot support both.
Application Link and ACA

ACA is using the TSAPI API. On the server side, MD110 Application Link is required. At each client, a 32-bit Client DLL must be installed that converts the TSAPI API into CSTA messages. Windows XP/2003 clients in a TCP/IP network are supported.

MD110 or MX-ONE Business Phone (BusinessLink)
Name Display in MD110

The D.N.A. Extension Manager application allows users to upload the subscriber names from the Directory Database to the MD110. Since the MD110 has a limited display on digital phones, names are truncated according to two alternative methods. First letter of the first name, one blank and the first letters of the last name First name and the first letter of the last name
Dial By Name Directory

The Dial By Name data in the MD110 is separate from the data for name display on digital phones. The D.N.A. Name Identity Configuration utility allows system administrators to upload names from the Directory Manager Database to the MD110.
18
Applications
Time System Server

D.N.A. Time System Server (TSS) is an optional D.N.A. service module that connects to an external time monitoring system. TSS allows diversions to be entered in the time monitoring system, transferred to the D.N.A. Directory Manager application, and registered in the D.N.A. Directory database. As well, Message Waiting (MWT) indications can be sent from D.N.A. to the time monitoring system. The D.N.A. Time System Server enables the D.N.A. Directory Database to receive message diversions from Time Entry Systems. If an employee checks out, the Time System can forward the check out time to the D.N.A. Server (a special time system protocol via a serial link). The D.N.A. server can then initiate a diversion for the subscriber's phone.

MD110 or MX-ONE Business Phone (BusinessLink)
19
Applications
Solidus eCare / D.N.A. Integration

Solidus eCare can use the D.N.A. Directory Manager database. If a specially named user defined field (UDF) is configured in Directory Manager, Solidus eCare can import either the whole DMG Database or only subscribers with a "YES" entry in this field. The integration must be initiated manually from the Solidus eCare server. Upon log-on of a Solidus eCare user, the Directory Manager database is updated with the actual extension number of the agent (through the D.N.A. Directory Link, <see The D.N.A. Directory Link>). As well, the Solidus eCare agent can receive a copy of the D.N.A. Directory Manager Database. This database is stored locally on the Solidus eCare Agent PC.
LDAP Support in D.N.A.

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) standard dictates how clients, applications, and servers access directory information. LDAP is a directory service protocol that runs over TCP/IP. The LDAP Directory service is based on the client-server model.
20
Applications
D.N.A. includes LDAP Server in the D.N.A. Server and an LDAP Client in the Operator Workstation. The OWS can search any LDAP Server for subscriber information and any LDAP Client (i.e., an Internet browser) is able to search the Directory Manager data through the D.N.A. LDAP Server.
Other Interfaces
Directory Link
The Directory Link interface allows non-D.N.A. applications to modify D.N.A. Directory data. Directory Link can be thought of as a DMG client without a user interface. Directory Link accesses and modifies directory databases through the database API library, and communicates with other DMG and OWS clients through RDS. Directory Link specifications are available for interested Aastra Partners through the Aastra Partner Program.
Extension Link
Extension Link is a real-time interface to the Extension Manager (EMG) application. Extension Link manages PBX extensions and facilities, and is designed to make EMG features reusable for customized configuration management applications. Extension Link specifications are available for interested Aastra Partners through the Aastra Partner Program.
21
Applications
D.N.A. CAAPI
The D.N.A. Call Accounting Application Programming Interface (CAAPI) enables Third-party Call Accounting Applications to utilize Directory Manager data. Directory Manager generates a file containing an extract of the DMG data. Call accounting applications can now import these data on a scheduled basis from a single point-of-entry. D.N.A. CAAPI is compatible with the following Network Elements MD110 or MX-ONE
Change Log
The Directory Change Log allows directory data changes to be collected by external applications like Call Accounting Packages, desktop applications, or other Aastra CTI applications. With previous D.N.A. releases it was necessary to re-import all data after adds/moves/changes. With D.N.A, only changed data is imported. The Change Log is a client component of the Remote Data Server (RDS) that sequentially records all Directory Manager and Directory Link modifications made to the Directory Database.
D.N.A. CTI
This schematic summarizes most D.N.A. CTI Interworking capabilities and illustrates the central role of the D.N.A. Directory.
22
Applications
Mobile Executive
This section contains the administrator issues for the Mobile Executive. If you are using Aastra D4 IP phone only, you can ignore the followings and use MD document for phone configurations.
WAP Gateway
If you use your mobile operator's WAP-service, you will probably have to open up your company's firewall to accept and route WAP-traffic to your Mobile Executive server. If you set up your own WAP-gateway and dial-in connection, you open a "hole" where a potential hacker could sneak in. Many companies will probably not allow this, so to strengthen security, the RAS-server could, for example, be put on a separate LAN segment that is separated from the real company-intranet with a firewall (this is just one way to increase security, there are more).
Phone Setup
Setting up a WAP phone is telephone specific, however, the following information is required for all phones. A phone number (to the company's or your mobile operator's RAS-server). Username and password (to log on to the RAS-server). The address of the WAP-gateway (IP-address). Username and password for the WAP-gateway (if used). The user needs the address for the Mobile Executive server. To log on to Mobile Executive the user needs a username and a password. When users have entered this information to their phones they are ready to use WAP.
Click to Dial
This Call Handling feature can only be enabled if Mobile Extension features are activated. To enable the click to dial feature, complete the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on the Call Handling License. Open the Aastra Communication Assistant Configuration Utility. Define the ApplicationLink Server. Define the access to outside lines for local and long distance calls.
Note: When the user logs on, the primary extension must be a mobile extension.
R320s Phone setup for D.N.A. WAP

Perform the following steps to setup an R320s Mobile Phone to be used with the WAP Gateway in D.N.A. If you don't have all the information required, see your mobile phone administrator.
23
Applications
1. Go to the WAP Services menu and select 6 WAP Settings.
2. Select one of the available profiles, select 4 Access on the WAP Settings menu, select 1 Access Type on the Access menu, and set the Access Type to GSM Data.
3. Return to the Access menu, select 3 Service Center, and enter your Service Center number.
4. Return to the Access menu, select 4 GSM Data, select 1 Phone number on the GSM Data menu, and enter the number of the modem pool used to the WAP Gateway. GSM stands for Global System for Mobile Communications.
5. Return to the GSM Data menu, select 2 Dial Type, and set the Dial Type to Analog.
24
Applications
6. Return to the GSM Data menu, select 3 User ID, and enter the user's ID.
7. Return to the GSM Data menu, select 4 Password, and enter the user's password.
8. Return to the Access menu, select 5 Gateway, select 3 Data Access on the Gateway menu, and enter the IP Address of the WAP Gateway server.
SNMP Agent
SNMP Agent comes with Windows 2000, but is not part of the Typical Installation. To make the SNMP agent for D.N.A. work you must do two things, install D.N.A. and install the Windows master agent. You must have administrator privileges to perform this installation. SNMP is actually a DMI agent that emulates an SNMP agent. The following diagram shows an overview of the different components.
25
Applications
The Monitored Objects

SDS, RDS, TSS, VSI, SCS, LDS and OWS Supervisor are the components that are monitored. They all include a small piece of code that acts like a wrapper between the applications and the as_dmi.exe component. They call functions in the wrapper class to initialize, report status, and shutdown applications. When the applications run for the first time they are added to a persistent table that as_dmi.exe keeps in the Registry. This can be seen under HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite. InstalledAppSuiteComponents is a bit mask where the "known" applications APP_ID are ord together. Each application also has its own value there, describing its current state. These are named with the applications short name.
as_dmi.exe
This is the central repository for the status information. The applications store their current status here and DMI picks it up from here. This component is a singleton. That means that there should only be one instance of it running on the machine, all applications (running on this machine) plus asdmi.exe connect to the same object.
asdmi.exe
This component is the glue that actually makes this into a DMI agent. Its instantiated by the CIMgr (i.e., it comes and goes with it) and there is only one at a time on each machine.
CIMgr & Win32sl

These services make up the core of the DMI run-time system. Win32sl must be started before you can start this service (dependency is set in the Registry). Actually, CIMgr isnt a service. The service is called CIMgrLdr and its only purpose is to run CIMgr. The Registry keys for CIMgr can be seen under HKLM\SOFTWARE\Intel\CIMgr. The Registry keys for Win32sl can be seen under HKLM\SOFTWARE\Intel\DMI 2.0 SDK.
26
Applications
NT SNMP
This is the Windows master agent. Its function is to route SNMP requests to the correct DLL. Its functionality is built on installable sub-agents contained within DLL files that are loaded when the master agent is started (as a Windows service). The Registry entries for NT SNMP can be seen under HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\SNMP.
Dmi2snmp
This is both a DMI management application and an SNMP sub-agent. It performs this double duty as the middle layer that maps SNMP requests to DMI calls and transforms DMI events into SNMP traps. It has no user interface and no configuration, its just loaded by the master agent when it starts and then does its job quietly. The Registry keys for Dmi2snmp can be seen under HKLM\SOFTWARE\Intel\DMI 2.0 to SNMP Mapper.
Remote Data Monitor

The Remote Data Monitor (RDM) utility displays the messages exchanged between the D.N.A. services and their client applications and services. Some of the things you can see with RDM are: Local Database Transfers Clients Registering and Disconnecting from RDS LDAP Queries and Answers GICI Codes Sent to and from the PBX. To start RDM, double-click on DNA_S\SHARE\BIN\rdm.exe.
RDM saves and restores the window size and position in the Registry. By default RDM connects with RDS on the D.N.A. server. If you want to monitor a different service and/or server, select the File > New menu item.
27
Applications
RDM can be launched with command line arguments to connect with any server and service (except "Other"), making it possible to connect very quickly using a batch file or a command line submitted via Start/Run.... Here is the command line syntax: "/server n servername" where "n" is the index of the desired D.N.A. service to be monitored, as listed in the dialog displayed by the File > New menu item. 0) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) LDAP LDS RDS SCS TSS VSI
The server name defaults to the D.N.A. server machine name unless RDM is already connected to a different machine when the dialog is displayed. In that case, just clear the server name combo box to get back to the D.N.A. server.
Captured Filename
The suggested capture filename concatenates the server name, service name, year number, month number and day number with ".log" as the extension. For example: "DnaServer.log" RDM supports the "auto-capture" command line switch "/ac". To run RDM monitoring RDS on the D.N.A. Server and capture the log file with the automatically generated name, place this batch file "RDM.bat" in the Startup folder for the appropriate user ID: start rdm /ac If there are other services you wish to log, add them to the batch file as well. For example to log SCS:
28
Applications
start rdm /ac /server 3
Visitor Registration
Customers can use Visitor Registration to have visitors to a facility register in the lobby. The Visitor Registration dialog box is opened from the Start menu. Start4Programs4D.N.A. Application Suite4Visitor Registration The Visitor Registration dialog box provides edit boxes for Visitor Name, Contact Person, Extension, and Keyword. The Extension field defaults to the contact persons extension, but can be changed. Visitor information is registered with the Add button and unregistered with the Delete button. The Refresh button updates the dialog box fields with the latest information from the database. Visitor information can be printed with the Print... button. Visitor data can also be entered, changed, or deleted in Directory Manager. Visitor entries are distinguished from permanent subscribers on the Options tab of the View/Update Subscriber dialog. A check in the "Show in Visitor Registration" box indicates the selected subscriber is a visitor, and the name will appear in the Visitor Name drop-down list in Visitor Registration. The absence of a check mark means this is a permanent subscriber who may act as a Contact Person and is therefore listed in the Contact Person drop-down list in Visitor Registration.

The intent of the Aastra Communication Assistant (ACA) is to help end users search phone directories, handle calls and manage your personal number and message diversion. Aastra Communication Assistant is a web-based client/server application.
29
Chapter 3 License Administration

License handling with D.N.A. 5.6
With the release of D.N.A. 5.6 the technical license for controlling the Right to Use (RTU) features and functions that are separately licensed from the basic system has been enhanced. The new solution is based on Software keys residing within a special license file to enable/disable the licensed features and functions. D.N.A. 5.6 is delivered with a 60 day fully opened license file giving the customer time to test and purchase features and functions that are licensed. Within 60 days a final license file (permanent license keys) has to be installed in the system to continue to use licensed features and functions. The license file is downloaded from an Aastra Web interface on the Internet for smooth and fast administration. To access the Web application, the user needs a user ID and password (see Providing access to the application). The license file downloaded through the web must be installed in the Enterprise License Manager. Enterprise License Manager controls the licenses for the D.N.A. server. The D.N.A. server periodically communicates with Enterprise License Manager to determine whether the license information has changed. If this is the case, D.N.A. will update the internal license information within the D.N.A. server. The periodic interval is 15 minutes. Please note that the D.N.A. License Viewer will not show updated information until the next periodic interval has passed. However, restarting the Security Data Server service forces restarts the periodic interval and the license information is updated immediately. For detailed information of Enterprise License Manager, please refer to Enterprise License Manager documentation.
The order and information flow

Licenses are ordered in the same way as any other product from Aastra. Since licenses are a non-physical product there is no physical delivery. The concept that Aastra has developed for delivering licenses is based on the needs to be able to handle each ordered product as a individual item independent if it is a physical product or not. When purchasing licenses the deliverable will include a unique identity (Unique Pick Number UPN) for each license or license package ordered.
30
License Administration
The Unique Pick Numbers (UPNs) are used in the License Web application described below to uniquely identify the purchased licenses. To access the ordered licenses, a user Id and password are needed to the License Web application and the unique pick numbers generated for each of the ordered licenses. The unique pick numbers are delivered through e-mail to a pre-defined email address. The unique pick numbers can then easily be re-distributed to the persons that need the unique pick number to be able to generate the license file for a specific D.N.A. system.
Generating Fingerprint file

To generate the fingerprint information needed to install permanent licenses, the fingerprint tool installed by Enterprise License Manager is used. For detailed information of how to use the tool, please refer to Enterprise License Manager documentation.
The Web application

The application is available through the Web page http://ebusiness.aastra.com look for License Administration. Clicking on the link License Administration, the user will be requested to enter a user ID and password. After authentication, the user is able to choose to: Create License Download License Verify License information To obtain a new license file for a D.N.A. 5.6 system the user has to select: Create License At this point the user will be taken to a Wizard which will guide them through the step-by-step process. The main steps are: Step 1. Select the UPN(s) to be assigned to the system. Step 2. Upload the fingerprint file from the D.N.A. system in question. The generated fingerprint file must be uploaded in order to create the new license file. Step 3. Give End Customer Information. Step 4. Verify that all are included before Submit. Step 5. Submit, which will generate a new license file. Submit initiates the creation of the new license file. Step 6. Download the new license file. The new license file can now be installed in the D.N.A. system. A number of checks are built into the Wizard to avoid basic faults. If problem arises when using the tool, support is provided through the Enterprise License Centre.
31
License Administration
Providing access to the application

The method for obtaining a user ID and password to the system is the same as for other applications like e-shop, Weblearn and Info Channel. The normal procedure for the partner to get the user ID and password is to send the user data for the users (name, company and e-mail address) to the contact person at the Partner Unit. The Partner Unit will then forward the information to Global Channel Operations for registration. A partner can also let his resellers obtain access to the applications in the same way. The e-mail address for UPN distribution is supplied in the same way.
Support
For support, please contact your Aastra partner.
32
Chapter 4 Pre-Installation
About Pre-Installation
Before installing D.N.A. Application Suite components, perform checks and preparations necessary for a smooth and successful completion. Specifically, make certain you perform the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Conduct a pre-installation meeting with the customer. Verify that all PC hardware requirements have been addressed. Verify that all software requirements have been addressed. Verify that all PBX requirements have been addressed.
Pre-Installation Meeting
You can avoid many common D.N.A. installation problems by including at least one pre-installation meeting in your preparations. Use this meeting to coordinate your plans with the customer well in advance of the actual installation. The following manuals could be useful for Installation. Windows System Guide MD110 Customer Library SQL Server Books Online (BOL)
Addressing Important Issues

Try to cover all the major issues involved in the installation process. Don't make presumptions about issues that may seem "obvious." For example: Who is responsible for arrangements and preparation of the computer network (IT Dept. or the customer)?
Pre-installation Checklist
Aastra provides a Pre-Installation Checklist to help with installation planning. Use this checklist to identify and verify the all-responsible persons and essential D.N.A. components.
PBX Hardware Requirements

Each PC running Extension Manager, Operator Workstation or Performance Data Manager (PDM) must be connected to the PBX. Extension Manager and PDM utilize connections from the PCs COM or Telnet ports to an IPU board on the MD110, either by direct connection or modem/TAU/Telnet connection. An IPU or NIU board with an adequate number of free ports must be installed on each PBX that will be connected to PCs running Extension Manager and Performance Data Manager.
33
Pre- Installation
Note: For MX-ONE, since only Ethernet connection is available, use NIU for connection option in EMG/MDS. Extension Manager, MD Support, and Performance Data Manager can optionally utilize Access Agent devices for extended communications. For MD110, BC12.1 and above are supported. BC9 is only available for synchronization from MD Support (not for Extension Manager or Performance Manager). For OWS, the following phone types are supported: DBC222, DBC223 and DBC225.
Configuration Options
D.N.A. Application Suite consists of flexible products that can be used in a wide range of configurations. For purposes of this help guide, however, the general configuration options are explained in the following table. Configuration Options Explanation Network vs. stand-alone In a network installation, D.N.A. applications are spread across multiple PCs. One PC (the server) includes the SQL database server and D.N.A. Server software. One or more other PCs (clients) are connected to the server and are used to run the applications. If desired, the server can also be set up as a client that runs applications. In a stand-alone installation, the SQL database server, D.N.A. Server software, and D.N.A. client applications are all installed on a single PC, and there are no connected PCs used to run applications. The standalone PC is set up as both the server and the client for all applications. Single node vs. multi-node Each D.N.A. installation can support one node or multiple nodes. Both network and stand-alone installations can be set up as single node or multi-node.
Stand alone
The following diagram represents a stand-alone installation of an Operator Work Station together with Directory Manager.
34
Pre-Installation
The stand-alone PC contains Microsoft Windows (Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2008 Server), the D.N.A. Server, and the Operator Workstation and Directory Manager applications. The Operator Workstation voice connection to MD110 is by means of a CT adapter via ELU28. In order to provide diversion information to and from the Operator Workstation, the D.N.A. server is connected to the MD110 NIU via TCP/IP.
Single Server with Clients

This configuration represents a single D.N.A. Server with 5 clients. The clients are running Operator Workstation, Operator Workstation VIP, Directory Manager, Extension Manager, Performance Manager, and a call accounting application.
The D.N.A. Server contains Microsoft Windows (Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2008 Server), Microsoft SQL Server, and the D.N.A. Server application. The D.N.A. Server and the MD110 Access Agent are connected via the LAN and TCP/IP. Direct communication between the server and the PBX is necessary to transmit diversion information. All other communication is done through the clients. The Extension Manager and Performance Manager Clients communicate with the PBX via the same physical interface: Extension Manager to make adds, moves and changes in the PBX, Performance Manager to set up measurements in the PBX. Updates of the Extension Manager or Performance Manager Database are transferred from the PBX to the Client and from there to the server database. The call data records (CDRs) are transferred to the Client running the call accounting application via V.24 (as shown in this illustration) or via TCP/IP. The call account application also communicates with the D.N.A. Server via the LAN to get the directory information (like Names, Departments, Cost centers etc.).
35
Pre- Installation
PC Hardware Requirements
This section lists basic hardware requirements for D.N.A. server and client PC installations of up to 500 extensions and < 1000 directory size.
Server
Each PC that will be configured as a D.N.A. server should meet the following requirements. This recommendation includes D.N.A. server, DME server, Aastra Communication Assistant (ACA) server, and ACC server. For larger installations, more memory and faster CPU may be required for satisfactory operation (dependent upon specific D.N.A. installation). Component PC/CPU Memory Minimum Requirement Pentium IV, 2.4 Ghz (or better) 512 Mbytes RAM
Operating System Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2008 Server Monitor and Card 1024 x 768 monitor and video card resolution Mouse CD-ROM COM Ports Microsoft-compatible two-button mouse. Required for server PC only. Communications port requirements are based on which applications will be installed. A DigiBoard or COM port adapter may be used if additional COM ports are needed. For Event Manager, only ports COM1-COM4 are supported. Printer Ports Sound Board IEEE-488 parallel port for printer (LPT1). Server (optional), OWS client (recommended for Visually Impaired option). Server (optional), OWS client (recommended for Visually Impaired option).
Speakers
Specific Requirements
Platform 1 COM port/PBX (used for diversion information). Not applicable if the D.N.A. Access Agent or NIU is used. 1 COM port/Time system. 1 COM port/Voice mail. Database size: 20 Mbytes.
36
Pre-Installation
DMG
Database size: 45 Mbytes for the first 2000 subscribers. 2.5 Mbytes for each additional 500 subscribers. 10 Kbytes / photo (2.5 cm x 1.5 cm in 256 colors). 1 COM port for PBX connection (if using serial interface) Not applicable if D.N.A. Access Agent or Ethernet connection is used. Database size: 6 Mbytes/PBX. 15 Mbytes per 500 extensions + 7.5 Mbytes. 1 COM port for CT adapter. 1 COM port for OWS keyboard (optional). Disk drive (memory) requirement 3 MB per 1000 directory entries 1 COM port for MD110 connection (PDM). Not applicable if the D.N.A. Access Agent or NIU is used. Primary database size: 9 Mbytes/month + 19 Mbytes (for 20 measurements). Auxiliary database size: 9 Mbytes/month + 10 Mbytes (for 20 measurements). Archive files: 4 Mbytes/month.
EMG
OWS
PMG
Client PC
Each PC that will be configured as a D.N.A. client should meet the following requirements. This recommendation includes PMG, DMG, EMG, ACC, OWS and OWS Supervisor. For larger installations with larger directory size and merging of the directory, more RAM is required for the OWS client machine. Component PC/CPU Memory Minimum Requirement Pentium III, 800 Mhz (or better) 256 Mbytes RAM (or better)
Operating System Windows XP Professional, Vista or Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008. Monitor and Card Mouse CD-ROM COM Ports 1024 x 768 monitor and video card resolution Microsoft-compatible two-button mouse. N/A Required for server PC only. Communications port requirements are based on which applications will be installed. For Event Manager, only ports COM1-COM4 are supported. IEEE-488 parallel port for printer (LPT1).
Printer Ports
37
Pre- Installation
Sound Card Speakers
OWS client (recommended for Visually Impaired option). OWS client (recommended for Visually Impaired option).
Specific requirements
Platform DMG EMG No specific requirements. No specific requirements. 1 COM port for PBX connection (for serial interface). Not applicable if the D.N.A. Access Agent or Ethernet connection is used. 1 COM port for CT adapter. 1 COM port for OWS keyboard (optional). 1 COM port for PBX connection (PDM). Not applicable if the D.N.A. Access Agent or NIU is used.
OWS
PMG
Server PC Windows Server 2008

This section lists system requirements for Server PCs running Windows Server 2008.
Recommended System Requirements

Component PC/CPU Memory Minimum Requirement Pentium IV, 1 GHz (or better), 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor 1 GB RAM (or better)
Operating System Windows Server 2008 (32-bit only for D.N.A installations) Hard Disk Monitor and Card Mouse DVD-ROM COM Ports 40 GB hard drive with at least 15 GB of available space 1024 x 768 monitor and video card resolution Microsoft-compatible two-button mouse. N/A Required for server PC only. Communications port requirements are based on which applications will be installed. For Event Manager, only ports COM1-COM4 are supported.
38
Pre-Installation
Printer Ports
IEEE-488 parallel port for printer (LPT1).
Configuration of IIS in Windows Server 2008

1. Open Server Manager by clicking Start, Programs, Administrative Tools, Server Manager. 2. Add new Roles by clicking Roles, Add Roles. 3. Select Application Server and Web Server (IIS). 4. For the Application Server add the following Role Services: Application Server Foundation Web Server (IIS) Support COM+ Network Access Windows Process Activation Service Support
5. For Web Server (IIS) add the following Role Services. Common HTTP features Application Development Management Tools (IIS 6.0 Compatibility)
39
Pre- Installation
FTP Publishing Service
6. When Role services are selected for both Application Server and Web Server (IIS), see to that the sub features are also selected under them.
Client PC Windows Vista Business

This section lists system requirements for client PCs running Windows Vista Business.
Recommended System Requirements

Component PC/CPU Memory Minimum Requirement Pentium IV, 1 GHz (or better), 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor 1 GB RAM (or better)
Operating System Windows Vista Business (32-bit only for D.N.A installations) Hard Disk Monitor and Card Mouse DVD-ROM COM Ports 40 GB hard drive with at least 15 GB of available space 1024 x 768 monitor and video card resolution Microsoft-compatible two-button mouse. N/A Required for server PC only. Communications port requirements are based on which applications will be installed. For Event Manager, only ports COM1-COM4 are
40
Pre-Installation
supported. Printer Ports Sound Card Speakers IEEE-488 parallel port for printer (LPT1). OWS client (recommended for Visually Impaired option). OWS client (recommended for Visually Impaired option).
41
Pre- Installation
Specific Requirements
Additional Hardware Options

Platform DMG EMG No specific requirements. No specific requirements. 1 COM port for PBX connection (for serial interface). Not applicable if the D.N.A. Access Agent or Ethernet connection is used. 1 COM port for CT adapter. 1 COM port for OWS keyboard (optional). 1 COM port for PBX connection (PDM). Not applicable if the D.N.A. Access Agent or NIU is used.
OWS
PMG
Additional hardware that can be installed on a PC includes Ethernet adapter, tape drive, and serial port adapter (or DigiBoard). To install the hardware, follow the manufacturer installation instructions to set the IRQ and I/O address. You may need to run setup programs from the vendor to configure the hardware. IRQ and I/O addresses must be unique for each port and hardware device.
Hard Disk Requirements

When estimating hard disk storage requirements, always allow for the storage requirements of all applications, data, and support files that will reside on the hard disk. The following tables list server and client PC disk space requirements for individual D.N.A. applications. Note: You must have 100 MB free disk space on each server or client PC in order to run the D.N.A. installation program.
Recommendation
For the best reliability, Aastra recommends that you use the Windows NT File System (NTFS). If you are supporting a large system requiring data redundancy, you may use any of Windows RAID software implementations. However, if you choose to employ a hardware RAID solution, make sure it is on the Windows hardware compatibility list (HCL).
Server Disk Space Requirements

The following table lists server PC disk space requirements for individual D.N.A. applications. Note: You must have 100 MB free disk space on each server or client PC in order to run the D.N.A. installation program.
42
Pre-Installation
Application
Executable SQL Database
Caching for GUI Execution Local DB Memory map Log Files files (1MB / 1000) x Total extensions on all nodes x 15 [See D.N.A. Server note]
D.N.A. Server 60 MB for executable executable size files 200 MB for client installation and other files
DNACOMMONDAT 4 MB DNACOMMONLOG 2 MB DNADFDAT 2 MB DNADFLOG 10 MB SECUDAT 4 MB SECULOG 2 MB XDAT - 4 MB XLOG - 4 MB
12 N/A MB/1000 subscriber s
Photos
N/A
10 KB per 2.5 cm x 1.5 cm N/A (1" x ") photo in 256 colors Customer dependent N/A
N/A
N/A
Customer Information Files Directory Manager
N/A
N/A
N/A
9 MB
DIRDBDAT -for fewer than 1 MB 2000 subscribers = [20 MB] -For more than 2000 subscribers = [20 MB + 1 MB/200 x (No. of subscribers - 2000)] DIRDBLOG -for fewer than 200 subscribers = [25 MB] -For more than 2000 subscribers = [25 MB + 1MB/200 x (number of subscribers - 2000)]
[1.5 MB + 4.6 N/A KB x No. of subscribers]
Extension Manager
14 MB
EMGDBDAT = 6 MB x no. of Nodes + total extension on all nodes / 100 x 3 MB
1 MB per 17 KB x No. 1000 of Nodes subscriber EMGDBLOG = 4 MB x no. s of Nodes + Total extension of all nodes/100 x 2 MB [See note (2)] N/A 6 MB/1000 N/A subscriber s 1 MB/1000 subscriber s
0.6 MB x No. of Nodes [See Extension Manager note]
Operator Workstation Performance Manager
7 MB
7 KB per logged-in User ID Archive files - 4 MB per node per month Logs - 2 MB per node
5.5 MB
For minimum 20 measurements: PDMDAT - 10 MB + 9 MB x (primary month + auxiliary month) PDMLOG - 21 MB (if
43
Pre- Installation
Application
Executable SQL Database auxiliary is used) or 11 MB (if auxiliary is not used) + 9 MB x (primary month + auxiliary month) Database device size will be increased based on the number of Active Measurements (e.g., 30-40 = base size x 2) 50-60 = base size x 3
Caching for GUI Execution
Aastra 15 MB Communicatio n Assistant
12 MB/1000 subscriber s (share with ACC if co-exists)
Aastra 6.5 MB Communicatio n Client Mobile Executive 28 MB 12 MB/1000 subscriber s (share with ACA if co-exists)
PPM Lite Notes 4.6 installation Notes 5.0 installation Notes 6.0 installation
14 MB 16 MB 30 MB 7 MB
*N/A = does not apply Notes: D.N.A. Server Assume that MDS is used not more than 15 days per month and the following month the log file is overwritten. Extension Manager Site# database in EMGDBDAT = 6 MB + Extension of the node# / 100 x 3 MB Site# database in EMGDBLOG = 4 MB + Extension of the node# / 100 x 2 MB Assume 20 KB per log file per day and there are 31 log files in a month and EMG is used everyday. The following month the log file will be overwritten.
44
Pre-Installation
Client Disk Space Requirements

The following table lists client PC disk space requirements for individual D.N.A. applications. Important! You must have 100 MB free disk space on each server or client PC in order to run the D.N.A. 5.6 installation program. Application Executable SQL Database Caching for GUI Execution Local DB D.N.A. Server (EXE 24.5 MB) (installation files - 18 MB) Photos N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A* N/A Memory map files Log Files N/A N/A
Directory Manager
9 MB
N/A
N/A
[1.5 MB + 4.6 KB x N/A No. of subscribers]
Extension Manager
14 MB
N/A
1 MB per 1000 17 KB x No. of subscribers nodes
0.6 MB x No. of nodes [see Extension Manager note]
Aastra 37 MB Communication Client Operator Workstation Performance Manager Notes 4.6 Notes 5 Notes 6 7 MB N/A 6 MB/1000 subscribers 1 MB/1000 subscribers N/A 7 KB per logged-in User ID 2 MB per node
5.5 MB
N/A
5 MB 5 MB 5 MB
*N/A = does not apply
45
Pre- Installation
Note - Extension Manager: Assume 20 KB per log file per day and there are 31 log files in a month and EMG is used everyday. The following month the log file will be overwritten.
Software Requirements
Windows
The following are supported: Windows XP Professional (with Service Pack 2), Windows Server 2003 (with Service Pack 1) and Windows Vista Business. Microsoft SQL Server * 2005 Express Engine, Microsoft SQL Server 2005, Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Edition. Important! You must have 100 MB free disk space on each server or client PC in order to run the D.N.A. installation program.
SQL Server
D.N.A. applications use Microsoft SQL Server 2005, Microsoft SQL Server 2005, Express Engine, Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Edition. If a database application does not exist on the server, the D.N.A. application suite installation program prompts you to choose between Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008 for General Latin. Important! DNA 5.6 does not support SQL Server 2000 edition.
Excel
If you are installing Performance Presentation Manager, then Excel 2003 or Excel 2002 with SP2 or later must be installed on each PC where Performance Presentation Manager will be installed. Refer to the Microsoft Excel documentation for installation instructions.
Internet Tools
PPM Lite, Aastra Communication Assistant, Mobile Executive, ACC Server and Personal Assistant must be installed on a server containing Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS 7.0 for Windows Server 2008, or IIS 6.0 for Windows Server 2003). PPM Lite and Aastra Communication Assistant work with Internet browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later. Warning: PPM Lite will not function properly without a session state. The Session Timeout feature for your PPM Lite website must not be disabled.
46
Pre-Installation
Client/MD110 Connections for Operator Workstation

Each client PC running the OWS application communicates with an MD110 via a COM port on the client PC, a CT Adapter (R6A or higher) between the client PC and the MD110, and an ELU 28 interface board in the MD110. The operator telephone also connects to the CT Adaptor or TAU. If the optional OWS Traffic Keyboard is provided, it is connected to a separate COM port on the OWS client PC. The following figure illustrates the possible connections between the client OWS PC and the MD110.
To connect an Operator Workstation client PC to an MD110

1. Connect the telephone wire from the ELU 28 board in the MD110 to the "PBX" jack on the CT Adapter. 2. Connect the operator telephone (a D3 phone, for example) to the "PHONE" jack on the CT Adapter. 3. Connect the CT Adapter to an available COM port on the PC using an RS-232 cable. 4. Follow MD110 instructions to initialize the ELU port for the Operator Workstation. 5. If a headset is used, set up the headset based on the headset installation guide. 6. If the optional Traffic Keyboard is available, connect it to an available COM port on the PC.
Server/MD110 Connection for Operator Workstation

If you use the Operator Workstation Message Diversion or Message Waiting features, a connection between a COM port on the server PC and a GICI port on the ICU board for the MD110 is required. If multiple MD110 nodes are supported, a separate line is required for each node. This connection can be direct or remote. The following figures show cable connections for a direct connection and remote connection between the server PC and the MD110.
Direct/Local Connection
47
Pre- Installation
Direct LAN/Telnet Connection
Remote Connection Through Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) After connecting the server PC to the MD110, initialize the GICI port on the ICU board as described in the MD110 documentation.
Client/ MX-ONE Telephony Server Connections for Operator Workstation

The Operator Workstation connects to the MX-ONE Telephony Server via an Ethernet network connection for call traffic handling. The media data from the MX-ONE Telephony Server is not terminated at the Operator Workstation. Instead, the media data terminates at a D4 Phone with specialized firmware module (OMD).
To connect an Operator Workstation client PC to Telephony Server

1. Select the Signaling channel as Network in the PBX Operator Console Configuration
48
Pre-Installation
2. Enter the PBX Server Name or IP address and the TCP Port of the MX-ONE Telephony Server. 3. Connect the Operator Media Device (OMD) in the LAN. Provide the Telephony Server and the Software server IP address in the Network setting of the OMD phone. 4. Close the OWS application and launch it again. 5. Operator Extension logon dialog is prompted after OWS is logged in. Provide the Operator Extension and password defined in the Telephony Server to register the OWS Application. 6. Logon the OMD phone with the same extension and password. OMD phone is also registered in the Telephony Server.
Server/ MX-ONE Telephony Server Connection for Operator Workstation

The following figures show cable connections for a direct connection between the server PC and the Telephony Server. Local Connection
Configuration Management Hardware Connections

The D.N.A. Application Suite contains the following configuration Management applications. MD110 Support Extension Manager Performance Data Manager Each server or client PC running a configuration management application communicates with an MD110 via a COM port or Ethernet connection on the client PC and either an IPU or NIU board in the MD110, and an Ethernet connection in the MX-ONE. These connections can be shared with other applications connecting to the MD110/MX-ONE. Make a direct connection by connecting an RS-232 cable between a COM port on the client PC and the IPU board on the MD110. TCP/IP LAN connection is achieved through an access agent connected to an IPU board. For a remote connection, the client PC is connected to a TAU or modem that connects to a TAU or modem on the MD110. For MX-ONE, only Ethernet connection is supported, so the option selected in EMG/MDS must be NIU. The following schematics show connection configurations for direct and remote communication.
49
Pre- Installation
Hardware Connections for Extension Manager

Each server or client PC running a configuration management application communicates with an MD110 via a COM port or Ethernet connection on the client PC and either an IPU or NIU board in the MD110, and an Ethernet connection in the MX-ONE. These connections can be shared with other applications connecting to the MD110/MX-ONE.
50
Pre-Installation
Make a direct connection by connecting an RS-232 cable between a COM port on the client PC and the IPU board on the MD110. TCP/IP LAN connection is achieved through an access agent connected to an IPU board. For a remote connection, the client PC is connected to a TAU or modem that connects to a TAU or modem on the MD110. For MX-ONE, only Ethernet connection is supported, so the option selected in EMG/MDS must be NIU. The following schematics show connection configurations for direct and remote communication.
51
Chapter 5 SQL Installation

SQL Server 2005
Before installing SQL Server 2008, we recommend that you review the "ReadmeSQL2008.htm" and "RequirementsSQL2008.htm" sections prior to installing this release. Important! When installing SQL Server 2005 for the D.N.A. Application Suite, it is recommended you do the Custom installation and select Dictionary Order, casesensitive for the Sort Order. When installing SQL Server 2008 from a network drive, do not use a Universal Naming Convention (UNC) file path such as: \\<Servername>\Servers\ setup.exe Instead, map a drive to the appropriate location and run the Setup program from the drive letter, for example: F:\Servers\setup.exe
To install SQL Server 2008

1) Use Setup.exe to install SQL Server 2008 from a network drive or CD-ROM. 2) If Microsoft SQL Server 2008 installation is started on a Windows 2008/2003 Server, make sure to first install Windows Installer 4.5. The setup will be available at F:\ Servers\redist\Windows Installer\, where F:\ is a network mapped drive or a CD-Drive. 3) When Microsoft SQL Server 2008 setup starts up, it will detect if the pre-requisites are installed. If not installed, setup will install the pre-requisites, such as .NET Framework 3.5 SP1, Windows Installer 4.5 and PowerShell. 4) From the autorun dialog, click Run the SQL Server Installation Wizard. 5) On the End User License Agreement page, read the license agreement, and then select the check box to accept the licensing terms and conditions. Accepting the license agreement activates the Next button. To continue, click Next. To end Setup, click Cancel. 6) On the SQL Server Component Update page, Setup installs software required for SQL Server 2008. For more information about component requirements, click the Help button at the bottom of the page. To begin the component update process, click Install. To continue after the update completes, click Finish. 7) On the Welcome page of the SQL Server Installation Wizard, click Next to continue. 8) On the System Configuration Check (SCC) page, the installation computer is scanned for conditions that may block Setup. For information about configuration check items, click Help at the bottom of the page or see Check Parameters for the System Configuration Checker. 9) Next. On the Registration Information page, enter information in the Name and Company text boxes. To continue, click
52
SQL Installation
10) On the Components to Install page, select the components for your installation. A description for each component group appears in the Components to be Installed pane when you select it. To install individual components, click Advanced. Otherwise, click Next to continue. 11) Note: When installing SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 Express Edition for the D.N.A. Application Suite, you must have the SQL Server Database Services component installed. 12) If you clicked Advanced on the previous page, the Feature Selection page is displayed. On the Feature Selection page, select the program features to install using the drop-down boxes. To install components to a custom directory, select the feature and then click Browse. 13) 14) On the Instance Name page, select a default or named instance for your installation. On the Services Accounts screen, select the Use the Local System account option and click Next >.
15) On the Authentication Mode page, choose the authentication mode as Mixed Mode. Enter and confirm a strong password for the sa login. To proceed, click Next. 16) On the Collation screen, select SQL Collations and select Dictionary order, case-sensitive from the Sort Order drop-down list and click Next >. 17) 18) Click Next > on the Ready to Install Dialog to proceed to the Setup Process dialog. When the installation completes, click Exit on the Microsoft SQL Server options page.
Upgrading to SQL Server 2005

Upgrading from Microsoft SQL Server version 2000 to Microsoft SQL Server 2008 is one of the basic choices offered by the SQL Server 2008 setup. Upgrade is possible when SQL 2008 is applied over SQL Server 2000.
Security
For security reasons, you should change the default sa Login ID and blank password of MS SQL Server. 1) In the Service Manager window, open the registered D.N.A. Servers tree and the Logins tree. 2) 3) Double-click on sa to open the Manage Logins dialog box. Change the Login Name and Password and click Modify.
Note: After changing the "sa" password, also change your "Login ID Password" for the registered D.N.A. Server in SQL Enterprise Manager. You can do this by right-clicking the Server Name.
Memory
SQL Server 2008 is configured dynamically. However, memory should be limited to for SQL Server use. To set a maximum value for memory (Enterprise Manager) 1) Expand a server group. 2) Right-click a server. 3) Click Properties. 4) Click the Memory tab. 5) In the memory box, select maximum size (MB), and slide it to the desired position.
53
SQL Installation
Dependent Packages for SQL 2008

Dot Net 3.5 SP1 The Dot Net 3.5 SP1 package is available in the Installation package under the path \dna\DBEngineInstall\SQLExpress2008 The package can be used for both Windows 2003 Server and Windows 2008 Server Operating Systems. Windows Installer 4.5 Windows Installer 4.5 Package needs to be downloaded from Microsoft site if SQL 2008 Express edition is used. If SQL 2008 Standard/Enterprise edition is used, the SQL installation package will install the Installer. In case of SQL 2008 Express edition, Windows Installer 4.5 needs to be installed manually. Power Shell PowerShell for Windows 2003 Server needs to be downloaded from Microsoft site, if SQL 2008 Express edition is selected. In case of SQL 2008 Standard/Enterprise edition the Installation SQL installation package will install Powershell package will install the package. In case of Windows 2008 Server Powershell need to be configured using Server Manager under features.
SQL Server 2005

Before installing SQL Server 2005, we recommend that you review the "ReadmeSQL2005.htm" and "RequirementsSQL2005.htm" sections prior to installing this release. Important! When installing SQL Server 2005 for the D.N.A. Application Suite, it is recommended you do the Custom installation and select Dictionary Order, case-sensitive for the Sort Order. When installing SQL Server 2005 from a network drive, do not use a Universal Naming Convention (UNC) file path such as: \\<Servername>\Servers\ setup.exe Instead, map a drive to the appropriate location and run the Setup program from the drive letter, for example: F:\Servers\setup.exe
To install SQL Server 2005

1. Use Setup.exe to install SQL Server 2005 from a network drive or CD-ROM. 2. If Microsoft SQL Server 2005 installation is started on a Windows 2000 Server, make sure to first install Windows Installer 3.1. The setup will be available at F:\ Servers\redist\Windows Installer\, where F:\ is a network mapped drive or a CD-Drive. 3. When Microsoft SQL Server 2005 setup starts up, it will detect if the pre-requisites are installed. If not installed, setup will install the pre-requisites, such as .NET Framework 2.0. 4. From the autorun dialog, click Run the SQL Server Installation Wizard. 5. On the End User License Agreement page, read the license agreement, and then select the check box to accept the licensing terms and conditions. Accepting the license agreement activates the Next button. To continue, click Next. To end Setup, click Cancel.
54
SQL Installation
6. On the SQL Server Component Update page, Setup installs software required for SQL Server 2005. For more information about component requirements, click the Help button at the bottom of the page. To begin the component update process, click Install. To continue after the update completes, click Finish. 7. On the Welcome page of the SQL Server Installation Wizard, click Next to continue. On the System Configuration Check (SCC) page, the installation computer is scanned for conditions that may block Setup. For information about configuration check items, click Help at the bottom of the page or see Check Parameters for the System Configuration Checker. 8. On the Registration Information page, enter information in the Name and Company text boxes. To continue, click Next. 9. On the Components to Install page, select the components for your installation. A description for each component group appears in the Components to be Installed pane when you select it. To install individual components, click Advanced. Otherwise, click Next to continue. Note: When installing SQL Server 2005 or SQL Server 2005 Express Edition for the D.N.A. Application Suite, you must have the SQL Server Database Services component installed. 10. If you clicked Advanced on the previous page, the Feature Selection page is displayed. On the Feature Selection page, select the program features to install using the drop-down boxes. To install components to a custom directory, select the feature and then click Browse. 11. On the Instance Name page, select a default or named instance for your installation. 12. On the Services Accounts screen, select the Use the Local System account option and click Next >. 13. On the Authentication Mode page, choose the authentication mode as Mixed Mode. Enter and confirm a strong password for the sa login. To proceed, click Next. 14. On the Collation screen, select SQL Collations and select Dictionary order, case-sensitive from the Sort Order drop-down list and click Next >. 15. Click Next > on the Ready to Install Dialog to proceed to the Setup Process dialog. 16. When the installation completes, click Exit on the Microsoft SQL Server options page.
Upgrading to SQL Server 2005

Upgrading from Microsoft SQL Server version 2000 to Microsoft SQL Server 2005 is one of the basic choices offered by the SQL Server 2005 setup. Upgrade is possible when SQL 2005 is applied over SQL Server 2000.
Security
For security reasons, you should change the default sa Login ID and blank password of MS SQL Server. 1) 2) 3) In the Service Manager window, open the registered D.N.A. Servers tree and the Logins tree. Double-click on sa to open the Manage Logins dialog box. Change the Login Name and Password and click Modify. Note: After changing the "sa" password, also change your "Login ID Password" for the registered D.N.A. Server in SQL Enterprise Manager. You can do this by right-clicking the Server Name.
Memory
55
SQL Installation
SQL Server 2005 is configured dynamically. However, memory should be limited to for SQL Server use. To set a maximum value for memory (Enterprise Manager) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Expand a server group. Right-click a server. Click Properties. Click the Memory tab. In the memory box, select maximum size (MB), and slide it to the desired position.
Unattended SQL Server Installation

Unattended SQL Server installation is convenient if you want to install several SQL Servers with identical configurations. The Setup program reads the installation settings from a pre-defined installation information file instead of prompting in the SQL Server installation wizard. If a database application does not exist on the server, the D.N.A. application suite installation program prompts you to choose between SQL Server 2008 Express and Microsoft SQL Server 2008 for Simplified Chinese, and SQL Server 2008 Express, Microsoft SQL Server 2008, or Microsoft SQL Server 2005 for General Latin. If you select SQL Server, you are asked for the SQL Server CD key, setup files, and the location of the installation information file (*.iss). The installation information file location defaults to the template that comes with D.N.A. installation. The default installation information file provided in the D.N.A. application suite installation contains the recommended options for the SQL Server Enterprise edition. The following language settings are used in these files. General Latin Dictionary order, case-sensitive, for use with ISO code page 1252 character set. Simplified Chinese Dictionary order, case-sensitive, for use with Simplified Chinese code page 936 character set. If you need to create your own *.iss file you can find a text file "SQL2008_Collation_Name.txt" located on the installation CD under \dna\DBEngineInstall. This file contains all SQL collation names and you can use it as reference if another SQL Collation is preferred than the predefined ones.
Install SQL Server 2008 Standard Edition Unattended

A pre-defined SQL Server configuration template is provided for customers who use SQL Server 2008 Standard Edition. The template setup_std_template.ini is located at installation CD \dna\DBEngineInstall\ MSSQL2008\Configurations. Please follow the procedures below to use it. 1) Copy setup_std_template.ini to a system on the network that can be accessed by D.N.A Server installation. 2) Modify setup_std_template.ini a) Add your SQL Server CD key at line PIDKEY=xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx.. This step is mandatory
56
SQL Installation
b) Specify the SQL Collation in the section SQLCOLLATION = SQL_Latin1_General_Cp1_CS_AS_KI_WI During D.N.A Server installation 1) At the Database Application Selection dialog box, select Microsft SQL Server 2008. 2) At the Database Application Installation Configuration dialog box, enter (or browse for) the destination path of SQL Server files. Enter (or browse for) the location of the SQL Server installation files. Enter the location of your SQL Server configuration file. This is where the modified setup_std_template.iss with your SQL CD key is defined. Leave SQL Server CD Key as blank. Note: A hard-coded password, Aastra123 is assigned to the sa login in setup_std_template.ini, because sa login should never have a blank password (for security reasons). You should change this password at your earliest opportunity. Please refer to Change SQL SA password for details.
Install SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition Unattended

A pre-defined SQL Server configuration template is provided for customers who use SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition. The template setup_std_template.ini is located at installation CD \dna\DBEngineInstall\MSSQL2005\Configurations. Please follow the procedures below to use it. 1) Copy setup_std_template.ini to a system on the network that can be accessed by D.N.A Server installation. 2) Modify setup_std_template.ini a) Add your SQL Server CD key at line PIDKEY=xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx.. This step is mandatory b) Specify the SQL Collation in the section SQLCOLLATION = SQL_Latin1_General_Cp1_CS_AS_KI_WI During D.N.A Server installation: 3) At the Database Application Selection dialog box, select Microsft SQL Server 2005. 4) At the Database Application Installation Configuration dialog box, enter (or browse for) the destination path of SQL Server files. Enter (or browse for) the location of the SQL Server installation files. Enter the location of your SQL Server configuration file. This is where the modified setup_std_template.iss with your SQL CD key is defined. Leave SQL Server CD Key as blank. Note: A hard-coded password, Aastra123 is assigned to the sa login in setup_std_template.ini, because sa login should never have a blank password (for security reasons). You should change this password at your earliest opportunity. Please refer to Change SQL SA password for details.
Change SQL SA password

For security reasons, you should never have a blank password for the sa login. If you install SQL Server 2008 or Express 2008 through D.N.A. 5.6 installation, a hard-coded password Aastra123 is assigned to the sa login. If you install SQL Server 2005 or SQL Express Engine through D.N.A 5.6 installation a hard-coded password Aastra123 is assigned to the sa login. You should change this password at your earliest opportunity. If SQL Server is already installed and blank password is used, you should change it.
57
SQL Installation
1. If 2005/2008 is used you can use SQL Server Management Studio to change the password. You can also do it via command line as below. Note: If you use D.N.A. DBCP utility for database backup, you must run DBCP to backup your databases again after sa password change. This is because backup files created with the old sa password cannot be restored with the new sa password.
Install SQL Server Service Pack

Note: Service Packs for SQL 2005 and 2008 can be applied if needed.
SNMP Master Agent

1. Open the Control Panel by selecting Start4Settings4Control Panel. 2. Open the Add/Remove Program Properties dialog box by double-clicking on Add/Remove Windows Components. 3. Scroll down to Management and Monitoring Tools. 4. Click this line once (dont click in the checkbox). 5. Click the Details button. A new dialog-box appears. 6. Find the line Simple Network Management Protocol, click in the checkbox to enable it and click the OK button. 7. Click the Next > button; Windows 2000 will now start to install this component. After a few seconds the Insert disk message box is opened. 8. Click OK. The Insert disk dialog box is opened. This means that Windows needs to know where it can find the necessary files to complete this installation. These files are on the Windows 2000 distribution CD. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive of this machine or enter the path to where this CD is located. 9. Click OK to continue the process. 10. When the Windows Component Wizard is displayed, click the Finish button. 11. This returns you to the Add/Remove Windows Components dialog box. 12. Click Close. 13. Close the Control Panel. 14. Click Start4Programs4Administrative Tools4Services. 15. In the right pane, find the line SNMP Service, right-click and choose Properties. 16. The SNMP Service Properties dialog box is opened. This dialog-box has seven tabs. Click the Agent tab. 17. Enter your name in the Contact field and the address where the machine is located in the second text field. You can leave the checkboxes under Service with the default values. 18. Click the Traps tab. 19. Enter public as the community name and click the Add button next to it. 20. Click the Add button under the Trap Destinations list and enter the IP address or hostname of the machine running EVM in the small dialog-box that pops-up. 21. Click the Add button. 22. Click the Security tab.
58
SQL Installation
23. Make sure Send Authentication Trap is checked, that public has READ CREATE rights, and that Accept SNMP Packets from Any Host is checked. These settings are good starting points since they dont put many restrictions on the SNMP traffic. When you feel comfortable with the SNMP configuration, feel free to change them. 24. Click OK to save these settings. Remember to stop and re-start the SNMP service to make the settings active.
59
Chapter 6 D.N.A. Installation

About Installation
Before installing D.N.A. application software, be sure all PCs and PBX nodes are set up as described in Hardware Requirements. Software installation for most D.N.A. applications is separated into server installation and client installation.
Hardware Connections
You must perform or verify installation of all necessary communications and signaling connections before proceeding to software installation.
Software Installation
Server Installation. For a D.N.A. Server installation, all server software is installed on one PC, and the client software is then installed on one or more PCs connected to the server. Client Installation. Client software can be installed from a network D.N.A. Server or directly from a D.N.A. software CD-ROM inserted in the client PC's CDROM drive.
Installation Checklists
This section provides checklists for D.N.A. server and client workstation installation. Use these checklists to assist in installing D.N.A. Application Suite Version components.
Using the Checklists

These checklists help insure that important installation issues are not overlooked. Perform the steps listed in each checklist and check off each item as you proceed through each D.N.A. component installation. For future reference, leave copies of these records with the customer and with the responsible Aastra Customer Services location.
For More Information

For more information, see the user documentation delivered with the individual D.N.A. products.
Submit Your Comments

Send comments and remarks about D.N.A. installation checklists and other Technical Guide issues to the EBC Enterprise Support Center.
60
D.N.A. Installation
Pre-installation Checklist
Use this pre-installation checklist to verify and identify all hardware and software components before beginning the installation process.
Installation Profile
List the customer identity along with all software and hardware components to be included in this installation. Customer: Hardware Server: _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ Software D.N.A.: Software PBX: _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ Responsible Contact: _____________________________________________
Number of client PC's: _____________________________________________ Installation Eng. D.N.A.: _______________________________________ Installation Date: _____________
Installation Component Verification

c
Windows Server 2003, Standard or Enterprise -or- Windows Server 2008, Standard or Enterprise Windows XP Professional + SP 2 -or- Windows Vista Business Windows SQL Server 2005 Windows SQL Server 2005 Express Windows SQL Server 2008 Windows SQL Server 2008 Express D.N.A. Access Agent: Base System Version R___ V__.__.__ Date: ______________
c c c c c c
Note: Microsoft SQL Server can be installed by D.N.A. Installation.
Installation Product Identification

Product ID Windows Server __________________ Product ID Windows Workstation: __________________, __________________, __________________, __________________, __________________, __________________, Product ID SQL SERVER: Product ID (D.N.A. Server): Product ID DMG: Product ID OWS: Product ID PMG: __________________, __________________, __________________, __________________, __________________,
61
D.N.A. Installation
Product ID EMG:
__________________,
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Application Suite Installation

This section helps you to prepare for the decisions and responses required during the installation process. You will encounter a different prompts and dialog boxes depending on whether yours is a new installation, a re-installation, a server installation, or a client installation. You can install D.N.A. applications on a client PC or server. When you install the D.N.A. applications, you may include just the components you want, ranging from a minimal configuration to the entire suite of D.N.A. applications. The full installation installs all D.N.A. components. MD110 D.N.A. runs on the following Microsoft Windows operating systems. Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003, Standard or Enterprise Windows Server 2008, Standard or Enterprise Windows Vista Business
Installation Features
New installation features for D.N.A. include: Customizable System The application licenses must be enabled through Enterprise License Manager and user privileges through User Configuration. The node information such as node name, communication method, etc. must be set through MD110 Support. The user-defined fields in the Directory database must be defined through Directory Configuration. Pre-configured System The installation defines users and privileges and configures the node information and communication with the PBX. The desired user-defined fields for Directory Manager will also be defined. Application licenses are enabled through Enterprise License Manager. Note: The pre-configured system does not support the configuration of communication with the MX-ONE. Silent Installation You may use the graphical D.N.A. setup.exe interface, or the "Silent Installation" method supported by a preconfigured .ini file. (Silent Installation only applies to client installations.)
Pre-Configured System
You can use a pre-configured installation file (dna.cfg) to retrieve system information and make the installation automatic. The dna.cfg file contains default settings for pre-configured information that you can edit for your installation. The installation program prompts you for the location and file name. In addition, the installation program validates the pre-configured information file to make sure all required information is defined correctly.
User Names and Privileges

There are two types of users that can be defined in the pre-configuration information file:
62
D.N.A. Installation
Administrator Account All application with pre-defined (highest privilege) privileges are assigned. Regular User Account The desired application with associated predefined privilege (highest privilege) will be assigned.
MD110 Communications
Node Information All information associated with a node can be defined. For example, Node name, BC release, MD password. Communication with MD110 Your choice of communication with the MD110 can be defined. For example, Direct, Modem, IPU and NIU. The Registry settings are loaded to the client system for all installed applications that requires the MD110 interface, such as MD Support, Extension Manager, and PDM.
GICI Configurations
You can specify GICI configuration methods, including Direct, Telnet, and NIU.
PBX Data Synchronization

After installation has completed successfully and the system is rebooted, the system will be automatically logged on with the system user and password you defined. The synchronization of PBX data then can be started automatically from a batch file that contains the command for data synchronization for each individual node. The synchronization is executed one node at a time. Note: Data that can be synchronized are different between the MD110 and the MX-ONE.
User-defined Fields for Directory Manager

The desired user-defined fields for all categories such as Department, Profile, Person, Confidential, Room, Function, External, and Information can be defined. The searchable flag and icon can also be identified.
Configuration File Parameters

You can edit the following parameters in the dna.cfg file for a pre-configured installation. [NTlogon] Validate=YES (validate user) DomainName=domain UserName=user Password=123456 ;sample of MDS remote connection with phone number specified. ASB501Release=8(BC10),9(BC11),or 10(BC12.1) [MDSConfiguration1] Enable=1 ConnectionType=REMOTE SiteName=Test Remote NIU_Password=HELP IPU_Password=HELP NIULoginUserName=MDUSER ASB501Release=8 Port=1
63
D.N.A. Installation
phonesetup1=6632 ;sample of MDS direct connection. ASB501Release=8(BC10),9(BC11),or 10(BC12.1) [MDSConfiguration2] Enable=1 ConnectionType=DIRECT SiteName=Test Direct NIU_Password=HELP IPU_Password=HELP NIULoginUserName=MDUSER ASB501Release=8 Port=2 ;sample of MDS telnet connection. ASB501Release=8(BC10),9(BC11),or 10(BC12.1) [MDSConfiguration3] Enable=1 ConnectionType=TELNET TelnetSetup1=195.150.112.120,4,,, TelnetSetup2=195.150.101.182,3,agent,password, SiteName=Test Telnet NIU_Password=HELP IPU_Password=1HELP NIULoginUserName=MDUSER ASB501Release=8 [GICIPortConfiguration1] Enable=1 PortName=test direct ConnectionType=DIRECT DNFillerCharacter=@ InformationSystemID=00 MaxDNLength=5 MaxTerminalID=2 BaudRate=9600 DataBits=8 StopBits=1 Parity=1 FlowControl=0 OutputTimeDelay=50 Port=COM2 [GICIPortConfiguration2] Enable=1 PortName=test niu ConnectionType=NIU
64
D.N.A. Installation
DNFillerCharacter=A InformationSystemID=00 MaxDNLength=5 MaxTerminalID=2 NIUPortID=12345 [GICIPortConfiguration3] Enable=1 ConnectionType=TELNET PortName=test telnet DNFillerCharacter=@ InformationSystemID=00 TelnetAddress=195.150.113.98 TelnetAccount=abcd TelnetPassword=test OutputTimeDelay=100 DNFillerCharacter=64 InformationSystemID=00 MaxDNLength=8 MaxTerminalID=2 [UserPrivileges] Enable=1 tstusr=test user;test user description;USER;MDS,1,2,3;PCOPI tstusr2=test user2;test user2 description;all,3 [UserDefinedFields] Enable=1 ;Number of Profile fields is even number from 8 to 20 NumberProfileFields=14 Profile1= Prof Assistant,6, Yes, Assistant Profile2= Prof Cost_Center, 1, No,None Person1 = Person Home, 43, Yes, HOME Confidential1 = Conf password, 53 Department1 = My department, 31, NONE External1 = My external, 3, MAIL Function1 = function Cellular number, 38, Yes, CELLULAR Room1= room Secretary Name, 6, NO, SECRETARY Information1 = My info, 29, yes, NONE
Upgrading To D.N.A. 5.6

This information only applies to customers with existing D.N.A. systems already installed. If you are doing a new installation from the CD containing D.N.A. 5.6, you will not need to upgrade your system.
65
D.N.A. Installation
To apply D.N.A. 5.6 to your existing D.N.A. system you will need to upgrade using the new CD containing D.N.A. 5.6. DNA 5.5 version can only be upgraded to DNA 5.6. Upgradings from DNA 5.3 or DNA 5.4 versions to DNA 5.6 version is not recommended. There are basically two different environments of older D.N.A. systems. 1. D.N.A. 4.1 / 5.0 / 5.1 running on either SQL Server 7.0 or MSDE 2. D.N.A. 5.0 / 5.1 / 5.2 / 5.3 / 5.4 running on SQL Server 2000 or MSDE 2000 3. DNA 5.4 / 5.5 running on SQL Server 2000 or 2005 For any scenario it is strongly recommended to backup the older system before starting the upgrade.
Methodology to upgrade the environments is as follows:
Upgrading from D.N.A. running on SQL Server 2000

1. Upgrade SQL Server. Upgrade SQL Server 2000 to SQL Server 2005 or SQL Server 2008. If running on Windows 2000, upgrade your operating system to Windows 2008 Server or Windows 2003. 2. Upgrade D.N.A. Upgrade the existing D.N.A. system to 5.6.
Transferring D.N.A. from one computer to another

If your existing D.N.A. installation is running on an older hardware platform there might be a need to transfer the complete system from one computer to another.
Upgrade D.N.A. Server and SQL Server on your current D.N.A. Server computer
The upgrading of SQL Server and D.N.A. should always be carried out on the computer that is currently running the D.N.A. system. If you later want to move your D.N.A. installation from one computer to another, you must ensure that the two computers are on the same network and are able to use named pipe connections between them.
Install the new D.N.A. 5.6 system

Next, install a new D.N.A. 5.6 system on your new machine. Use SQL Server 2005 or 2008, or Windows 2003 or 2008, but install with the same number of extensions, sites and extensions per site as the old system. Also set the PMG database settings identical to the old system. Note: After the D.N.A. Server has been installed, a full PBX synchronization is required.
Transfer the databases

Finally, use the D.N.A. dbcp tool to backup the databases to flat files. Move the files from the old system to your new and use the dbcp tool to restore data from files to the database engine you are using at the new system. Reboot the PC after restoring the databases.
66
D.N.A. Installation
Upgrade D.N.A. clients

Do not forget to load any available service packs or hot fixes for Windows, SQL Server or D.N.A. When done, test the applications on the server computer and finally upgrade the clients.
Installing Enterprise License Server

A new license server Enterprise License Server will be used for D.N.A. 5.6. D.N.A. Application Suite Server installation will launch the Enterprise License Server if an older version of D.N.A. is detected.
Enterprise License Server Installation Wizard

This table lists the screens and prompts displayed when you perform an upgrade. Wizard Screen and Options Enterprise License Manager Installation Welcome Choose License Server Auto-discover license server(s) Manually specify a host Install license server locally Explanation D.N.A. Application Suite installation launches Enterprise License Manager installation. Click Next > to continue. Choose your license server host among three options. Choose Auto-discover to list all the Enterprise license servers in your network. You can also specify the host that contains a license server and also define the port number. The third choice is to install license server on the local machine. This screen is displayed when Auto-discover is selected. All the hosts on the network that contain the license server will be displayed. The server with permanent license will be list first.
Auto-discovering license servers
Server Installation
D.N.A. application setup now recommends which applications to install and where to install them. For example, you will probably want to choose the Typical option in the installation wizard, which installs all D.N.A. applications. Alternatively, you may choose the Custom option that allows you to select individual applications to include in the installation, omitting those you do not want. The D.N.A. Server installation process installs the D.N.A. operating platform, all applications (except Aastra Communication Assistant, Mobile Executive, PPM Lite, Lotus Notes, and Outlook Integration), and all administrative tools on your Windows Server PC. Windows Workstation client PCs may then connect to this server to install D.N.A. applications and support utilities.
Auto-Run Installation
Insert the D.N.A. CD in the CD-ROM drive. If supported by your PC, auto-run will activate the installation program and you will be presented with the following auto-run options.
67
D.N.A. Installation
Install Application Suite Install Aastra Communication Assistant Install Lotus Notes Integration 4.6 Install Lotus Notes Integration 5.0 Install Lotus Notes Integration 6.0 Install PPM Lite Install Mobile Executive Install ACC Server View Technical Guide View Release Notes Exit
Taskbar Installation
Use this procedure to install from the CD-ROM on a PC that does not support auto-run. 1. Insert the installation CD. 2. Click Start, Run on the Windows taskbar. 3. Type the network path to the desired setup program (for example, installing from CD, type: d:\dna\setup.exe. Alternatively, use the Browse button to browse to the appropriate setup.exe program file. 4. Click the Server installation option button and follow the instructions from the installation wizard.
New Server Installation

Note: When trying to install DNA 5.6 on a computer running Windows 2000 Server, the below message will be displayed:
Note: When trying to install DNA 5.6 on a computer running SQL 2000 Server, the below message will be displayed:
Note: The Preparing to install dialog box displayed during ACC Server installation contains a reference to ECC Server. This reference can be disregarded.
68
D.N.A. Installation
Server Installation Wizard This table lists the screens and prompts displayed when you perform a new installation. Wizard Screen and Options Welcome Explanation Overview of what the installation will accomplish, instructions for closing other applications, copyright warnings. Choose whether the PC you are setting up will be a D.N.A. Server or Client. The server installation creates a \\dna_s directory containing selected applications. The client installation places selected applications in a \\dna_c directory and assigns the connected server as the local server. This screen is displayed only when SQL Server is not installed.
Installation Type Server Client
Database Server Language Collation General Latin Simplified Chinese Database Application Selection
If installation cannot detect a database engine and General Latin was selected on the Database Server Language Collation screen, this page is displayed. You must have licensed SQL Server if you choose the SQL Server 2008 Microsoft SQL Server option. Microsoft SQL Server SQL Server 2008 Express 2008/2005 Express Edition is provided by the D.N.A. Installation. SQL Server 2005 SQL Server 2005 Express
69
D.N.A. Installation
Wizard Screen and Options Database Application Selection
Explanation
This page is displayed when the installation cannot detect SQL Server and Windows Server 2003 or Simplified Chinese was selected on the Database SQL Server 2008 Express Server Language Collation screen. You must have a licensed SQL Server if you choose the Microsoft SQL Server option. Microsoft SQL Server 2008/2005 SQL Server 2008 Express Edition is provided by the D.N.A. Installation.
Database Application Installation Configuration Destination Path Installation Files Configuration File Enter or browse for the destination of SQL Server files. Enter or Browse for the location of the SQL Server setup files. Enter the location of the SQL Server configuration file. The D.N.A. Installation displays the default configuration file provided by the installation package. Enter the SQL Server CD Key if required. Enter your name and company. Click Yes if the registration is correct. Enter a password for the Database Administrator (sa) account if desired.
CD Key User Information Registration Confirmation Database Application Administrator Password Nodes and Extensions for Database
Select from 1-256 nodes and 500 to 200,000 extensions for your network. This information is used to determine the amount of disk space needed for the Number of Nodes (drop-down installation. You may change these options. list) Total Number of Extensions (drop-down list) Select Installation Method Choose Typical to install all available D.N.A. components (applications, databases, and D.N.A. Server support utilities and components). Choose Custom to select specific components to install.
Typical
Custom Select Components This screen is displayed when you select Custom on the Select Installation Method page. Check the components you want to install in the list. This screen is displayed when running a Custom Installation. Select the language of your choice from the list. The Typical Installation automatically installs
Locale Support
70
D.N.A. Installation
Wizard Screen and Options
Explanation English, and local support if the Regional Settings of the PC are supported. Note: In EMG application the phone layout will still be displayed in English. A French version is available on the CD under the directory (\dna\locale\Emg\French\DEF\French). When installation has completed you can copy these files locally to directory (DNA_S\EMG\DEF).
OWS Level Selection Professional Basic Centrex Extension Per Node Performance Manager Databases Setup
Choose Professional for fully configurable Operator Work Station interface and options. Choose Basic for no configurable options and no remote search capabilities. Select Centrex for a BSS (service provider) configuration.
Click the Change button to change the number of extensions for a selected node. Allows you to choose database sizes for primary and auxiliary databases, and for storing active measurements.
DNA PreConfiguration Option This option can be skipped. To use this option, enter the full path name of the pre-configuration file or browse to it. Check Run MD Support synchronization if you want installation to start MD110 data synchronization after installation is completed. Choose Destination Location Click Next > to accept the default folder for your installation, or click the Browse button to select another. Data Files and Log Files Locations RDS Scheduled Jobs Start Copying Files Accept or choose locations for D.N.A. SQL database components. Use this screen to change the location of Log and Data files if desired. Select or unselect tasks that will be scheduled for automated execution after the installation completes. Review a comprehensive summary of your installation choices. Click Next > to begin the installation process based on your choices. Click Back to change your selections before proceeding. Click Cancel to abort the installation. D.N.A. Application Suite installation launches Enterprise License Manager installation. Click Next > to continue.
Enterprise License Manager Installation Welcome
71
D.N.A. Installation
Wizard Screen and Options Choose License Server Auto-discover license server(s) Manually specify a host Install license server locally Auto-discovering license servers
Explanation Choose your license server host among three options. Choose Auto-discover to list all the Enterprise license servers in your network. You can also specify the host that contains a license server and also define the port number. The third choice is to install license server on the local machine.
This screen is displayed when Auto-discover is selected. All hosts on the network that contain the license server will be displayed. The server with permanent license will be listed first. After the installation has finished, this screen displays a list of the D.N.A. components installed. It also displays any problems encountered during the installation. Choose Yes, I want to restart my computer now to restart your PC and complete the installation process. Choose No, I will restart my computer later to close the installation program and restart the PC later.
Summary Installations
Setup Complete
Installation Options
At any time after D.N.A. server software has been installed, you may use the Auto-Run or Taskbar installation methods to add, re-configure, and remove components using the following options. Option Add Components Explanation Allows you to add D.N.A. components not already installed. Installs new language capabilities to installed components. Note: In EMG application the phone layout will still be displayed in English. A French version is available on the CD under the directory (\dna\locale\Emg\French\DEF\French). When installation has completed you can copy these files locally to directory (DNA_S\EMG\DEF). Allows you to repeat the last installation to restore missing or corrupted files. Deletes all installed D.N.A. components. (You may also perform this task using Add/Remove Programs from the Windows Control Panel.) Allows you to change the number of nodes, extensions,
Install Locale
Reinstall
Remove All
Resize Database
72
D.N.A. Installation
Option
Explanation and other capacity parameters for the existing installation.
Add Components
On the D.N.A. Setup dialog box, select Add Components. You will encounter the following dialog boxes when adding D.N.A. components to an existing installation. Select Components Lists components available to be added. Locale Support Select language support for the new applications. Database Application Administrator Password Data Files and Log Device Locations Start Copying Files Summary Installations Setup Complete Setup program has performed the requested upsizing tasks. Click Finish. The system will now restart to complete the installation.
Resize Database
You will encounter the following dialog boxes when resizing D.N.A. components in an existing installation. On the D.N.A. Setup dialog box, select Resize Database. Nodes and Extensions for Database Upsizing Components Lists components eligible for upsizing. Upsizing Extension Per Node Allows you to change node and extension quantities. Upsizing [Application ...Setup] SQL Administrator Password Start Copying Files Summary Installations Setup Complete Setup program has performed the requested upsizing tasks. Click Finish.
Client Installation
The latest D.N.A. installation application improves the installation process. It now recommends which applications to install and where to install them. For example, youll probably want to choose the Typical option in the installation wizard, which installs all the D.N.A. applications available on the selected D.N.A. server. Alternatively, you may choose the Custom option that allows you to select individual applications to include in the installation, omitting those you do not want.
73
D.N.A. Installation
Important! If you are installing an instance of D.N.A. Client on Windows XP, refer to D.N.A. Client Installation on Windows XP.
Auto-Run Installation
Use this procedure to install from CD-ROM on a PC that supports auto-run. Insert the D.N.A. CD in the CD-ROM drive. If supported by your PC, auto-run will activate the installation program and you will be presented with the following auto-run options. Install Application Suite Install Aastra Communication Assistant Install Lotus Notes Integration 4.6 Install Lotus Notes Integration 5.0 Install Lotus Notes Integration 6.0 Install PPM Lite Install Mobile Executive Install ACC Server View Technical Guide View Release Notes Exit 1. Select Install Application Suite. 2. Click the Client installation option button and follow the instructions from the installation wizard.
Taskbar Installation
Use this procedure to install from the network, or from CD-ROM on a PC that does not support auto-run. 1. If you are installing from a network location, connect to it. If you are installing from CD-ROM, insert the installation CD. 2. Click Start, Run on the Windows taskbar. 3. Type the network path to the desired setup program (for example, installing from CD, type: d:\dna\setup.exe; installing from network, type: d:\dna_s\mrs\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\setup.exe). Alternatively, use the Browse button to browse to the appropriate setup.exe program file. 4. Click the Client installation option button and follow the instructions from the installation wizard.
New Client Installation

Client Installation Wizard
This table lists the Screens and prompts displayed when you perform a new installation. Wizard Screens and Options Welcome Explanation Overview of what the installation will
74
D.N.A. Installation
Wizard Screens and Options
Explanation accomplish, instructions for closing other applications, copyright warnings.
Installation Type Server Client
This screen is displayed when you install from the CD. Choose whether the PC you are setting up will be a D.N.A. Server or Client. The client installation places selected applications in a \\dna_c directory and assigns the connected server as the local server. Enter your name and company. Click Yes if the registration is correct. This screen is displayed when installing from a CD. Enter the network name of the D.N.A. server you wish to use as your installation source. Be sure to select a server that contains the same version of D.N.A. you are installing and all the components you need to install.
User Information Registration Confirmation D.N.A. Server Name
Select Installation Method Choose Typical to install all the components installed on the server. Choose Custom to select specific components installed on the server. Custom Select Components This screen is displayed when you select Custom on the Select Installation Method page. Check the components you want to install in the list. This screen is displayed when running a Custom Installation. Select the language of your choice from the list. The Typical Installation automatically installs English, and local support if the Regional Settings of the PC are supported. Note: In EMG application the phone layout will still be displayed in English. A French version is available on the CD under the directory (\dna\locale\Emg\French\DEF\French). When installation has completed you can copy these files locally to directory (DNA_S\EMG\DEF).
Typical
Locale Support
75
D.N.A. Installation
Wizard Screens and Options OWS Level Selection Professional Basic Centrex Choose Destination Location
Explanation Choose Professional for fully configurable Operator Work Station interface and options. Choose Basic for no configurable options and no remote search capabilities. Select Centrex for a BSS (service provider) configuration.
Click Next > to accept the default folder for your installation, or click the Browse button to select another. Review a comprehensive summary of your installation choices. Click Next > to begin the installation process based on your choices. Click Back to change your selections before proceeding. Click Cancel to abort the installation. After the installation has finished, this screen displays a list of the D.N.A. components installed. It also displays any errors encountered during the installation. Choose Yes, I want to restart my computer now to restart your PC and complete the installation process. Choose No, I will restart my computer later to close the installation program and restart the PC later.
Start Copying Files
Summary Installations
Setup Complete
Client Installation Options

At any time after D.N.A. client software has been installed, you may use the Auto-Run or Taskbar installation methods to add, re-configure, and remove components using the following options. Note: You must perform these operations using the D.N.A. server that was the source for the original installation. To change to a different server, you must first un-install all D.N.A. software and repeat the installation using the new server. Option Add Components Install Locale Explanation Allow you to add D.N.A. components not already installed. Installs new language capabilities to installed components. Note: In EMG application the phone layout will still be displayed in English. A French version is available on the CD under the directory (\dna\locale\Emg\French\DEF\French). When installation has completed you can copy these files locally to directory (DNA_C\EMG\DEF).
76
D.N.A. Installation
Reinstall
Repeats the latest installation to restore missing files and / or settings. Deletes all installed D.N.A. components. (You may also perform this task using Add/Remove Programs from the Windows Control Panel.)
Remove All
Silent Installation
You may now offer customers file-directed D.N.A. client installation assistance without being present at the installation site. This installation feature supports client New Installation, Re-installation, and Add Component options. Client Un-install is NOT supported. Note: Your users can run silent client setup from the D.N.A. Application Suite CD-ROM or from a local D.N.A. server. For the CD-ROM method, however, you must maintain an input file such as dnasuite.ini and use it as the input file for running the setup. The installation process gets system setup information from a .ini file created by the system administrator. The administrator provides approved installation parameters via a configuration (.ini) file. The client PC user can then initiate the installation. The installation will proceed automatically without further intervention.
Modifying the Setup (dnasuite.ini) File

As a starting point, use the dnasuite.ini file (located in the same installation directory as setup.exe) that comes with the D.N.A. installation software. Copy and carefully modify this file for your needs. DO NOT delete any parts of this file, since all existing statements are used during the installation process. Make the following changes to the temporary installation file. dnasuite.ini Statement [SETUP] InstallClientPath= Notes Type a destination path for the installed files on the client PC, or leave blank to accept the default location (c:\dna_c). Type the name of your local server. If left blank, the install program will prompt the user for a response. This is a required parameter.
ServerName=
LaunchEXE=ADO\MDAC_T You must include the '/Q' switch to run YP.EXE, /Q, /C:"setup ADO in quiet mode. /QNT",WAIT [OWS] Install=1 Level=Professional Set to 1 to install, 2 to not install* Level options are: Professional for fully configurable Operator Work Station interface and options; Basic for no configurable options and no remote
77
D.N.A. Installation
dnasuite.ini Statement
Notes search capabilities; Centrex for a BSS (service provider) configuration.
[DMG] [PMG] [EMG]
Install=1 Install=1 Install=1
Set to 1 to install, 2 to not install* Set to 1 to install, 2 to not install* Set to 1 to install, 2 to not install* * You can only install components that have been installed on the connected D.N.A. Server.
Installation Procedure
At the client PC, the installer performs the following steps. 1. From the taskbar and click Start, Programs, Command Prompt. The Command Prompt window will be displayed. 2. To get command prompt help, type: command SETUP /? 3. At the client PC, use the following setup command to execute the file-driven installation (see details on SETUP command below). SETUP.EXE silent ini=full path of dnasuite.ini
Using the Setup Command

There are three versions of the setup command for silent installation. One each for: New Installation, Re-Install, and Add Components. Type New Installation Setup Command Notes
SETUP.EXE silent ini=[full path You can only install components of dnasuite.ini] that have been installed on the connected D.N.A. Server. SETUP.EXE silent reinstall Parameter ini=filename.ini is not needed. The setup will process using the current installed .ini file settings. You can only install components that have been installed on the connected D.N.A. Server.
Re-install
Add Components
SETUP.EXE silent add ini=[full Setup will add components that path of dnasuite.ini] have been flagged Install=1 You can only add components that have been installed on the
78
D.N.A. Installation
connected D.N.A. Server.
PPM Lite
The basic D.N.A. Server client must be installed before you can install PPM Lite. This section explains installation requirements and procedures for Performance Presentation Manager Lite (PPM Lite). No installation steps are necessary for PPM Lite clients. Users simply point their browsers to a PPM server and enter their user ID and password. Warning: PPM Lite will not function properly without a session state. The Session Timeout feature for your PPM Lite website must not be disabled.
Installing with Auto-Run

D.N.A. provides auto-run support for PCs that support that feature. The installation process is automatically started when you insert the software installation CD into an auto-run compatible PC. The system will display an installation panel containing the following auto-run options. Install Application Suite Install Aastra Communication Assistant Install Lotus Notes Integration 4.6 Install Lotus Notes Integration 5.0 Install Lotus Notes Integration 6.0 Install PPM Lite Install Mobile Executive Install ACC Server View Technical Guide View Release Notes Exit Select Install PPM Lite to install from the Auto-Run interface. Important! If youre using a virus-protection utility, disable it before you run the D.N.A. Setup program. Also, close the control panel and any open Windows applications.
To install PPM Lite on a server PC

1. Insert the D.N.A. installation CD in the CD-ROM drive. -orIf youre installing from a network location, connect to it. 2. Find and run the ppmlite\setup.exe program to start the installation. 3. Proceed through the Welcome dialog. 4. For New Virtual Directory, accept the PPM Lite IIS default, or type another choice. 5. Accept the default settings or provide your preferences for the Locale Support and Destination Location dialogs. The installation program will copy files and complete the installation settings.
79
D.N.A. Installation
Note: Installing application files to Inetpub\wwwroot is not allowable, per Microsofts recommendation. 1. When the installation completes, choose Yes, I want to restart my computer now. The system will shutdown, restart, and the installation will be complete.
The PPM Lite installation provides Reinstall and Remove All options. Remove All can run from CD and Control Panel. Option Reinstall Explanation Allows you to repeat the last installation to restore missing or corrupted files. Deletes all installed PPM Lite components. (You may also perform this task using Add/Remove Programs from the Windows Control Panel.)
Remove All
Upgrade PPM Lite

Only one upgrade option is available. Select this option to upgrade to PPM Lite version 5.2 from version 4.1, 5.0, or 5.1. You will get a warning message to inform you that the application files will be moved to a new location instead of \Inetpub\wwwroot and you will be prompted to choose a desired destination. This change is subject to the recommendation of the latest version of Microsoft IIS. PPM Lite uses D.N.A. security starting from PPM Lite 5.0. The user account needs to be recreated through User Configuration if you are upgrading from PPM Lite 4.1.
Post Installation
Secure PPMLite Date/Time Format
The PPMLite date/time format is based on System Default Locale setting where PPMLite is installed. To secure the PPMLite date / time format, place PPMLite.dll in an MTS / COM+ package with a fixed user identity. Please follow the procedures below to setup PPMLite.dll as an MTS/COM+ package. 1. Log on the system where PPMLite is installed with the account that PPMLite.dll component will run under. 2. Configure the desired system default locale. Configure the locale for the user to be the same as the system default. Note: The locale for the system default and the local user must be the same. 3. Launch Component Services. Access Component Services via: Start4 Settings4 Control Panel4 Administrative Tools4 Component Services
80
D.N.A. Installation
4. Create a new COM+ application for PPMLite via the COM Application Install Wizard 5. Right-click on COM+ Application | select "New Application" to start the COM application install wizard | select "Create an empty application" | click Next >.
81
D.N.A. Installation
6. Enter "PPMLite" for Server Application and click Next >.
7. Select "This user" and enter the account name and password. PPMLite will use the system default locale settings for this particular account.
82
D.N.A. Installation
Note: If IIS 6.0 is used, select the User identity that PPMLitePool is running under. Refer to PPMLite Installed on IIS 6.0 for more information.
8. Click Finish. 9. Create a new component for PPMLite via COM Component Install Wizard. 10. Select the newly created COM+ Application "PPMLite" | Right-click the Component | Select New4Component to start the wizard | click Next >.
83
D.N.A. Installation
11. Select Import component(s) that are already registered and click Next >.
12. Select PPMLite.CRegAPI and PPMLite.WebReports as the components to import and click Next >.
84
D.N.A. Installation
13. Finally, click Finish.
PPMLite Installed on IIS 6.0

PPMLite is installed on the same machine as D.N.A. Server
Note: Please also reference Configurations to Run D.N.A. Web Applications in Worker Process Isolation Mode in the Configuration section. Run PPMLite under a separate application pool and user identity 1. Create a custom user identity Create a new user such as AastraWeb account. This account can be used for other Aastra Web applications as well. Add the AastraWeb account to the Users and IIS_WPG account groups on the PPMLite server. 2. Create a custom Application Pool In the IIS Manager, right-click on Application Pools, select New, then Application Pool A pop-up dialog will appear, prompting you for the application pool ID. Use a name such as PPMLitePool and select the first radio button that uses the default settings. 3. Customize the Application Pool Right-click on PPMLitePool and select Properties In the Recycling tab, un-check "Recycle worker processes" In the Performance tab, un-check "Shutdown worker process after being idle for 20 minutes and check Enable CPU monitoring (to Max). For CPU use 100, and refresh CPU usage in 5 minutes increments.
85
D.N.A. Installation
In the Identity tab, select the second radio button (Configurable) and specify the custom user identity that was created earlier in step 1. Enter the assigned password and click OK. You will then be asked to reconfirm the password. Enter the password and click OK again. Verify that the application pool has been started by refreshing the IIS Manager view (i.e., click on the Action menu and then Refresh). A started application pool will have an icon with green arrows overlaid on top. A pool that has not been started will have a red x overlaid on top of the icon (possible cause could be that an incorrect password was entered). Please ensure it is running properly. 4. Assign PPMLite Virtual Directory to Application Pool In the IIS Manager under the PPMLite virtual directory, right-click and select Properties. Under the Virtual Directory tab, in the Application Settings section, select the PPMLitePool option from the Application Pool dropdown list. 5. Assign Anonymous Identity Virtual Directory Go to the Directory Security tab. Under the Authentication and access control section, click Edit. An Authentication Methods dialog will appear. Check the Enable anonymous access checkbox and enter the AastraWeb user created in step 1. Enter a valid password, and also ensure that the bottom checkboxes are unchecked.
Click OK until all dialog boxes have disappeared 6. Create COM+ Package for PPMLite.dll if not created yet. If created already, proceed to step 6. Note: Reference previous section, Ensure PPMLite Date/Time Format for information on how to setup PPMLite.dll as a COM+ package. In the Control Panel under Administrative Tools, open the Component Services MMC snap-in. In the left hand tree, open: Component Services4Computers4My Computers4COM+ Applications Right-click on COM+ Applications and select New Follow the Wizard instructions and click Create an Empty Application Enter a name such as PPMLite, and keep the 2nd radio button selected (Server Application). Click Next >. For the application identity, select the This User: option and enter the user account and password that was created earlier in step 1, into the edit boxes. Click Next >. In the Roles section, click the Add Role button. Enter a new role name, such as PPMLite Role. Click OK4Next >. Proceed to step 7 7. Add AastraWeb user to Role In the Control Panel under Administrative Tools, open the Component Services MMC snap-in. In the left hand tree, open: Component Services4Computers4My Computers4COM+ Applications4PPMLite4Role Right-click on Role and select New4Role >. Enter the role name, such as PPMLite Role, and click OK.
86
D.N.A. Installation
In the left hand tree, open: PPMLite Role4Users Right-click on Users and select New4User > Add the AastraWeb user to the PPMLite Role and click OK 8. Set modify/write directory permission for the AastraWeb user Set the root of your Windows drive to give modify/write access to the AastraWeb user. This is done in Windows Explorer by right clicking on the drive, selecting Properties, selecting the Security tab, then adding AastraWeb to the list with modify/write privileges. 9. Reset IIS Go to command prompt and execute iisreset to stop and restart IIS.
PPMLite is installed on a different machine than D.N.A. server

Note: Please also reference D.N.A. Server and IIS 6.0 Server on Different Machines in the Configuration section. Run PPMLite under a separate application pool and under a domain user. 1. Create a domain user account PPMLite will need to access data on the D.N.A. server, which means PPMLite needs to be properly authenticated on the D.N.A. server with a domain user account. Add this domain user to the IIS_WPG account group on the PPMLite server. 2. Create a custom Application Pool In the IIS Manager, right-click on Application Pools, select New, then Application Pool A pop-up dialog will appear, prompting you for the application pool ID. Use a name such as PPMLitePool and select the first radio button that uses the default settings. 3. Customize the Application Pool Right-click on PPMLitePool and select Properties In the Recycling tab, un-check "Recycle worker processes" In the Performance tab, un-check "Shutdown worker process after being idle for 20 minutes and check Enable CPU monitoring (to Max). For CPU use 100, and refresh CPU usage in 5 minutes increments. In the Identity tab, select the second radio button (Configurable) and specify the domain user account that was created earlier in step 1. Enter the assigned password and click OK. You will then be asked to reconfirm the password. Enter the password and click OK again. Verify that the application pool has been started by refreshing the IIS Manager view (i.e., click on the Action menu and then Refresh). A started application pool will have an icon with green arrows overlaid on top. A pool that has not been started will have a red x overlaid on top of the icon (possible cause could be that an incorrect password was entered). Please ensure it is running properly. 4. Assign PPMLite Virtual Directory to Application Pool In the IIS Manager under the PPMLite virtual directory, right-click and select Properties. Under the Virtual Directory tab, in the Application Settings section, select the PPMLitePool option from the Application Pool dropdown list. 5. Assign Anonymous Identity Virtual Directory
87
D.N.A. Installation
Go to the Directory Security tab. Under the Authentication and access control section, click Edit. An Authentication Methods dialog will appear. Check the Enable anonymous access checkbox and enter the AastraWeb user created in step 1. Enter a valid password, and also ensure that the bottom checkboxes are unchecked.
Click OK until all dialog boxes have disappeared 6. Create COM+ Package for PPMLite.dll if not created yet. If created already, proceed to step 7. Note: Reference previous section, Ensure PPMLite Date/Time Format for information on how to setup PPMLite.dll as a COM+ package. In the Control Panel under Administrative Tools, open the Component Services MMC snap-in. In the left hand tree, open: Component Services4Computers4My Computers4COM+ Applications Right-click on COM+ Applications and select New Follow the Wizard instructions and click Create an Empty Application Enter a name such as PPMLite, and keep the 2nd radio button selected (Server Application). Click Next >. For the application identity, select the This User: option and enter the user account and password that was created earlier in step 1, into the edit boxes. Click Next >. In the Roles section, click the Add Role button. Enter a new role name, such as PPMLite Role. Click OK4Next >. Proceed to step 7 7. Add the domain user created in step 1 to Role In the Control Panel under Administrative Tools, open the Component Services MMC snap-in. In the left hand tree, open: Component Services4Computers4My Computers4COM+ Applications4PPMLite4Role Right-click on Role and select New4Role >. Enter the role name, such as PPMLite Role, and click OK. In the left hand tree, open: PPMLite Role4Users Right-click on Users and select New4User > Add the domain user crated in step 1 to the PPMLite Role and click OK 8. Set modify/write directory permission for the domain user. Set the root of your Windows drive to give modify/write access to the domain user created in step 1. This is done in Windows Explorer by rightclicking on the drive, selecting Properties, selecting the Security tab, and then adding the domain user created in step 1 to the list with modify/write privileges. 9. Reset IIS Go to command prompt and execute iisreset to stop and restart IIS.
88
D.N.A. Installation
Note: If for any reason a domain account cannot be used, please reference MSDN article 176380, How To Use ASP with a SQL Trusted Connection with Guest Account: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/176380/EN-US/

This section explains installation requirements and procedures for the Aastra Communication Assistant application. You can install Aastra Communication Assistant on a D.N.A. Server or Client PC. Warning: Aastra Communication Assistant will not function properly without a session state, and the Session Timeout feature for your website must not be disabled.
Prerequisites
The following are the requirements for Aastra Communication Assistant.
Call Controls
For the Call Handling license, Application Link 4 must be installed for BC 10, BC 11, and BC12. You must also install the CSTA32.dll version 4 on the ACA server. For best viewing, the PC Display settings should be set to 32K colors or higher. For ACA call handling setup procedures, IIS users should have Administrative privileges.
Simplified Chinese on English Operating System

For Simplified Chinese, the system default language settings must be set to Chinese (PRC) if English Operating System is used on the ACA Server. Otherwise, ACA pages will not show. Perform the following steps to change system default language settings. Windows Server 2003/2008 Start4Settings4Control Panel4Regional and Language Options to open the Regional and Language Options dialog.
89
D.N.A. Installation
Select Chinese (PRC) for standards and formats and China for Location. Click the Advanced tab and go to step 4. If these options are unavailable, click the Languages tab to install the language files (see step 3).
90
D.N.A. Installation
Select Install files for East Asian languages and click OK to install the language files. Have the Windows installation CD available for file copy. Click the Advanced tab after files are installed.
91
D.N.A. Installation
Select Chinese (PRC) for Language for non-Unicode programs, check the Apply all settings to the current user account and to the default user profile checkbox, and then click OK.
Click OK to change the default user settings.
92
D.N.A. Installation
Answer Yes to restart system and make settings effective.
Windows Server 2003 1. Start4Settings4Control Panel4Regional and Language Options to open the Regional and Language Options dialog.
93
D.N.A. Installation
2. Select Chinese (PRC) for standards and formats and China for Location. Click the Advanced tab and go to step 4. If these options are unavailable, click the Languages tab to install the language files (see step 3).
94
D.N.A. Installation
3. Select Install files for East Asian languages and click OK to install the language files. Have the Windows installation CD available for file copy. Click the Advanced tab after files are installed.
95
D.N.A. Installation
4. Select Chinese (PRC) for Language for non-Unicode programs, check the Apply all settings to the current user account and to the default user profile checkbox, and then click OK.
5. Click OK to change the default user settings.
96
D.N.A. Installation
6. Answer Yes to restart system and make settings effective.

D.N.A. provides auto-run support for PCs that support that feature. The installation process is automatically started when you insert the software installation CD into an auto-run compatible PC. The system displays an installation panel containing the following auto-run options. Install Application Suite Install Aastra Communication Assistant Install Lotus Notes Integration 4.6 Install Lotus Notes Integration 5.0 Install Lotus Notes Integration 6.0
97
D.N.A. Installation
Install PPM Lite Install Mobile Executive Install ACC Server View Technical Guide View Release Notes Exit Select Install Aastra Communication Assistant to install from the Auto-Run interface.
Installation Procedure
Important! If you're using a virus-protection utility, disable it before you run the D.N.A. Setup program. In addition, close the control panel and any open Windows applications.
To install Aastra Communication Assistant (ACA Server)

1. Insert the D.N.A. 5.6 CD-ROM into the CD drive. -orIf you're installing from a network location, connect to it. 2. Double-click eca/setup.exe to start the installation. 3. For the Database Server Name dialog, type the Windows network name of the PC containing the desired D.N.A. SQL database. 4. For the Choose Destination Location dialog, accept the default, or type another choice. Note: Installing application files to Inetpub\wwwroot is not allowable, per Microsofts recommendation. 5. After reviewing the selection, the installation program will copy files and complete the installation settings. 6. In order to display pictures on Subscriber Detail Information pages, you must make the DNA_S\MRS\Photo folder shared (read only) on the D.N.A. Server.
Virtual Machine
Aastra Communication Assistant requires the Java Virtual Machine software on your computer. You can download it from http://java.com.
The Aastra Communication Assistant installation provides Reinstall and Remove All options. Remove All can run from CD and Control Panel. Option Reinstall Explanation Allows you to repeat the last installation to restore missing or corrupted files. Deletes all installed Aastra Communication Assistant components. (You may also perform this task using Add/Remove Programs from the Windows Control Panel.)
Remove All
98
D.N.A. Installation
Upgrade Aastra Communication Assistant

Only one upgrade option is available. Select this option to upgrade to Aastra Communication Assistant version 1.2 from version 1.0 and 1.1. For existing ACA users, some of the new enhancements in ACA 1.2 require setting up in the ACA Configuration before taking effect. 1. Show diversion notes Turn on this flag to allow ACA users to view diversion notes, if available. 2. EMG is installed and Personal Number is used Turn on this flag only if EMG is installed on the D.N.A. Server and personal number feature is used. Note that this flag must be turned on if Personal Number feature is used after upgrade to ACA 1.2 from earlier releases. Otherwise, the Personal Number feature will not be available after logon. EMG must be configured properly. If it is off, ACA will not launch EMG and retrieve Profile information from PBX at logon time. If it is on but EMG is not installed or properly defined, the ACA logon process will be slowed. Refer to Configuration for Personal Number access in the Configuration section. 3. Personal Directory Set to Exchange if Outlook contact list is available for ACA directory search. In addition, ACA users must also configure the interface parameters with the Exchange Server in the Personal Options page before the Personal Contact search option will be available. 4. Directory Name Define the desired directory name for Local D.N.A. internal and external directory. These names will be used in the ACA Directory drop-down list for search. Additionally, the LDAP directory name listed in the ACA Directory search dropdown list will be changed to LDAP description defined in LDAP configuration instead of LDAP host name. No configuration is needed.
Post Installation Only if IIS 6.0 is used

ACA is installed on the same machine as D.N.A. Server
Note: Please also reference Configurations to Run D.N.A. Web Applications in Worker Process Isolation Mode in the Configuration section. Run ACA under a separate application pool and a user identity 1. Create a custom user identity Create a new user such as AastraWeb account. This account can be used for other Aastra Web applications as well. Add the AastraWeb account to the Users and IIS_WPG account groups on the ACA server. 2. Create a custom Application Pool In the IIS Manager, right-click on Application Pools, select New, then Application Pool A pop-up dialog will appear, prompting you for the application pool ID. Use a name such as ACAPool and select the first radio button that uses the default settings. 3. Customize the Application Pool Right-click on ACAPool and select Properties In the Recycling tab, un-check "Recycle worker processes"
99
D.N.A. Installation
In the Performance tab, un-check "Shutdown worker process after being idle for 20 minutes and check Enable CPU monitoring (to Max). For CPU use 100, and refresh CPU usage in 5 minutes increments. In the Identity tab, select the second radio button (Configurable) and specify the custom user identity that was created earlier in step 1. Enter the assigned password and click OK. You will then be asked to reconfirm the password. Enter the password and click OK again. Verify that the application pool has been started by refreshing the IIS Manager view (i.e., click on the Action menu and then Refresh). A started application pool will have an icon with green arrows overlaid on top. A pool that has not been started will have a red x overlaid on top of the icon (possible cause could be that an incorrect password was entered). Please ensure it is running properly. 4. Assign Ericom Virtual Directory to Application Pool In the IIS Manager under the Ericom virtual directory, right-click and select Properties. Under the Virtual Directory tab, in the Application Settings section, select the ACAPool option from the Application Pool dropdown list. 5. Assign Anonymous Identity Virtual Directory Go to the Directory Security tab. Under the Authentication and access control section, click Edit. An Authentication Methods dialog will appear. Check the Enable anonymous access checkbox and enter the AastraWeb user created in step 1. Enter a valid password, and also ensure that the bottom checkboxes are unchecked. Click OK until all dialog boxes have disappeared
6. Reset IIS Go to command prompt and execute iisreset to stop and restart IIS. Note: If for any reason a domain account cannot be used, please reference MSDN article 176380, How To Use ASP with a SQL Trusted Connection with Guest Account: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/176380/EN-US/
ACA is installed on a different machine than D.N.A. server

Note: Please also reference D.N.A. Server and IIS 6.0 Server on Different Machines in the Configuration section. Run ACA under a separate application pool and under a domain user 1. Create a domain user account ACA will need to access data on the D.N.A. server, which means ACA needs to be properly authenticated on the D.N.A. server with a domain user account. Add this domain user to the IIS_WPG account group on the ACA server. 2. Create a custom Application Pool In the IIS Manager, right-click on Application Pools, select New, then Application Pool A pop-up dialog will appear, prompting you for the application pool ID. Use a name such as ACAPool and select the first radio button that uses the default settings. 3. Customize the Application Pool Right-click on ACAPool and select Properties In the Recycling tab, un-check "Recycle worker processes"
100
D.N.A. Installation
In the Performance tab, un-check "Shutdown worker process after being idle for 20 minutes and check Enable CPU monitoring (to Max). For CPU use 100, and refresh CPU usage in 5 minutes increments. In the Identity tab, select the second radio button (Configurable) and specify the domain user account that was created earlier in step 1. Enter the assigned password and click OK. You will then be asked to reconfirm the password. Enter the password and click OK again. Verify that the application pool has been started by refreshing the IIS Manager view (i.e., click on the Action menu and then Refresh). A started application pool will have an icon with green arrows overlaid on top. A pool that has not been started will have a red x overlaid on top of the icon (possible cause could be that an incorrect password was entered). Please ensure it is running properly. 4. Assign Ericom Virtual Directory to Application Pool In the IIS Manager under the Ericom virtual directory, right-click and select Properties. Under the Virtual Directory tab, in the Application Settings section, select the ACAPool option from the Application Pool dropdown list. 5. Assign Anonymous Identity Virtual Directory Go to the Directory Security tab. Under the Authentication and access control section, click Edit. An Authentication Methods dialog will appear. Check the Enable anonymous access checkbox and enter the AastraWeb user created in step 1. Enter a valid password, and also ensure that the bottom checkboxes are unchecked.
Click OK until all dialog boxes have disappeared 6. Reset IIS Go to command prompt and execute iisreset to stop and restart IIS. Note: If for any reason a domain account cannot be used, please reference MSDN article 176380, How To Use ASP with a SQL Trusted Connection with Guest Account: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/176380/EN-US/
Mobile Executive
The basic D.N.A. Server client must be installed before you can install Mobile Executive. This section explains installation requirements and procedures for Mobile Executive. Mobile Executive is installed on an Internet server. Even though the Internet server and the D.N.A. server can be on the same machines, we recommend they be on separate machines for better performance. In addition, Internet servers are periodically taken down for maintenance. Warning: Mobile Executive will not function properly without a session state. The Session Timeout feature for your Mobile Executive website must not be disabled.

D.N.A. provides auto-run support for PCs that support this feature. When you insert the software installation CD into an auto-run compatible PC, the installation process is automatically started. The system will display an installation panel containing the following auto-run options. Install Application Suite Install Aastra Communication Assistant
101
D.N.A. Installation
Install Lotus Notes Integration 4.6 Install Lotus Notes Integration 5.0 Install Lotus Notes Integration 6.0 Install PPM Lite Install Mobile Executive Install ACC Server View Technical Guide View Release Notes Exit Select Install Mobile Executive to install from the Auto-Run interface. Important! If youre using a virus-protection utility, disable it before you run the D.N.A. Setup program. Also, close the control panel and any open Windows applications.
To install Mobile Executive on a server PC

1. Insert the D.N.A. installation CD in the CD-ROM drive -orIf youre installing from a network location, connect to it. 2. Find and run the MobileExec\setup.exe program. Double-click setup.exe to start the installation. 7. Proceed through the Welcome dialog. 8. For New Virtual Directory, accept the mobileexec default for Name, or type another choice. 9. Accept the default Destination Folder settings or browse to a new location of your choice. The installation program will copy files and complete the installation settings. Note: Installing application files to Inetpub\wwwroot is not allowable, per Microsofts recommendation. 10. When the installation completes, choose Yes, I want to restart my computer now. The system will shutdown, restart, and the installation will be complete.
The Mobile Executive installation provides Reinstall and Remove All options. Remove All can run from CD and Control Panel. Option Reinstall Explanation Allows you to repeat the last installation to restore missing or corrupted files. Deletes all installed Mobile Executive components. (You may also perform this task using Add/Remove Programs from the Windows Control Panel.)
Remove All
Upgrade Mobile Executive

Only one upgrade option is available. Select this option to upgrade to Mobile Executive version 5.2 from version 5.0 and 5.1.
102
D.N.A. Installation
You will get a warning message to inform you that the application files will be moved to a new location instead of \Inetpub\wwwroot and you will be prompted to choose a desired destination. This change is subject to the recommendation of the latest version of Microsoft IIS.

Mobile Executive is installed on the same machine as D.N.A. Server
Note: Please also reference Configurations to Run D.N.A. Web Applications in Worker Process Isolation Mode in the Configuration section. Run Mobileexec under a separate application pool and a user identity 1. Create a custom user identity Create a new user such as AastraWeb account. This account can be used for other Aastra Web applications as well. Add the AastraWeb account to the Users and IIS_WPG account groups on the Mobileexec server. 2. Create a custom Application Pool In the IIS Manager, right-click on Application Pools, select New, then Application Pool A pop-up dialog will appear, prompting you for the application pool ID. Use a name such as MobileexecPool and select the first radio button that uses the default settings. 3. Customize the Application Pool Right-click on MobileexecPool and select Properties In the Recycling tab, un-check "Recycle worker processes" In the Performance tab, un-check "Shutdown worker process after being idle for 20 minutes and check Enable CPU monitoring (to Max). For CPU use 100, and refresh CPU usage in 5 minutes increments. In the Identity tab, select the second radio button (Configurable) and specify the custom user identity that was created earlier in step 1. Enter the assigned password and click OK. You will then be asked to reconfirm the password. Enter the password and click OK again. Verify that the application pool has been started by refreshing the IIS Manager view (i.e., click on the Action menu and then Refresh). A started application pool will have an icon with green arrows overlaid on top. A pool that has not been started will have a red x overlaid on top of the icon (possible cause could be that an incorrect password was entered). Please ensure it is running properly. 4. Assign Mobileexec Virtual Directory to Application Pool In the IIS Manager under the Mobileexec virtual directory, right-click and select Properties. Under the Virtual Directory tab, in the Application Settings section, select the MobileexecPool option from the Application Pool dropdown list. 5. Assign Anonymous Identity Virtual Directory Go to the Directory Security tab. Under the Authentication and access control section, click Edit. An Authentication Methods dialog will appear. Check the Enable anonymous access checkbox and enter the AastraWeb user created in step 1. Enter a valid password, and also ensure that the bottom checkboxes are unchecked.
103
D.N.A. Installation
Click OK until all dialog boxes have disappeared
6. Reset IIS Go to command prompt and execute iisreset to stop and restart IIS.
Mobile Executive is installed on a different machine than D.N.A. server

Note: Please also reference D.N.A. Server and IIS 6.0 Server on Different Machines in the Configuration section. Run Mobileexec under a separate application pool and under a domain user 1. Create a domain user account Mobileexec will need to access data on the D.N.A. server, which means Mobileexec needs to be properly authenticated on the D.N.A. server with a domain user account. Add this domain user to the IIS_WPG account group on the Mobileexec server. 2. Create a custom Application Pool In the IIS Manager, right-click on Application Pools, select New, then Application Pool A pop-up dialog will appear, prompting you for the application pool ID. Use a name such as Mobileexec Pool and select the first radio button that uses the default settings. 3. Customize the Application Pool Right-click on Mobileexec Pool and select Properties In the Recycling tab, un-check "Recycle worker processes" In the Performance tab, un-check "Shutdown worker process after being idle for 20 minutes and check Enable CPU monitoring (to Max). For CPU use 100, and refresh CPU usage in 5 minutes increments. In the Identity tab, select the second radio button (Configurable) and specify the domain user account that was created earlier in step 1. Enter the assigned password and click OK. You will then be asked to reconfirm the password. Enter the password and click OK again. Verify that the application pool has been started by refreshing the IIS Manager view (i.e., click on the Action menu and then Refresh). A started application pool will have an icon with green arrows overlaid on top. A pool that has not been started will have a red x overlaid on top of the icon (possible cause could be that an incorrect password was entered). Please ensure it is running properly. 4. Assign Mobileexec Virtual Directory to Application Pool In the IIS Manager under the Mobileexec virtual directory, right-click and select Properties. Under the Virtual Directory tab, in the Application Settings section, select the MobileexecPool option from the Application Pool dropdown list. 5. Assign Anonymous Identity Virtual Directory Go to the Directory Security tab. Under the Authentication and access control section, click Edit. An Authentication Methods dialog will appear. Check the Enable anonymous access checkbox and enter the AastraWeb user created in step 1. Enter a valid password, and also ensure that the bottom checkboxes are unchecked.
Click OK until all dialog boxes have disappeared 6. Reset IIS Go to command prompt and execute iisreset to stop and restart IIS.
104
D.N.A. Installation
Note: If for any reason a domain account cannot be used, please reference MSDN article 176380, How To Use ASP with a SQL Trusted Connection with Guest Account: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/176380/EN-US/
Outlook Integration
The D.N.A. Outlook Integration (DOI) provides a bi-directional Integration between the Microsoft Office Outlook Calendar and D.N.A. Directory Calendar. This allows D.N.A. Directory Subscribers using Outlook's Calendar to synchronize the message diversion information with other D.N.A. applications through the D.N.A. Remote Data Server (RDS). Several pre-installation tasks must be completed before installing and running Outlook Integration. Usually these tasks are completed after D.N.A. server installation. 1. Before Installation, Microsoft Outlook 2000 or greater must be installed on the system. If Outlook is not installed, the installation process will report an error. Outlook Integration does not need the exchange server. 2. Use the MD110 Support utility to synchronize Operator Message Diversion for All applications on the D.N.A. server. 11. Use the RDS Configuration utility to set Default Diversion Duration and Default Diversion Stop Time for all Message Diversion Reason Codes on the D.N.A. server. 12. Use the RDS Configuration utility to configure a GICI/CSTA Port. 13. Use the Directory Configuration Utility to add a Person UDF of type Computer to the database. 14. Use Directory Manager to add the Outlook computer name information to D.N.A. Directory. Outlook Integration needs to be installed on both client and server machines.
To install or upgrade Outlook Integration

Double-click on DNA_S\DMG\CALENDAR\setup.exe and follow the instructions in the Setup Wizard. Note: Starting from DOI 5.2, the message diversion reason code is retrieved from Subject by default (Registry value GetDivCodeFromSubject set to 1) unless it is changed manually (GetDivCodeFromSubject set to 0). This applies to any user who adds DOI as a new installation from D.N.A. 5.6. For existing users who upgrade to 5.6, this Registry setting remains the same.
To uninstall Outlook Integration

1. Open the Control Panel and double-click on Add/Remove Programs. 2. Remove D.N.A. Integration with Outlook.
Description of DOI at Synchronization Interval

DOI relies on message diversion code to distinguish the calendar event is set from DOI or Outlook for data synchronization. When you set or delete a message diversion with DOI, this information is stored in your local calendar.
105
D.N.A. Installation
When the synchronization interval occurs, DOI will determine whether the calendar entry was created via DOI or not, based on the message diversion reason code from the Subject field (default) or Body Text (determined by Registry setting). Refer to Registry Values for Message Diversion Synchronization for details. The message diversions from the D.N.A. server are called "Message Diversion from DNA Server." DOI will not go through these message diversions, since they are already in the D.N.A. server database. DOI then sends the message diversions to the RDS (D.N.A. server process), which in turn adds or removes them from the D.N.A. server database. The process "dnamsgdv.exe" is always assigned low priority (to avoid flickering, etc.), when starting the DOI, or at synch interval.
Registry Values for Message Diversion Synchronization

Two Registry values - SynchInterval and DiversionDays are used for message diversion synchronization from Outlook to the D.N.A. Server. Registry location:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\Integration\Outlook\
SynchInterval. This Registry key value is used to define the data synchronization period. The DOI will poll the new changes made from Outlook and send to D.N.A. Server based on SynchInterval. By default the value is set to 120 seconds (=78 Hex value). Message Diversions from D.N.A. server are sent instantly to the DOI client and are not affected by the SynchInterval value. DiversionDays. This Registry key value is used to define the number of days future message diversion information is displayed. Outlook will retrieve this setting whenever data synchronization occurs. By default the value is set to 15 days. If the value is > 31 days, it will be treated as 31 days. If value is < 3 days, it will be treated as 3 days. The number of days includes the current day (e.g., 15 days means today plus the next 14 days). Also: GetDivCodeFromSubject. This Registry value is used to get the message diversion reason code from the Subject field if set to 1 (default); otherwise message diversion reason code is retrieved from Body Text. Regardless of Registry settings, the message diversion reason code must be at the beginning of the Subject or Body Text field. By using Body Text field, the Subject can be used for more meaningful information about the appointment. However, the performance will be better if Subject field is used. Prior to D.N.A. 5.2, the GetDivCodeFromSubject is set to 0 by default, which means that the message diversion reason code is retrieved from Body Text. Starting from DOI 5.2, the GetDivCodeFromSubject is set to 1 and reason code is retrieved from Subject field by default. For existing users, this setting remains the same after upgrade to 5.6.
Registry Value for User ID instead of Computer UDF

In the D.N.A. Server Registry, change the following key:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\RemoteDS\Manager\ UseUserIDForCalendarIntegration
106
D.N.A. Installation
This value is set to 0 by default, which requires you to link a computer name (UDF type Computer) with a DMG subscriber. Setting this value to 1 changes Outlook Integration from using the PC name as the identity reference, to using the Windows user login name as the identity for Outlook calendar diversion settings. The advantage of using the Windows user login name is that it allows you to use a Person UDF of type User ID instead of type Computer. This makes Outlook Integration more flexible and easier to manage. After changing this Registry key, stop and restart the D.N.A. RDS service. It may take a few minutes for RDS to repopulate the local database. You can then use the Directory Configuration utility to add a UDF of type User ID, and then Directory Manager to add the Outlook user ID information to the D.N.A. Directory.
Limitations for Recurrent Diversions

The RDS can handle hourly, daily and weekly message diversion. Weekly, has different interpretation in RDS compared to the Outlook Calendar. In RDS weekly means only one time per week. In Outlook, users can select multiple days during the week. Ex. 1 If a user in Outlook selects "Daily" and "Every weekday", the DOI will pass this information to the RDS as weekly with every Monday to Friday. But RDS can only accept weekly and ignore the Monday to Friday. The result of this is that; the first time it will work (e.g., Wednesday), when the message diversion has expired, the record in the D.N.A. server database will change to the next start time (i.e., Wednesday the next week). Ex. 2 If a user in Outlook selects "Weekly" and multiple days (e.g., Monday, Wednesday, Friday), only the first one will be activated (i.e., Monday). The others will not be activated on the phone. Ex. 3 If a user in Outlook selects "Monthly" or "Yearly", only the first message diversion will be activated. The others will not be activated on the phone.
Customizing Outlook Security Features

The Microsoft Outlook Security features are installed by default with Microsoft Outlook 2002 and 2003. They are used to guard against most viruses spread via attachments to e-mail messages. For DOI users, the message A program is trying to access e-mail addresses you have stored in Outlook will be displayed whenever DOI synchronization occurs due to Outlook Address Book being guarded (if Outlook Security features are installed). To prevent this caution from appearing, it is necessary to customize the security features according to the following procedure.
Install Outlook Security Features Administrative Package

Exchange Server 2003 1. Download Outlook Security Feature Administrative Package (Admpack.exe) from http://www.microsoft.com/office/ork/xp/appndx/appc00.htm.
107
D.N.A. Installation
2. Extract the files by double clicking Admpack.exe. This package consists of the following 4 files: OutlookSecurity.oft, an Outlook template that enables you to customize the security settings on the Microsoft Exchange server. Hashctl.dll, the file for the Trusted Code control, a tool used by the template to specify trusted COM add-ins. Comdlg32.ocx, control that provides a user interface for selecting the trusted COM add-in. Readme.doc, a document that provides information on the values and settings available in the template and describes how to deploy the new settings on Exchange Server. 3. Install and Register Trusted Code controls: Copy Hashctl.dll and Comdlg32.ocx extracted from Security Feature Administrative Package to <windir>\system32 on Administrative system. Register files: Start DOS command prompt Enter regsvr32 hashctl.dll and hit Enter Enter regsvr32 Comdlg32.ocx and hit Enter Exchange Server 2000 1. Download Outlook 2000 SR-1a Security Update Administrative (Admpack.exe) from http://www.microsoft.com/office/ork/2000/appndx/toolbox.htm#secupd 2. Extract the files by double clicking Admpack.exe. This package consists of the following 3 files: OutlookSecurity.oft, a template used for creating security settings. outlk9.adm, an Auto Distribution Manager (ADM) updated system policy. Readme.txt, a document that provides information on the values and settings available in the template and describes how to deploy the new settings on Exchange Server.
Create and Configure Security Folder on Exchange Server

You must have administrator privileges to create a public folder named Outlook Security Settings on the Exchange server.
108
D.N.A. Installation
1. Click Start 4 Programs 4 Microsoft Exchange 4 System Manager to open the Exchange System Manager dialog.
109
D.N.A. Installation
2. Open Folders, then right-click Public Folders and select New 4 Public Folder. Create a new folder by entering Outlook Security Settings in the Name field, then click Apply, followed by the OK button in Properties dialog.
110
D.N.A. Installation
3. Configure the newly created Outlook Security Settings public folder by right-clicking it. Select Properties to open the Outlook Security Settings Properties dialog.
111
D.N.A. Installation
4. Select the Permission tab and then click Client Permission
112
D.N.A. Installation
5. Define who can access the Outlook Security Setting public folder by selecting Default name, and then change the Roles from Author to Reviewer (in the Roles drop-down list). Click OK to save and close the dialog.
Modify the Default Security Settings on Microsoft Exchange Server

Microsoft Outlook is required to perform the following procedures. Use the Outlook Security template to modify settings on Exchange Server.
113
D.N.A. Installation
1. Click OutlookSecurity.oft extracted from Security Feature Administrative Package to open the Select Folder dialog.
2. Select Outlook Security Settings folder that created on the Exchange Server. Click OK button to open the template in Compose mode.
114
D.N.A. Installation
3. From the menu bar, select Tools 4 Forms4 Publish Form As to open the Publish Form As dialog.
4. From the Look In drop-down list, select Outlook Folders and click the Browse to open the Go to Folder dialog. Select Outlook Security Settings from Public Folder and click OK.
115
D.N.A. Installation
5. Enter Outlook Security Form in the Display Name field, and the Form Name field will be filled in with Outlook Security Form automatically. Click Publish to publish the security template in the Security Settings folder and return to the Default Security Settings Description window.
116
D.N.A. Installation
6. Select File from the menu bar, and then click Close to close the template.
7. Click No to discard changes.
Create and Customize Outlook Security Form

Note: If Outlook 2003 is used, make sure Use Cached Exchange Mode is turned off in the E-mail Accounts. Otherwise, you cannot save the security form. You can switch back to Use Cached Exchange Mode after the security form is saved.
117
D.N.A. Installation
1. To check or change Cached Exchange Mode: Navigate to Tools 4 E-mail Accounts Ensure that the radio button next to View or change existing e-mail accounts is selected, then click Next >. Highlight your Exchange server account and then click Change. Uncheck Use Cached Exchange Mode to turn it off (i.e., disable the feature). Logon to the Exchange administrator account. 2. Expand Public Folders 4 All Public Folders and select the Outlook Security Settings folder.
3. Click the down-arrow key next to the New button on the tool bar, and then click Choose Form
118
D.N.A. Installation
4. Select Outlook Folders from the Look In drop-down box, and then click the Browse button.
5. Select Outlook Security Settings from All Public Folders and then click OK.
119
D.N.A. Installation
6. Verify that the Display name: field shows Outlook Security Form in the Choose Form dialog and click Open.
7. Create either a default security setting or custom settings for a specific set of users: Select Default Security Settings for All Users to allow all Outlook users to use this security form. -orSelect Security Settings for Exception Group and enter the name in the Security Group Name field. Also type the name of each user requiring the custom security settings in the Members box. The names entered must be separated with a semi-colon (;).
120
D.N.A. Installation
8. Specify settings as follows: Automatically approve When executing a custom action via Outlook object model Automatically approve When accessing the ItemProperty of a control on an Outlook custom form
121
D.N.A. Installation
9. Open the Programmatic Settings tab and specify the settings as follows: Automatically approve When sending terms via Outlook object model Automatically approve When accessing the address book via Outlook object model Automatically approve When accessing address information via Outlook object model Automatically approve When responding to meeting and task requests via Outlook object model Automatically approve When executing Save As via Outlook object model
122
D.N.A. Installation
10. Save the Security Settings by selecting File from the menu bar, then clicking Save. Administrator may or may not be prompted to enter the Password for credentials depending on the Windows version used.
11. Close the Custom Security Setting dialog by selecting File from the menu bar, then clicking Close.
Deploy the Customized Outlook Security Settings to Client Systems

To enable the customized settings for users, the following Registry key is needed on the client computers.
HKCU\Software\Policies\Microsoft\Security\CheckAdminSetting
with DWORD type, and value = 1 For D.N.A. 5.6 systems with DOI installed, please re-install the D.N.A. Outlook Integration installation distributed with D.N.A. 5.2 SP1 or later, to setup this Registry key.
D.N.A. Outlook Integration Logging

D.N.A. 5.6 provides improved DOI logging. A DOI log is created daily with the file format doi_yyyymmdd.log (e.g. doi_20050524 for May 24, 2005).
To enable DOI logging

1. Set the directory for storing DOI log file in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\Integration\Outlook\LogPath registry value. E.g. c:\temp. 2. Set HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\Integration\Outlook\LogLevel to 1 for minimum logging, 2 for more debugging logging. Note: Any DOI log files that are older than 7 days are purged automatically when DOI starts up.
To disable DOI logging
123
D.N.A. Installation
Set HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\Integration\Outlook\LogPath registry value to BLANK.
Lotus Notes Integration

Installing Lotus Notes Integration Installation package on D.N.A. Server with Auto-Run
D.N.A. provides auto-run support for PCs that support this feature. When you insert the software installation CD into an auto-run compatible PC, the installation process is automatically started. The system will display an installation panel containing the following auto-run options. Install Application Install Aastra Communication Assistant Install Lotus Notes Integration 4.6 Install Lotus Notes Integration 5.0 Install Lotus Notes Integration 6.0 Install PPM Lite Install Mobile Executive Install Aastra Communication Client View Technical Guide View Release Notes Exit 1. Select Install Lotus Note Integration based on the Notes version you use. 2. Proceed through the installation. The Lotus Notes Integration installation package is installed on the D.N.A. Server at \\DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\LotusNotes for Notes 4.6 or \\DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\LotusNotes50 for Notes 5.0 or \\DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\LotusNotes60 for Notes 6.0 15. Share \DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation for Notes client user to install D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration.
Installing D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration Templates on Domino Server

Before Lotus Notes clients can use the D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration additions, the Lotus Notes Integration template (for the installed language) needs to be placed on the Lotus Notes Domino Server. 1. Run Lotus Notes Integration client installation on the D.N.A. Server at \\DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\LotusNotes for Notes 4.6 or \\DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\LotusNotes50 for Notes 5.0 or \\DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\LotusNotes60 for Notes 6.0 2. Choose installation option Lotus Notes Integration Template and desired language to install D.N.A. Integration templates to Integration software on a Lotus Notes client machine into the \\\Notes\Data directory.
Setting up D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration Templates

There are two types of templates supported:
124
D.N.A. Installation
Sub template (support Notes 4.6, 5.0, and 6.0) For customers who have their own customized Mail form or prefer to use standard mail form, sub template should be used to link with the standard or customized Mail form. D.N.A. provided modified Mail template (support Notes 4.6 and 5.0) For customers who have no preference of the form used, the modified Mail template provided by D.N.A. can be used.
Lotus Notes 4.6

Link DNI Sub-template with Standard Mail Template or Customized Mail Template (recommended) 1. Start up Lotus Notes 2. Open standard or customized Mail template From the menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box.
In Filename text field, enter mail46.ntf or your customized template file name and click the Open button. 3. Open DNI template From the menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box.
In Filename text field, enter dni46sub.ntf or your customized template file name and click the Open button. 4. Link form: From the DNA Template English v4.6 window, double-click the DNA Template icon in the left frame. Click Design to list the Design pane. Click Forms to list the forms in database. From the Forms list pane (right frame), select the AbsenceCode form and choose Edit4Copy from the menu bar. From Mail (R4.6) or your customized template window, double-click on Mail (R4.6) or your customized template icon in the left frame. Click Design to list the Design pane. Click Forms to list the forms in database.
From the menu bar, choose Edit4Paste. 5. Link view: From the DNA Template English v4.6 window, click Views in the Design pane (left frame). From the Views list pane (right frame), select (DiversionCode) view and choose Edit4Copy from the menu bar. From Mail (R4.6) or your customized template window, click Views to list the views in database.
From the menu bar, choose Edit4Paste. 6. Link sub-form: From DNA Template English v4.6 window, click Subforms in the Design pane (left frame).
125
D.N.A. Installation
From the Sub-forms list pane (right frame), select the AastraDNI sub-form and choose Edit4Copy from the menu bar. From Mail (R4.6) or your customized template window, click Subforms to list the subforms in database.
From the menu bar, choose Edit4Paste. 7. Insert DNI sub-form to Calendar form: From Mail (R4.6) or your customized template window, double-click Calendar Entry form in the Forms list pane (right frame). Click the spot in the Calendar Entry form that you want the sub-form to be inserted to. From the menu bar, choose Create4Insert Subform to bring up the Insert Sub-form dialog.
Select Aastra DNI from the Insert Sub-form list box and click the OK button to insert the selected sub-form to the Calendar Entry form. 8. The updated mail template will take effect from the next day automatically. Use D.N.A. Provided Mail Template 1. Start up Lotus Notes 2. Inherit the mail database design for each individual user from DNI template From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box. Select the clients mail template (e.g., psmith.nsf for Peter Smith) and click the Open
button. The icon
will be shown on main window.
Right-click the icon
and select Database Properties
Click the Design icon to go to the Design page. Check the Inherit design from template and change the Template name text field to DNI template name (e.g., "dni46(s)" for English version). 3. Repeat step 2 for all other users 4. The new template will take effect from the next day automatically.
Lotus Notes 5.0

Link DNI Sub-template with Standard Mail Template or Customized Mail Template (recommended) 1. Start up Lotus Domino Designer 2. Copy DNA template file from local to server From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box. Select Local in the Server combo-box. Click the Browse button to select the dni50sub.ntf template file. Click Open. From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box. Select the server (Server Name/Certifier, e.g., bt-inv1247/domino50) in the Server combo-box and click the OK button.
126
D.N.A. Installation
3. Open standard or customized Mail template From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box. Select the server (Server Name/Certifier, e.g., bt-inv1247/domino50) in the Server combo-box.
Select Mail [R5.0] or your customized database in Database list box. Click the Open button. 4. Open DNI template From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box. Select the server (Server Name/Certifier, e.g., bt-inv1247/domino50) in the Server combo-box.
Select DNA Template English v5.0 in the Database list box. Click the Open button. 5. Link form: Select DNA Template English v5.0 database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Forms to list the forms in database. From the Form list Work pane (right frame), right-click on the AbsenceCode form and select Copy. Select Mail [R5.0] database or your customized database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Forms to list the forms in database.
Right-click the Form list Work pane (right frame) and select Paste. 6. Link view: Select DNA Template English v5.0 database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Views to list the views in database. From the View list Work pane (right frame), right-click [AastraDiversionCode] view and select Copy.
Select Mail [R5.0] database or your customized database from the Design pane (left frame); click Views to list the views in database. Right-click the View list Work pane (right frame) and select Paste. 7. Link sub-form: Select DNA Template English v5.0 database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Resources and then click Subforms to list the sub-forms in database. From the Subform list Work pane (right frame), right-click AastraDNI sub-form and select Copy.
Select Mail [R5.0] database or your customized database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Resources and then click Subforms to list the sub-forms in database. Right-click the Sub-form list Work pane (right frame) and select Paste. 8. Insert DNI sub-form to Calendar form: Select Mail [R5.0] database or your customized database from the Design pane (left frame) and click Forms to list the forms in database. From the Form list Work pane (right frame), double click on the Calendar Entry form to bring up the Calendar Entry form. Click the spot in the Calendar Entry form that you want the sub-form to be inserted to. From the menu bar, choose Create4Insert Subform to bring up the Insert Sub-form dialog box.
Select Aastra DNI from the Insert Sub-form list box and click the OK button to insert the selected sub-form to the Calendar Entry form. 9. The updated mail template will take effect from the next day automatically.
127
D.N.A. Installation
Use D.N.A. Provided Mail Template 1. Start up Lotus Notes 2. Copy DNA template file from local to server From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box. Select Local in the Server combo-box. Click Browse button to select dni50s.ntf template file. Click Open. From menu bar, choose File4Database4New Copy to open the Copy Database dialog box.
Select the server (Server Name/Certifier, e.g., bt-inv1247/domino50) in Server combobox and click the OK button. 3. Inherit the mail database design for each individual user from DNI template From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box. Select the server (Server Name/Certifier, e.g., bt-inv1247/domino50) in the Server combo-box. Select the clients mail template (e.g., jsmith.nsf for John Smith).
Click the Design icon to go to the Design page. Check Inherit design from template and change the Template name text field to DNI template name (e.g., DNI English v5.0 for English version). 4. Repeat step 3 for all other users 5. The new template will take effect from the next day automatically.
Lotus Notes 6.0 or 6.5

Link DNI Sub-template with Standard Mail Template or Customized Mail Template (recommended) 1. Start up Lotus Domino Designer 2. Copy DNA template file from local to server From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box. Select Local in the Server combo-box. Click Browse button to select the dni60sub.ntf template file. Click Open. From menu bar, choose File4Database4New Copy to open the Copy Database dialog box.
Select the server (Server Name/Certifier, e.g., bt-inv1247/domino60) in the Server combo-box and click the OK button. 3. Open standard or customized Mail template From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box. Select the server (Server Name/Certifier, e.g., bt-inv1247/domino60) in the Server combo-box.
Select Mail [R6] or your customized database in Database list box. Click the Open button. 4. Open DNI template From menu bar, choose File4Database4Open to open the Open Database dialog box.
128
D.N.A. Installation
Select the server (Server Name/Certifier, e.g., bt-inv1247/domino60) in the Server combo-box.
Select the DNA Template English v6.0 in Database list box. Click the Open button. 5. Link form: Select the DNA Template English v6.0 database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Forms to list the forms in database. From the Form list Work pane (right frame), right-click the AbsenceCode form and select Copy. Select Mail [R6] database or your customized database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Forms to list the forms in database.
Right-click the Form list Work pane (right frame) and select Paste. 6. Link view Select the DNA Template English v6.0 database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Views to list the views in database. From the View list Work pane (right frame), right-click on [AastraDiversionCode] view and select Copy.
Select the Mail [R6] database or your customized database from the Design pane (left frame); click Views to list the views in database. Right-click the View list Work pane (right frame) and select Paste. 7. Link sub-form: Select DNA Template English v6.0 database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Shared Code and then click Subforms to list the sub-forms in database. From the Subform list Work pane (right frame), right-click on the AastraDNI sub-form and select Copy.
Select the Mail [R6] database or your customized database from the Design pane (left frame). Click Shared Code and then click Subforms to list the sub-forms in database. Right-click the Sub-form list Work pane (right frame) and select Paste. 8. Insert DNI sub-form to Calendar form: Select Mail [R6] database or your customized database from the Design pane (left frame) and click Forms to list the forms in database. From the Form list Work pane (right frame), double click on the Calendar Entry form to bring up the Calendar Entry form. Click the spot in the Calendar Entry form where you want the sub-form to be inserted. From the menu bar, choose Create4Resource4Insert Subform to bring up the Insert Subform dialog.
Select Aastra DNI from the Insert Subform list box and click the OK button to insert the selected sub-form to the Calendar Entry form. 9. The updated mail template will take effect from the next day automatically.
Installing D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration on Notes Client

Before Lotus Notes clients can use the D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration additions, the user must install Lotus Notes Integration from the D.N.A. Server 1. Run Lotus Notes Integration client installation on the D.N.A. Server at \\DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\LotusNotes for Notes 4.6 or \\DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\LotusNotes50 for Notes 5.0 or \\DNA_S\MRS\InstallationFiles\ClientInstallation\LotusNotes60 for Notes 6.0
129
D.N.A. Installation
2. Choose installation option Lotus Notes Client Installation and the desired language to install D.N.A. Integration software on a Lotus Notes client machine into the \\\Notes directory.
Registry Value for Message Diversion Synchronization

Two Registry values - SynchInterval and DiversionDays are used for message diversion synchronization from Lotus Notes to D.N.A. Server.
Registry location
Notes 4.6 - HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\Integration\Lotus\ Notes 5.0 - HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\Integration\Lotus50\ Notes 6.0 - HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\Integration\Lotus60\ SynchInterval. This Registry key value is used to define the data synchronization period. The DNI will poll the new changes made from Lotus Notes and send to D.N.A. Server based on SynchInterval. By default the value is set to 120 seconds (=78 Hex value). Message Diversions from D.N.A. server are sent instantly to the DNI client and are not affected by the SynchInterval value. DiversionDays. This Registry key value is used to define the number of days future message diversion information is displayed. LNI will retrieve this setting whenever data synchronization occurs. By default the value is set to 3 days. If the value is > 31 days, it will be treated as 31 days. If value is < 3 days, it will be treated as 3 days. The number of days includes the current day (e.g., 3 days means today plus the next two days).
COMPUTER or USER ID User Defined Fields

You need to link a User Defined Field (UDF) with DMG subscribers for Message Diversion to work with Lotus Notes Integration. The default UDF type is COMPUTER and the USER ID type is an option. When COMPUTER type is used, the extension associated with the computer name can be diverted. With this option, Lotus Notes client computers can only handle message diversions to one extension regardless of the user logged on. When USER ID type is used, the extension associated with the logged on user ID can be diverted. With this option, Lotus Notes client computers can handle message diversions for any logged on user.
To use the COMPUTER type default

1. Run the Directory Configuration utility and add an unshareable UDF of type COMPUTER to the database. 2. Run Directory Manager and add the Lotus Notes client computer name information to D.N.A. Directory.
To use the USER ID type option

1. Change the following Registry key from 0 to 1. 2. HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\RemoteDS\Manager
\UseUserIDForCalendarIntegration
3. Stop and restart the D.N.A. RDS service. 4. Run the Directory Configuration utility to add a non-shareable UDF of type USER ID. 5. Run Directory Manager and add the Windows user ID information to the D.N.A. Directory.
130
D.N.A. Installation
Help
After installation to a Lotus Notes Client Machine, the D.N.A. Lotus Notes Integration User Help can be accessed using the Start menu from the same program group as D.N.A. Integration. For example: Programs4Lotus Notes4D.N.A. Integration Help
D.N.A. Client Installation on Windows XP

When installing D.N.A. on a Windows XP client, the default read/write privilege is read only. Write privileges must be granted to users of the D.N.A. applications for the DNA_C directory. Installation of a D.N.A. client on Windows XP will fail when different languages are chosen in the settings of the Input Locales, Text Services and Input Languages dialog box (for handwriting recognition, keyboards, or speech recognition). Only one language is supported during installation, after D.N.A. is successfully installed, these settings can be changed to handle multiple languages.
Successful Configuration
After D.N.A. is successfully installed, these settings can be changed to any desired configuration.
131
D.N.A. Installation
To change settings, go to the Control Panel and select Regional and Language Options. Click the Languages tab and go to Details in the Text Services and Input Languages window.
Unsuccessful Configuration
This is not an exhaustive list of unsuccessful configurations. 1. When more than one keyboard layout is installed:
2. In some configurations with Speech Recognition (only when Office XP is installed):
132
D.N.A. Installation
D.N.A. Service Pack Installation

Aastra releases D.N.A. Service Packs according to a published schedule. D.N.A. Service Pack installation normally contains patches only. Occasionally, a D.N.A. Service Pack may be released as a media kit. You should then treat the service pack as a new minor release and ignore this section. The service pack contents will vary since service packs are not full media kits, and contains patches only. The following components may be included: D.N.A. Fixes for MRS, DMG, EMG, OWS, PMG, PPMLite, ACA, DME and DOI. Note: Outlook Integration is released as a full installation package but packed with the D.N.A. installation under DMG. Lotus Released as a full installation package, if there are changes. May include LotusNotesIntegration46, LotusNotesIntegration50, and LotusNotesIntegration60, depending upon whether there is a fix for the version supported. ACC Released as a full installation package, if there are changes. Personal Assistant Released as a full installation package, if there are changes. You must apply the D.N.A. Service Pack under the following circumstances:
133
D.N.A. Installation
Add component (DMG, EMG, OWS, or PMG) to the existing D.N.A. server or client. You must reapply the service pack even it has been installed before. Add new D.N.A. client Re-install D.N.A. server or client from CD or Control Panel Re-install ACA, DME, or PPMLite from CD or Control Panel Add ACA, DME, or PPMLite to an existing D.N.A. system regardless of whether the service pack has been applied previously. D.N.A. service packs may contain fixes for ACA, DME, and PPMLite, However, these applications come with a separate installation package on the media kit. There are two ways to upgrade them to the latest service pack after they are installed. The first method is preferred. 1. Apply serviced pack only once - Install D.N.A. server or client - Install ACA, DME, or PPMLite - Install D.N.A. service pack 2. Apply service pack twice - Install D.N.A. server or client - Install D.N.A. service pack - Install ACA, DME, or PPMLite - Install D.N.A. service pack again to apply ACA, DME, or PPMLite fixes
134
Chapter 7 ACC Installation

Server Installation
Note: To optimize performance of ACC and IP Telephony, special consideration must be given to the network setup and throughput. For additional information on network setup and network bandwidth requirements for IP Telephony, consult the document INSTALLATION PLANNING 79/1531-APD 101 02 Uen. This document is available in the MD110 online documentation.
Server Installation
The server installation is installed on the IIS server machine. It can be installed from CD-ROM or from the network. Warning: An administrator privilege is required for Server installation.
Installation Wizard
A step-by-step wizard guide is provided to help the user to go through the installation procedures. This wizard will prompt all necessary questions with default values and capture all information and the installation can then be run without an attendant.
Pre-requisites
Existence of D.N.A. Server Component
The D.N.A. Server Component is an essential component for the ACC application. This means if the D.N.A. Applications Suite server version shares the same system with IIS Server, the D.N.A. Server Component must be installed first. If D.N.A. Application Suite and IIS Server are on different systems, then the D.N.A. Server Component client version must be installed on the IIS Server first. The ACC Server installation will check the existence of D.N.A. Server Component. An error message is displayed and installation is then aborted if D.N.A. Server Component does not exist. Note: ACC requires the SYSTEM user account to set or change Personal Number. For further information, refer to Configuration for Personal Number access in the Configuration section.
Existence of IIS
The ACC Server installation will check the existence of IIS 5.0 or later. An error message is displayed and installation is then aborted if IIS 5.0 or later does not exist.
135
ACC Installation
There are various installation options supported and the available installation options are detected automatically based on first time installation or if the ACC has been installed before.
New Installation
The installation program performs as a first time installation if ACC was not previously installed.
Reinstallation
This option is available if the current product version of ACC installation is detected. All necessary information is retrieved from the Registry or other sources and no question is asked. The installation program reinstalls the product and updates the system configurations accordingly. During the reinstallation process, the Ecc.cfg will not be updated in order to preserve the locale specific settings that are changed by the System Administrator. Warning: Due to a limitation with InstallShield, if the installation files are stored on a network drive, the user must map the network drive to a local drive prior to invoking the Reinstallation process. Note: If you are reinstalling and your current version is D.N.A. 5.1 or prior, there is a new Registry value that must be configured. It is contained in the configuration file ACC_Update.cfg. Please ensure that the access code for Diversion Bypass is correct (i.e., replace the value 1 with the Diversion Bypass code for your market).
Uninstall
This option is available if a current version of ACC is detected. The user is prompted for confirmation of un-installation. All the installed components (including application files, Registry keys, Registry values, etc.) are removed when confirmation has been given.
Registration Information
For the first time installation (new installation), the User Name and Company Name are prompted and information is stored in the Registry.
Virtual Directory
The installation program will detect the D.N.A. application suite location and create two virtual directories ACC and a virtual directory associated with a sitename. The number of virtual directories depends on the Number of Sites configured. All files including ASP pages, locales, the client web-installation program, and the installation configuration file are installed in the selected directory. The target directory is stored in the Registry.
ApplicationLink Configuration
The installation program will prompt the user for the ApplicationLink server name and port number (defaults to 2555) for each of the defined PBX nodes. This dialog box will also be displayed during reinstallation if there are not any nodes defined for ApplicationLink configuration. The collected information is stored in the ecc.cfg configuration file for client installation to use.
136
ACC Installation
Note: If you need to rename or add/remove ApplicationLink servers later, reinstall ACC Server. This will update the ApplicationLink configuration information in the ecc.cfg configuration file on the server, and the clients will automatically retrieve this updated information the next time ACC is run.
Number of Sites
This dialog has been added to ACC server 1.4 to support ACC multisite installation.The installation program will prompt the user for the Number of Sites to be configured during the ACC server installation.
Site Configuration
This dialog has been added to ACC server 1.4 to support ACC multisite installation. The installation program will prompt the user for Site configuration information including Site Name (defaults to one site), AutoGKDiscovery ON/OFF, Gatekeeper Address, Backup Gatekeeper Address and Key Stroke Delay for each of the site. The Key Stroke Delay defaults to 180. If AutoGKDiscovery is set to ON, the Gatekeeper Address and Backup Gatekeeper Address options are disabled. The information provided for each site in this dialog is stored in the Ecc.cfg file of that site specific folder and will be loaded to the ACC client system during the ACC client installation.
Summary Information
For a first time installation (new installation), all the user options and selections are listed for verification before copying the files and setting up the systems. The user can change the selections if desired. The installation runs without attendant after this point.
Configurations
Registry Setting
The application key \ECC is created under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson. All the sub-keys or Registry values
associated with ACC must be under the \ECC key. No Registry values are allowed under the Ericsson key directly. The same rules also apply to the other Registry hives. The following standard Registry values are created under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECC\CurrentVersion:
InstallDateServer the date that installation is performed CompanyName UserName ProductNameServer the official complete product name ProductVersion the product version number TargetDirectoryServer the target directory where application files are stored NumberOfSites Number of Sites configured. The following registry values are created under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ericsson \ECC:
137
ACC Installation
ECC_Site1,ECC_Site2 ... ECC_Siten where n is the number of sites configured and each registry value will have the name of a site.
Client Configurations
ECCClient.ini The ACC Server Name is stored in ECCClient.ini. Each site specific folder has its sitename stored in the ECCClient.ini file. This file is included in the ACC Client installation CAB file by repacking the CAB file during ACC server installation run time. This is to prevent the ACC client installation from querying the user for the info. Ecc.cfg Some of the features in ACC require the configuration of market dependent parameters. These should be updated in the installation configuration file Ecc.cfg, to match the specific installations configuration. Be sure to only change the access code digits, and not any of the other format characters. The Ecc.cfg file will, by default, be found in the virtual directory Sitename, located in the default website location (\dna_s\ or \dna_c\). The options configured in Ecc.cfg will be set at each ACC client installation in the ACC client machines Windows Registry. Note that when the ACC server is re-installed, the installation program will overwrite the existing ECC.cfg so that the changes made by the ACC administrator will not be preserved. The ACC multisite installation allows us to configure the values of AutoGKDiscovery, Gatekeeper, Gatekeeper_Backup, and Key Stroke Delay for each site.The values configured for each site are stored in the ECC.cfg file of that site specific folder.
The values that must be configured include: AudioCodec=729 Replace the digits 729 with the appropriate selection as follows. The options are: 711: G.711 Codec 7231: G.723 Codec 729: G.729 Codec 729ab: G.729a or G.729 Codec AutoGKDiscovery = 0 Set to 1 to enable or 0 to disable the Automatic Gatekeeper Discovery option AutoGKDiscovery_Backup=0 Set to 1 to enable or 0 to disable the Automatic Gatekeeper Discovery option for the backup gatekeeper BypassDiversionFmt=*1*%s# Replace the digit 1 with the appropriate market code for the dialling procedure to bypass diversion CallGroupPickUpFmt=xx Replace the xx with the Call Group pickup access code that is set in the PBX. Once this value is updated, the new value will be set at each ACC client installation in the ACC client machines Windows Registry.
138
ACC Installation
CancelAllCallbackFmt=#6# Replace the digit 6 with the appropriate market code for the dialling procedure to cancel all callbacks CancelIndCallbackFmt=#6*%s# Replace the digit 6 with the appropriate market code for the dialing procedure to cancel individual callbacks CancelManualMsgWaitingFmt=#31# Replace the digits 31 with the appropriate market code for the dialling procedure to cancel Manual Message Waiting DNAIIS=BT-PCA This entry indicates the name of the D.N.A. IIS Server, and will be set automatically by installation. DNAServerName=BT-PCA This entry indicates the name of the D.N.A. Server, and will be set automatically by installation. Gatekeeper = 138.85.0.0 Set to the IP address of the PBX gatekeeper Gatekeeper_Backup=138.85.0.0 If the clients will use a backup gatekeeper, set to the IP address of the backup gatekeeper GatekeeperID=LIM1 If your installation is using Automatic Gatekeeper Discovery, replace LIM1 with the identifier for the PBX Gatekeeper to which the client will connect GatekeeperID_Backup=LIM2 If the clients will use a backup gatekeeper, and use Automatic Gatekeeper Discovery to connect to the backup gatekeeper, replace LIM2 with the identifier for the backup gatekeeper to which the client will connect. GatekeeperPollFlag=0 Set to 1 to enable polling of the gatekeeper or 0 to disable (Refer to the ACC Users Guide for more information on gatekeeper polling) GatekeeperPollRate=60 Set to the frequency rate of the polling in number of seconds. The minimum is 30 seconds. LocalAreaCode=714 Set to the local area code. When the user enters a TAPI format dialling string, ACC uses this parameter to determine if the user is making a local call or not. If the call is not local, then ACC will prepend PrefixLongDistance to the dialing string. LocalCountryCode=1 Set to the country code. When the user enters a TAPI format dialling string, ACC uses this parameter to determine if the user is making an international call or not. If the call is international, then ACC will prepend PrefixInternational to the dialing string. PortDNAIIS=80 Set to the destination port number used to access the D.N.A. IIS Server. PortCallSignal=0 This is the source port number used for H.323 call control messages. If the value is 0, a port will be assigned dynamically. Only modify this value if you need to run simultaneous H.323 clients on one machine (such as ACC and NetMeeting) and there is a conflict, or due to restrictions on your network. Note that the destination port is either set to a well-known port, 1720, or specified by the gatekeeper and its not configured by ACC.
139
ACC Installation
PortRAS=0 This is the source port number used to register with the gatekeeper. If the value is 0, a port will be assigned dynamically. Only modify this value if you need to select a specific port for registration due to restrictions on your network. Note that the destination port is a well-known port, 1719, designated for gatekeepers and it is not configured by ACC. PortRTP=0 This is the source port number used for voice data packets. If the value is 0, the default port will be used, which is 2326. Only modify this value if you need to select a specific port due to restrictions on your network. Note that the destination port is specified by the other party and its not configured by ACC. PrefixInternational= To have ACC automatically prepend a prefix number(s) for international calls, set this value to the appropriate prefix. PrefixLocal= To have ACC automatically prepend a prefix number(s) for local calls, set this value to the appropriate prefix. PrefixLongDistance= To have ACC automatically prepend a prefix number(s) for long distance calls, set this value to the appropriate prefix. ScanAdapters=0 Set this value to 1 for ACC to automatically attempt to register with the gatekeeper on all network adapters visible to ACC. If ACC fails to register with the gatekeeper on the default network adapter (the first adapter which appears in the Adapter list of the ACC Network Setup dialog), it will continue connection attempts to the gatekeeper using the other defined network adapters, until it successfully connects, or all adapters fail to connect. Note that if ACC is configured to use a specific network adapter (i.e., Use Selected Network Adapter is checked in the ACC Network Setup dialog) or if ACC is configured to use a VPN with Network Address Translation (i.e., Using VPN with Network Address Translation (NAT) is checked in the ACC Network Setup dialog, or UsingVPNwithNAT is set to 1 in the ACC.cfg configuration file), the ScanAdapters value will be ignored. StatusLog=1 Set to 1 to enable or 0 to disable the output of the Ecc.log file. The Ecc.log records all the H323 messages sent to and received from the gatekeeper. UseGatekeeper = 1 Set to 1 to enable use of the gatekeeper or 0 to disable UseGatekeeper_Backup=0 Set to 1 to enable the user of a backup gatekeeper for the user, or set to 0 to disable UsingVPNwithNAT=0 Set this value to 1 if the gatekeeper connection is made through a Virtual Private Network which includes a Network Address Translator. For more details, refer to "Using ACC with a Virtual Private Network (VPN)" in the Configuration section.
140
ACC Installation
VPNClientIPAddress=138.85 If the UsingVPNwithNAT flag is set, ACC will attempt to retrieve the VPN Client IP Address from the system automatically. If more than one IP address is retrieved from the system, ACC will select the first one that matches VPNClientIPAddress. Since the last octet of the VPN client IP address is likely to be changed every time when the user logs on to the VPN, it is recommended that you set up only the first 2 or 3 octets of the IP address in this variable so that the user doesnt have to update this variable constantly whereas ACC is still able to select the correct address based on this variable. For more details, refer to "Using ACC with a Virtual Private Network (VPN)" in the Configuration section. AutoAnswer=0 Set to 1 to answer incoming calls automatically or set to 0 to answer manually from incoming dialog. AutoAnswerDelay=3 Set to 3 to play ring tone for 3 sec before answering automatically using AutoAnswer option. HighPriority=1 Set to 1 to run ACC with High Priority. If this option is not set, ACC runs with Normal Priority. Version.cfg A configuration file containing the version number is maintained by the installation program and stored on the ACC server. FileVersion - ACC file version number ServicePackVersion Service Pack number for About Box use
Uninstall Access
The standard uninstall access is set via Control Panel / Add Remove Program function. In addition, the uninstall may also be accessed through CD-ROM or network shared-point.
Status and Log files

All operations and transactions performed during installation procedure are recorded in a detail log file for audit trail use.
Post Installation
The ACC server installation creates the ACC folder and the ACC_Sitename folder for all the sites configured during the ACC server installation in either the DNA_S or DNA_C folder.

ACC Server is installed on the same machine as D.N.A. Server
Note: Please also reference the Configurations to Run D.N.A. Web Applications in Worker Process Isolation Mode and D.N.A. Server and IIS 6.0 Server on Different Machines sections. Run ACC Server under a separate application pool and a different user identity 1. Create a custom user identity
141
ACC Installation
Create a new user such as AastraWeb account. This account can be used for other Aastra Web applications as well. Add the AastraWeb account to the Users and IIS_WPG account groups on the ACC server. 2. Create a custom Application Pool In the IIS Manager, right-click on Application Pools, select New, then Application Pool A pop-up dialog will appear, prompting you for the application pool ID. Use a name such as ACCPool and select the first radio button that uses the default settings. 3. Customize the Application Pool Right-click on ACCPool and select Properties In the Recycling tab, un-check "Recycle worker processes" In the Performance tab, un-check "Shutdown worker process after being idle for 20 minutes and check Enable CPU monitoring (to Max). For CPU use 100, and refresh CPU usage in 5 minutes increments. In the Identity tab, select the second radio button (Configurable) and specify the custom user identity that was created earlier in step 1. Enter the assigned password and click OK. You will then be asked to reconfirm the password. Enter the password and click OK again. Verify that the application pool has been started by refreshing the IIS Manager view (i.e., click on the Action menu and then Refresh). A started application pool will have an icon with green arrows overlaid on top. A pool that has not been started will have a red x overlaid on top of the icon (possible cause could be that an incorrect password was entered). Please ensure it is running properly. 4. Assign ACC Virtual Directory to Application Pool In the IIS Manager under the ACC virtual directory, right-click and select Properties. Under the Virtual Directory tab, in the Application Settings section, select the ACCPool option from the Application Pool dropdown list. 5. Assign Anonymous Identity Virtual Directory Go to the Directory Security tab. Under the Authentication and access control section, click Edit. An Authentication Methods dialog will appear. Check the Enable anonymous access checkbox and enter the AastraWeb user created in step 1. Enter a valid password, and also ensure that the bottom checkboxes are unchecked. Click OK until all dialog boxes have disappeared
6. Reset IIS Go to command prompt and execute iisreset to stop and restart IIS.
ACC Server is installed on a different machine than D.N.A. server

Note: Please also reference D.N.A. Server and IIS 6.0 Server on Different Machines in the Configuration section. Run ACC Server under a separate application pool and under a domain user 1. Create a domain user account
142
ACC Installation
ACC Server will need to access data on the D.N.A. server, which means ACC Server needs to be properly authenticated on the D.N.A. server with a domain user account. Add this domain user to the IIS_WPG account group on the ACC server. 2. Create a custom Application Pool In the IIS Manager, right-click on Application Pools, select New, then Application Pool A pop-up dialog will appear, prompting you for the application pool ID. Use a name such as ACCPool and select the first radio button that uses the default settings. 3. Customize the Application Pool Right-click on ACCPool and select Properties In the Recycling tab, un-check "Recycle worker processes" In the Performance tab, un-check "Shutdown worker process after being idle for 20 minutes and check Enable CPU monitoring (to Max). For CPU use 100, and refresh CPU usage in 5 minutes increments. In the Identity tab, select the second radio button (Configurable) and specify the domain user account that was created earlier in step 1. Enter the assigned password and click OK. You will then be asked to reconfirm the password. Enter the password and click OK again. Verify that the application pool has been started by refreshing the IIS Manager view (i.e., click on the Action menu and then Refresh). A started application pool will have an icon with green arrows overlaid on top. A pool that has not been started will have a red x overlaid on top of the icon (possible cause could be that an incorrect password was entered). Please ensure it is running properly. 4. Assign ACC Virtual Directory to Application Pool In the IIS Manager under the ACC virtual directory, right-click and select Properties. Under the Virtual Directory tab, in the Application Settings section, select the ACCPool option from the Application Pool dropdown list. 5. Assign Anonymous Identity Virtual Directory Go to the Directory Security tab. Under the Authentication and access control section, click Edit. An Authentication Methods dialog will appear. Check the Enable anonymous access checkbox and enter the AastraWeb user created in step 1. Enter a valid password, and also ensure that the bottom checkboxes are unchecked.
Click OK until all dialog boxes have disappeared 6. Reset IIS Go to command prompt and execute iisreset to stop and restart IIS. Note: If for any reason a domain account cannot be used, please reference MSDN article 176380, How To Use ASP with a SQL Trusted Connection with Guest Account: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/176380/EN-US/
Client Installation
The client installation is a self-extracting file that can be accessed by the user through an internet/intranet website. The user needs to go to the applicable Web page and find the package to download, extract, and begin the installation. The default virtual URL to install the ACC client is http://<EccServer>/ sitename.
143
ACC Installation
There are various installation options supported. The available installation options are detected automatically based on first time installation or if ACC has been installed.
New Installation
The installation program performs as a first time installation if there is no ACC installed before.
Reinstallation
This option is available if the current product version of ACC installation is detected. All necessary information is retrieved from the Registry or other sources and no question is asked. The installation program reinstalls the product and updates the system configurations accordingly.
Uninstall
This option is available if a current version of ACC is detected. The user is prompted for confirmation of un-installation. All the installed components (including application files, Registry keys, Registry values, program groups, short-cut keys, etc.) are removed when confirmation has been given.
License Agreement
For a first time installation (new installation), the License Agreement is displayed.
Registration Information
For a first time installation (new installation), the User Name and Company Name are prompted and information is stored in the Registry.
File Destination
For a first time installation (new installation), the default destination \Program Files\Ericsson\ECC is prompted. The user can change the target directory if desired through the standard directory selection browsing. All files are installed in the desired directory and target directory is stored in the Registry.
Connection with ACC Server Web Site

For a first time installation (new installation), the user is prompted for the ACC server name or server IP address for server website connection. If the connection fails at startup or runtime, a message is displayed and the user is prompted to enter the server name or IP address again. The server name or IP address is stored in the Registry if connection is made successfully. Note: If the ACC server has been upgraded to 1.4 and the client is version 1.3, a message prompt will NOT appear to indicate that there is a client/server mismatch. This is because the ACC_install folder for version checking has not been created from the information located in the version.cfg file.
Summary Information
For a first time installation (new installation), all the user options or selections are listed for verification before copying the files and setting up the systems. The user can change the selections if desired. The installation runs without an attendant after this point.
144
ACC Installation
Configurations
Registry Setting
The application key \ECC is created under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson. All the sub-keys or Registry values
associated with ACC must be under the \ECC key. No Registry values are allowed under the Ericsson key directly. The same rules also apply to the other Registry hives. The following standard Registry values are created under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECC\CurrentVersion:
InstallDateClient the date that installation is performed CompanyName UserName ProductNameClient the official complete product name ProductVersion the product version number TargetDirectoryServer the target directory where application files are stored NumberOfSites Number of sites to be configured. The following standard registry values are created under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Ericsson \ECC: ACC_Site1,ACC_Site2 ... ACC_Siten where n is the number of sites configured and each registry value will have the name of a site.
Client Configurations
All the configuration settings are retrieved from the configuration file stored on the server and then saved in the client Registry. User specific Registry values are stored in HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Ericsson\ECC.
Program Group and Short-cut Keys

The program group Start4Program4D.N.A. Application Suite is created with an entry for the Aastra Communication Client, to invoke the ACC application.
Uninstall Access
The standard uninstall access is set via Control Panel / Add Remove Program function. In addition, the un-installation can also be accessed through CD-ROM or network shared-point.
Status and Log files

All operations and transactions performed during the installation procedure are recorded in a detail log file for audit trail use.
Client Update
The client update is required to make sure the ACC user is always using the latest application.
145
ACC Installation
File Version Comparison

The ACC application version number is compared between the client and server whenever the ACC application is launched. If the server version is newer, the user is prompted to update. The user can choose between Accept and Postpone. If update is accepted, the connection with the ACC Sever website is established based on the ACC server name or IP address stored in the Registry. The user is prompted for a new URL entry or it will cancel out if the connection fails.
Client Installation Download and Update

After connection with the ACC Server website is made, the user can download the new version of the self-extracting file and begin the installation. The Reinstallation option is available to update the system.
Compatibility
The ACC Server installation must: Windows Server 2008 -orWindows Server 2003 Install on IIS 7.0 or 6.0 Install on D.N.A. 5.6 server or client Distribute on CD-ROM The ACC Client installation must: Windows XP Professional + SP2 -orWindows Vista Business Run with IE 5.5 or later and Netscape 4.x, 6.x, or 7.x
146
Chapter 8 Performance
Performance Enhancements
This section introduces steps you can take to improve D.N.A. performance, following system installation. Some of the improvements covered include: Creating more available memory (RAM) Improving OWS Supervisor performance Improving RDS performance Note: Not all of these performance remedies may apply to your situation. You must evaluate these options individually, with respect to your system requirements, system stability, and your own technical capabilities.
Creating More Available Memory

To improve performance on your PC, you can make the paging space larger by increasing your virtual memory. The ideal paging size should be twice the size of your physical memory. Before you can increase your virtual memory, you must correctly calculate the needs of your PC by using the table in the PC Hardware Requirements section. Once you have calculated the physical memory needed for your PC, you must double that amount for the virtual memory needed. For example, if you need 256 MB of physical memory for your PC, you will need 512 MB of virtual memory. Once you have your virtual memory calculated, you can enter this amount in Performance Options by completing the following steps: 1. 2. 16. 17. 18. Open the Control Panel on your PC. Select System Properties. Select the Advanced tab. Click the Performance Options button. The Performance Options dialog box appears. Under the Virtual Memory section, click the Change button. The Virtual Memory dialog box appears. 19. Enter the amount of virtual memory (for purposes of this example, it would be 512 MB) in both the Initial size (MB) field and Maximum size (MB) field. 20. Click the Set button and exit the Control Panel.
147
Performance
Operator Workstation Supervisor

Use this information to improve the time required for the OWS Supervisor application on a D.N.A. client PC to connect with the OWS Supervisor server on a D.N.A. server PC. For more information, see http://www.microsoft.com/com/dcom.asp. In one documented case, connection time was reduced from about 15-20 seconds to 5-7 seconds. These changes apply only to the D.N.A. server PC. This change applies to the Windows Registry on the D.N.A. server PC. You must change the order that Microsoft's Distributed Component Object Model (DCOM) tries the installed network protocols. By default, TCP/IP is third. Performance is enhanced significantly when TCP/IP it is moved to the first position in the list. The protocol order is set by the Registry value "DCOM Protocols" found under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Rpc. The type is REG_MULTI_SZ. Confirm the following Default settings, then set the Registry according to the order of the Enhanced settings. Default ncadg_ip_udp ncadg_ipx ncacn_ip_tcp ncacn_spx ncacn_nb_nb ncacn_nb_ipx Enhanced
ncacn_ip_tcp ncadg_ip_udp ncadg_ipx ncacn_spx ncacn_nb_nb ncacn_nb_ipx
Restart the client PC for the new settings to take effect.
RDS Performance
This section provides the following performance remedies and enhancements for the Remote Data Server (RDS). Enable/Disable Local Database Integrity Check Reduce I/O Completion Ports in Large Systems Enable/Disable Incremental LDB Updates from DMG Configure RDS to Use Fewer SQL Connections. Note: If you choose to change any of the following Registry values, you must stop and restart RDS to have the change take effect.
LDB Integrity Check Feature

There is a feature in RDS to check the integrity of local databases. By default this feature is set to OFF, to activate this feature, set the following Windows Registry key on the D.N.A. Server to 1. Stop and restart RDS to take into account the modified Registry flag.
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\RemoteDS\Manager\VerifyLDBIndexIntegrity
148
Performance
After each change in Directory Manager, RDS will run an integrity check of the master local database files. If this check is successful, the changes will be synchronized to all client LDBs. This causes RDS to repopulate corrupted local databases whenever it detects DMG updates. This helps prevent corrupted server LDBs from being distributed to client PCs. Important! The disadvantage of enabling this integrity check will be a performance degradation of the server.
Reduce I/O Completion Ports in Large Systems

Support I/O Completion Ports in RDS. This allows the D.N.A. administrator to select the option to run RDS to allocate one thread per connected client or to allocate an I/O Completion port per connected client. This option can be selected by toggling the following Registry key:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\RemoteDS\Manager\UseMultiThreadedClientConn ections
The default setting for this flag is 1 (i.e., use multi-threaded client connections). For installation sites with more than 50 D.N.A. client installations, it is recommended that this flag be set to 0 (i.e., use I/O completion ports instead). For example, in a large system (more than 50 clients), RDS may run 410 threads at normal operation and 650 threads during peak times. With this change, RDS will run at 20 threads at normal operation and 260 threads during peak time. This should improve your server performance.
Enable/Disable Incremental LDB Updates from DMG

By default, this feature is enabled. Therefore, when DMG makes any updates, RDS broadcasts those updates to all clients; e.g., Operator Workstation. If this feature is disabled, RDS will not broadcast DMG updates until next scheduled LDB update. To configure the "Incremental Local Database Updates" flag, modify the following Registry key:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\RemoteDS\Manager\EnableIncrementalLDBUpdate s
=0: No incremental updates are sent to LDBs. Also, when DMG moves a department, it will not start a repopulation of the related LDB tables. Only scheduled updates will repopulate the LDB with the latest changes. =1: This is the default setting. The LDBs are updated immediately after a DMG change to the SQL database. Note: This setting also makes the following additional Registry key relevant:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\RemoteDS\Manager\LDBFastSyncFactor
The key value is used to indicate the threshold (percentage) of database change which triggers theFast LDB Synchronization process. It can be set manually or via a spin-box in the GUI. =2: This option enables incremental updates (this is small work for RDS), but with the condition to ignore any updates that force RDS to fully repopulate the LDB. Therefore, when DMG moves or changes the name of a department, RDS will not start the repopulation of related tables. This task is left to the scheduled nightly repopulation routine.
149
Performance
The above settings only effect DMG changes. So if you select configure RDS for maintenance repopulation, it will execute based on the current EnableIncrementalLDBUpdates setting. If you choose to change this flag, you must stop and restart the RDS Service to have the changes take effect.
Configure RDS to Use Fewer SQL Connections

System administrators can configure RDS to use fewer SQL connections by sharing the ODBC connections between threads. This feature is only recommended for small installations such as startup packages using a limited number of SQL connections (e.g., when using SQL Workstation 6.50 you have only 15 user connections). You may configure this option by modifying the following Registry key:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\RemoteDS\Manager\ShareODBCConnection
This flag is set to default to 0 (Disabled). To activate this option, set the flag to 1 (Enabled). If you choose to change this flag, you must stop and restart the RDS Service to have the changes take effect.
150
Chapter 9 D.N.A. Server

Facilities and Services
The D.N.A. Server is the security and support platform for the Dynamic Network Administration (D.N.A.) applications. The D.N.A. Server provides the structural platform for flexible integration of D.N.A. applications. Major components include the Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) module, the Remote Data Server (RDS), the common SQL database, security administration, license management facilities, and a set of comprehensive application support utilities. The D.N.A. Server is a collection of secured facilities and services that provide support and software security for D.N.A. applications. Primary D.N.A. Server facilities and services include: Security Data Server - The Security Data Server (SDS) provides high-level security in the form of licensing enforcement. SDS references encrypted licensing data to enforce authorized license limits. SDS also accesses data based on Logging Facilities Server requests. Remote Data Server - Remote Data Server (RDS) is a D.N.A. service module that maintains continuous network database synchronization between PBX nodes, the D.N.A. SQL server, and all D.N.A. clients (LDB). Logging Facilities Server - When you attempt to log-on to a D.N.A. application, the Logging Facilities Server (LFS) performs user authentication. LFS attempts to connect to SDS for on-demand access to D.N.A. SQL server security data. If the attempt fails, LFS connects to a local version of the database allowing essential security operations to proceed. When you attempt to access a remote data server (a server on a different network), LFS attempts to validate your access authorization at the remote server. Time System Server - D.N.A. Time System Server (TSS) is an optional D.N.A. service module that connects to an external time monitoring system. TSI allows diversions to be entered in the time monitoring system, transferred to the D.N.A. Directory Manager application, and registered in the D.N.A. Directory database. As well, Message Waiting (MWT) indications can be sent from D.N.A. to the time monitoring system. ACA Scheduler - A Windows service that handles the Profile scheduling. It will send the MML command to the corresponding PBX via a backend component (mmliosrv.exe) to activate the profile when the scheduled time arrives. However, the Scheduler only works with up to 50 PBXs, which is the limit of the backend component.
151
D.N.A. Server
Voice System Interface (VSI) - An ASCII protocol that provides the D.N.A. Voice System Interface to an external third party Integrated Voice Response (IVR) system. The VSI module allows voice mail integration and acts as a compatibility interface between the PBX and Voice Message Processing Systems. Capabilities include call diversion options, support for Message Waiting Indicators (MWI), and increased reliability of voice processing operations. PBX Service The PBX Service provides access and control over the signaling channel by which the PBX and OWS communicate. Although present on the D.N.A. server, it is only necessary that it run when using OWS or configuring the OWS telephone parameters. Serial Communications Server (SCS) The D.N.A. Server Utility that allows you to manage direct, Telnet, SCS, and third party serial communications port settings. Clock Synchronization Service The Clock Synchronization service (Clock Synch) sets the system clocks of client machines to match the time setting on the server. This allows all machines in the network to have their clocks set to the same value. This is particularly useful when using the Performance Data Manager, because it avoids gathering data with incorrect time stamps. LDAP A Windows service that provides an LDAP client (i.e., an Internet browser) to search and modify the D.N.A. directory. IP Service A Windows service that acts as an interface between Application Link and ACA to allow ACA users to access the call features such as Make call, Answer call, Hang up call, Conference call, Transfer call, Send DTMF tone, etc. These support resources are maintained and operated by network administrative and technical specialists. The following diagram illustrates the interaction between these D.N.A. client and server support resources.
152
D.N.A. Server
Administrative Tools
Administrative tools installed with the D.N.A. Server platform and with individual applications support various system configuration operations. The D.N.A. installation process automatically installs these tools. The following table explains how these utilities are used.
Tool RDS Configuration
How It Is Used
Installed On
Allows you to configure the Remote Data Server Server for D.N.A. database and application support roles, including network database synchronization between PBX nodes, the D.N.A. SQL Server, and D.N.A. Local Databases (LDBs). Provides controls for assigning and managing user descriptions and corresponding application access privileges. Server
User Configuration
TSS Configuration
Use the D.N.A. Time System Server Server Configuration Utility to set up and maintain communications and translation settings for Diversion and Message Waiting features. Use this D.N.A. Server administrative tool Server to build and maintain a list of database servers accessible on the network. The Serial Communications Server Utility Server and allows you to manage direct, Telnet, SCS, Client and third party serial communications port settings. Allows you to display D.N.A. license information. The MD110 Support Utility allows you to perform initial MD110 node configuration and data extraction for the D.N.A. OWS, EMG, PMG and applications. Server
D.N.A. Server Configuration
SCS Configuration
License Viewer
MD110 Support
Server and Client
Directory Configuration
Enables you to define the user-defined Server fields for directory database that best meet the needs of organizations they support.
LDAP Configuration The LDAP Configuration Utility enables Server you to configure the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) Server from anywhere on the network. It also allows
153
D.N.A. Server
Tool
How It Is Used you to add more LDAP directories to be used for searching people over the Internet/intranet from the Operator Workstation application and ACA.
Installed On
LDS Configuration
Allows you to setup other local database servers from one that is already configured.
Server and Client
Name Identity Conversion
Use the D.N.A. Name Identity Conversion Server Utility translate subscriber directory information into MML command files for D.N.A. telephone name display. Gives D.N.A. system administrators the Server ability to assign operators access to various departments within the organization. Determines what department data a given operator can access. Enables you to assign easily recognizable Server names to incoming trunks for efficient operator identification and routing. Use the D.N.A. Voice System Voice Server System Interface Configuration Utility to set up and maintain Diversion and Message Waiting communications settings between external Voice Systems and the D.N.A. Voice System Interface (VSI). For initial population of OWS directory assistance database. Runs on D.N.A. server and selected D.N.A. client workstations. Server and Client
Operator Configuration
Trunk Manager
VSI Configuration
Directory Import
Directory Export
Use the Export Utility to create .dat text Server and files of Dynamic Network Administration Client subscriber directory databases. The .dat files can then be imported into another D.N.A. installation with the Directory Import utility. Used to configure the ACA server and setting up the connection to Application Link. Server
ACA Configuration
154
D.N.A. Server
Changing Users, Servers, and Passwords

As with D.N.A. applications, most D.N.A. Server utilities are protected by access security controls. Access facilities allow you to change logged users, change D.N.A. servers, and change your personal password.
To Change Logged Users

1. Select Change Current User on the Application menu. 2. When the User Log On dialog box appears, type the new User Name and Password into the corresponding edit boxes. As you type the password, a string of asterisk characters (********) appears in the Password edit box, one asterisk for each character you type. Both the User Name and Password fields are case-sensitive, and you are allowed only a limited number of attempts. 21. Select a local or remote server from the DNA Server drop-down list. The initial security authorization check and all subsequent validation actions are directed toward the server you select. 22. Click the OK button. If the user name and password are valid, the new user will be logged on to the application with the access authorizations permitted in their user profile. If the logon attempt fails, the Logging Facilities Server (LFS) restores the original user as the currently logged on user.
To Change Logged D.N.A. Servers

1. Select Change Current User on the Application menu. 2. When the User Log On dialog box appears, type the new User Name and Password into the corresponding edit boxes. As you type the password, a string of asterisk characters (********) appears in the Password edit box, one asterisk for each character you type. Both the User Name and Password fields are case-sensitive, and you are allowed only a limited number of attempts. 23. Select a new local or remote server from the DNA Server drop-down list. 24. Click the OK button. If the user name and password are valid, user authentication and all subsequent actions will be directed to the new server.
To Change Your Password

Your password is your personalized access code that, along with your User Name, D.N.A. uses for verifying your access authorization. Changing your password from time to time is a recommended security precaution that helps prevent unauthorized access. 1. Select Change Password... on the Application menu. The Change Password dialog box is displayed. A user password can be up to 20 characters in length, and is case-sensitive. The Password Format box explains minimum character requirements for defining passwords. Field Explanation Total Length: Minimum number of characters required for a valid password. From the Total Length, the minimum number of alphabetic characters required. From the Total Length, the minimum number of numeric characters required.
Alphabetic:
Numeric:
155
D.N.A. Server
Field
Explanation
Non-alphanumeric: From the Total Length, the minimum number of non-alphabetic characters required. Example of non-alphanumeric characters are: -,&*# etc. 2. 25. 26. 27. Enter your existing password into the Old Password edit box. Enter your new password into the New Password edit box. Again, enter your new password into the Confirm New Password field. Check your entries and click the Save button.
Registry
Registry Settings
The Windows Registry is a database repository for information about a computers configuration. It is organized in a hierarchical structure of sub-trees and their keys, hives, and value entries. This section explains Registry settings that correspond to D.N.A. component properties not found in the GUI.
Operator Workstation Registry Settings

Setting up Subscriptions and Publications in RDS and/or LDS controls the D.N.A. directory servers accessed by Operator Workstation and Aastra Communication Assistant. Use the RDS Replication tab in RDS Configuration on your D.N.A. server or LDS Configuration on your D.N.A. client.
Scheduling a Task in the RDS Configuration Utility

Security settings on each machine is different. This causes scheduled tasks not to execute. In order to resolve this issue, RDS relies on a new registry key located below to determine how to start scheduled jobs.
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\RemoteDS\Manage\UseSAForScheduledProcess
The default value of this registry key is 0, meaning new processes will not inherent the security attribute from its parent process. When the registry key value is set to 1, the new launched schedule tasks will inherent its parent process' security information. The RDS service must be restarted after changing this registry key.
Using non-DNA extensions

In a DNA-MD110 integrated system, message diversions of only DNA users (those whose extensions are listed in DMG) can be set from the phone or any DNA application. For non-DNA users who want to use only MD110 message diversion functionality (phone diversion) manually set the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\RemoteDS\Manager\Igno reNonDNAExt to 1 and restart RDS service. The default value of this key is 0, i.e diversions can only be set for DNA users.
156
D.N.A. Server
Server Identification
Use the D.N.A. Server Configuration Utility to build and maintain a list of available database servers. Aastra's Dynamic Network Architecture relies on uniquely identified servers for centralized database and application support services. D.N.A. applications and utilities accessing network servers through security services require user logon and server selection. The Server Configuration Utility allows you to specify names and other attributes for the servers appearing in the User Logon D.N.A. Servers selection list.
LDS Servers
After a D.N.A. Client machine has been removed, the list of LDS servers in the D.N.A. Server must be updated manually by deleting the following Registry keys and restarting RDS.
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\RemoteDS\RDSClients\NumberOfLDSClients HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\RemoteDS\RDSClients\LDS000x
RDS will rebuild these Registry keys with the correct number of LDS servers.
Maintenance
SQL Database
This section explains SQL database upsizing and maintenance procedures.
Database Upsizing
You can re-size D.N.A. database components to accommodate changes in the network. Use the Resize Database option. 1. Re-run the D.N.A. installation and choose the Resize Database button on the D.N.A. Setup dialog box. 2. Choose or enter new space requirements in the Nodes and Extensions for Database, Upsizing Extension Per Node, and Upsizing Performance manager Node Setup dialogs. 28. Respond to the remaining prompts and instructions from the installation wizard.
Tasks
You must schedule or perform maintenance tasks such as backing up databases and dumping transaction logs in support of SQL Server database operations. Refer to your SQL server documentation for information on managing these maintenance tasks.
Transaction Log
Important! Do not confuse the SQL transaction log with the D.N.A. Transaction Log. These resources serve two unrelated purposes. Expired message diversions are kept as reference information until being deleted daily. PBXMessage Waiting indications are updated daily. Use the SCHEDULE1 on the RDS Schedules tab to schedule daily database clean up for message diversion and message waiting. RDS performs this maintenance routine CheckDB once per day.
157
D.N.A. Server
The CleanDB Routine

To maintain efficient D.N.A. operation, run CleanDB. CleanDB is an RDS function that deletes unused User-defined Fields (UDFs) and keywords. This routine is performed on a nightly basis. You may reschedule CleanDB from the RDS Schedules tab. If you choose to do so, it is recommended that you schedule this task to be run at least once per day.
Logging Facilities Server

When you attempt to log-on to a D.N.A. application, the Logging Facilities Server (LFS) performs user authentication. LFS attempts to connect to SDS for ondemand access to D.N.A. SQL server security data. If the attempt fails, LFS connects to a local version of the database allowing essential security operations to proceed. When you attempt to access a remote data server (a server on a different network), LFS attempts to validate your access authorization at the remote server.
Short Message Service

The Short Message Service (SMS) provides the capability to transfer short messages, up to 120 characters, between Short Message Terminals and DECT Mobile Stations via a Short Message Service Center (SMSC). SMSC is connected to the MD110 (BC11 or newer) via the NIU board. The procedure to initiate an SMS involves the following steps: A generic extension is initiated with the license parameter set to SMS. The SMS server number is initiated using CXSYI with the SMSN parameter set to the generic extension initiated in previous step. Connection between the SMS server and the NIU I/O device is established using MSCOI command. Prior to MX-ONE TSW A generic extension is initiated. The SMS server number is initiated using CXSYI with the SMSN parameter set to the generic extension initiated in previous step. Connection between the SMS server and the NIU I/O device is established using MSCOI command. For MX-ONE TSW A generic extension is initiated. The generic extension number, the Message Service number, is affiliated to the SMS Service Centre through a specified I/O port using the MSCOI command. Multiple message service connections can be initiated with this command with the respective directory numbers and IO-DEVs. For MX-ONE 3.1 A generic extension is initiated. Connection between the SMS server and the LIM is established using the sms_server_initiate command.
From MX-ONE TSW onwards, more than one SMS Server can be initiated from Extension Manager.
158
D.N.A. Server
Extension Manager supports initiation, change, and removal of SMS. An SMS message will continually attempt to send the message to the phone until it is received. For MX-ONE 3.1, one SMS server per LIM can be initiated. Change the SMS server functionality by deleting the current SMS server and initiating a new SMS server using another generic extension.
Limitations
You can only send SMS messages from Operator Workstation. Sending an SMS message to more than 1 handset at a time or from one handset to another are not supported. You cannot have the D.N.A. SMS server and another SMS server connected to the MD110 at the same time. This is a MD110 limitation.
Short Message Service Standby

The standby SMS is started automatically once the SMS itself is started. To turn the standby service off, change the Registry value of HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\SMS\Manager\ActivateStandbySMS to 0 (zero) and restart the service.
Local Database Compression

The Local Databases used by Operator Workstation can be compressed. If you have WAN links, we recommend you enable this feature. To enable this feature, you have to set the following Registry key. This default setting for this flag is 0 (Disabled). Set it to 1 to enable it.
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\RemoteDS\Manager\EnableFilexfrCompression
The compression is done just before the Local Database (LDB) files are sent over the network. They are then uncompressed by Operator Workstation right after they are retrieved from the network. Thus, the files can be accessed by Operator Workstation uncompressed.
The machines at both ends must have D.N.A. installed. The supporting components are in the client files in DNA_C\SHARE\BIN. Both machines must have the Registry value set to 1. You can see when compression is active by watching the file transfers in Remote Data Manager.
159
D.N.A. Server
GICI Connection
Once started, RDS listens for a GICI connection. A GICI connection is a socket connection initiated from the PBX. Once RDS receives a connection attempt, it will monitor heartbeat events from the PBX. The heartbeat (event 98), is initiated from the client (PBX) to RDS. RDS will acknowledge the heartbeat with event 93, and then send a heartbeat response (event 99). The PBX will in turn acknowledge this with event 93. If no events (heartbeat or other event) are received from the PBX for 5 minutes, RDS will close the socket connection and then start listening for connection attempts. The event signaling can be monitored via RDM.
Message Diversion and Secondary and/or Shared Extension

This section describes in detail how message diversion works together with secondary extension and/or shared extension. Please note that other characteristics, such as overlapped message diversion and periodic message diversion have lower priority and may impact the active message diversion computation. However, once a message diversion is determined to become active, then the following applies. The functionality described is extension-centric. That is, the extension in question enters the state described. However, performing directory searches from OWS/ACA/ACC provides a user-centric view. Thus, a users message diversion state may not be reflected on extensions for the user. The definitions of secondary and shared extension are: A user having more than one extension has one primary extension and one or more secondary extension(s). The primary extension is usually the published phone number (extension) for the user while the secondary extension is usually a non-published phone number (extension). As a user can have only one primary extension, all other extensions are considered secondary extensions.
160
D.N.A. Server
A shared extension is an extension that is shared among two or more users. A shared extension can be a primary extension or a secondary extension for the user. As a shared extension is shared among two or more subscribers, one of the subscribers is configured to be the primary subscriber.
There are two methods in which message diversion can propagate between primary and secondary extensions. Top-down. The message diversion is set on the users primary extension. RDS Configuration controls whether the message diversion shall also be considered for the users secondary extension(s). For more information refer to Message Diversion Options in RDS Configuration online help. Bottom-up. The message diversion is set on the users secondary extension. A Registry key controls whether the message diversion shall also be considered for the users primary extension. Set HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\RemoteDS\Manager\MsgDivToPrimaryExtension to 0 to disable and 1 to enable.
Normally, message diversions are managed on an extension level. However, OWS can show information using both a subscriber view and extension view. The OWS main window uses a subscriber view when performing a search operation. The detailed information view shows the extension view. If searching based on an extension number, then the OWS main window will show the subscriber view, whereas the detail view will show the extension view. Depending on the extension number used in the search, the detail information can be for primary or secondary extension. Thus, it is possible to see a message diversion in the detail view that is not visible in the main window. The following is the rule for setting message diversion using top-down method. Primary extension OWS (subscriber) Secondary nonshared extension Shared extension OWS (non-shared secondary extension) OWS (shared extension) No No No Yes (3) No No
161
Trigger
Top-down method Set from primary extension Set from OWS (subscriber) Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes (1) Yes (1)
Bottom-up method Set from non-shared secondary extension Set from shared extension Set from OWS (nonshared secondary extension) Set from OWS (shared Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes (2) Yes Yes (1) No Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
D.N.A. Server
extension) (1) This is shown in the detail information when searching for the individual extension. (2) This will show in OWS subscriber view if the user has this extension number as the primary extension. (3) This will show in the extension view when searching for the particular extension.
162
Chapter 10 Maintenance
Archival Backup
PDM creates one archive file for each MD110 node that is written to the Dna_s\Siten\Pmg\Archive directory on the server PC (where n is the node number). Automatic or manual data extraction that exceeds the disk space configured for the primary D.N.A. server traffic measurement database causes the overflow to be extracted to archival flat files. For example, if D.N.A. traffic measurement disk space has been allocated for 3 months of data and you attempt to manually extract 6 months of data, the first 3 month's data will be placed in three separate monthly files, and the most recent 3 month's data are stored in the primary database. Important! It is imperative that there be a minimum of 4 MB of disk space free for each node on the server disk where the Dna_s directory resides. To maintain available disk space, the archival files in the Archive subdirectory for each node should be periodically backed up to auxiliary storage and deleted from the server disk drive. The archival files are used when setting up the auxiliary database, and all required files must be in the appropriate directory in order for it to be set up correctly. Therefore, when setting up the auxiliary database, you should restore any required files that were backed up and deleted from disk.
Temporary Workspace
PDM uses local drives for temporary files to store data during data extraction and to display MD110 system information. There must be at least 2 MB of free space free on the disk drive where the D.N.A. directory is installed. Be sure to maintain this minimum of 2 MB of free space on the disk drive where the D.N.A. directory is installed.
Automatic Extraction
Automatic data extraction refers to Performance Data Manager's downloading, translating, and transferring traffic measurement data to the D.N.A. database server on a daily basis. PDM performs this task once each morning between 00:30 (or 30 minutes after midnight) and 06:00, based on a 24-hour time scale. The 00:30 time is the default setting and can be changed in the PDM application. The polling period for database extraction extends to six hours by default from the configured start time. You can setup a Registry string to extend the polling time. Refer to Extend Polling Time for details. Note: PDM makes three extraction attempts for each measurement site.
163
Maintenance
Performance Data Manager Operations

Since there may not be a corresponding PDM release for each MD110 release, PDM defaults to the latest available PDM releases after receiving the MD110 identity. For example, if the customer site is running BC12.X, PDM may treat it as if the site is running BC12.1 if the latest PDM release supports BC12.1. A onetime notification per login is issued in the audit trail when such discrepancies are detected.
Two Ways to Start the Extraction Process

There are two ways to have data extraction process started automatically at a pre-defined time. Leave PDM running on PC. The data extraction process will start automatically at the pre-defined time. Schedule PDM via the Remote Data Server scheduler to start as a batch job. It must be scheduled prior to the pre-defined data extraction time. The data extraction process will then start automatically 30 minutes after the scheduled job is started by RDS. PDM scheduling can be set during the installation procedure. This option is supported only on the D.N.A. Server.
The Data Extraction Command

PDM extracts traffic measurement data from the HDU by issuing the MD110 FIFCP command consisting of the following syntax:
FIFCP:PATH=/SYSN/USR1/ACS/TM/Dnyddd, FORMAT=HEX;
Where: PATH specifies the directory where traffic measurement data files reside. The path name must be as specified and must not be altered. FORMAT specifies the traffic measurement file format, which is always hexadecimal. The file name is encrypted in the form Dnyddd where: n = the sequence of dumped files, valued 0, 1, 2 or 3. A maximum of 4 dumped files are allowed per day, e.g., the first dump of the day has n = 0. Although the traffic measurement data is being collected by MD110 software in 15 minute intervals, dumping only occurs when the temporary buffer in MD110 software is full or at the end of the day. After the midnight dump occurs, the temporary buffer is erased to pre-pare for traffic measurement data collection of the new day. y = the last unit digit of the year. For example, 4 for 1994 or 2004. ddd = the day of the year. The day of the year, for example 031 is Jan 31, 032 is Feb 1, 033 is Feb 2, and so on...
164
Maintenance
Clock Synchronization
The MD110 midnight dump occurs at 11 minutes after midnight. The midnight dump signifies that dumping of the day's traffic measurement data to the HDU has been completed. The Performance Data Manager extraction process is scheduled to run automatically at 00:30 (or 30 minutes after midnight). These time-related events require that the MD110 and PC clock to be synchronized with one another.
Extraction Process
The data extraction process includes Performance Data Manager converting collected traffic measurement data from hexadecimal to decimal format and store the results in the D.N.A. database. PDM is able to perform the extraction process for both local and remote D.N.A. database servers.
The First Extraction after PMG Installation

The first automatic data extraction after the initial installation of Performance Manager attempts to retrieve existing data from the HDU for the currently active MD110 measurements, store them in the D.N.A. database. The first extraction process, therefore, may require more time to execute. This functionality also further enhances the Presentation Manager utility by immediately allowing you to view your collected traffic measurement data in Microsoft Excel 2000, Excel 2002, or Excel 2003 instead of having to wait for the data to be collected.
Data Collected Prior to PMG Installation

If PC-traffic measurement was used to collect traffic measurement data prior to Performance Manager installation, it is possible that the traffic measurement data collected on the HDU is incomplete. This is caused by the PC-traffic measurement commands TRPEI and TRPEE, which allow PC-traffic measurement to retrieve traffic measurement data from a temporary buffer, transfer it to the PC-traffic measurement collection PC, then erase the buffer data before writing to the HDU.
Issuing MML Commands

We recommend against issuing MML commands such as TRREP or FIFCP during your scheduled data extraction interval. These commands access the HDU traffic measurement data and may otherwise interfere with the data extraction process.
Skip Nodes for Polling

All nodes on the server will be polled by default. However, polling selected nodes can also be setup through Registry settings.
To setup nodes to skip when polling

1. Create a key with DNA Server machine name under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\PMG\
Example:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\PMG\DNA_SERVER1
Add a string SkipSites with the nodes you want to skip separated by commas (",") under the key created in Step 1 and end with a comma (","). Example: If there are five nodes and only node 2 and 4 should be polled, set the Registry string to:
165
Maintenance
1,3,5, (make sure you end with a comma ",")
Extend Polling Time

The PDM data polling routine will poll data for six hours starting from the BatchTime setting. You can setup a Registry string to extend the polling time. The polling time should be set between six to twelve hours. If no setting is present, or the setting is less than six, polling time defaults to six hours. If this setting is greater than 12, it is treated as a 12 hour polling time. The Registry key is HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\PMG\BatchLength.
Presentation Manager
Following are important operation and maintenance considerations for Performance Presentation Manager.
Operational Requirements
PPM, like Microsoft Excel 2000, Excel 2002, or Excel 2003, requires an installed printer driver to function when connected to a printer.
Traffic Measurement Reports

Although all traffic measurement data is stored in the SQL database, only objects related to Operators, Trunk Routes, Voice Extensions, PCM lines, PBX Hunt Groups, Cordless Extension Common Fixed Part, Cordless Extension Traffic and Mobility Function and IP Network Interface are available in pre-defined reports. As a functional subset of PPM, PPM Lite only provides reports on objects related to Operators, Trunk Routes, and PBX Hunt Groups.
Preserving Edited Reports

All traffic measurement reports generated from the Query Measurements panel are write-protected. You must save edited traffic measurement report worksheets under different filenames to preserve their contents and to distinguish them from the original files.
Database Utility
The purpose of the D.N.A. database utility (DBCP.EXE) is to backup/restore D.N.A. application-related databases to/from a files running on Microsoft SQL Server 7, Microsoft SQL Server 2000, MSDE and MSDE 2000. The backup feature provided by SQL Server sometimes may corrupt ogins/users/ownership of databases. Therefore, DBCP is preferred as a more secure backup/restore method. Besides, this is the only way to backup databases if MSDE is used. This utility should be used for backup/restore of the same release of DNA.
Options
The Following command line options are available when you execute this console application. -B Backup database from SQL server to file -D DNA application (All, MRS, DMG, EMG, or PMG)
166
Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide -F Display full path
Maintenance
where data file is residing
-O Change database ownership to D.N.A. default account -P User account password, defaults to (blank) -R Restore database from file to SQL server -U User account name for accessing SQL server (defaults to sa) ? Help and usage information The following table shows what is backed up or restored with the D option. DNA Application All MRS DMG EMG PMG Backed Up/Restored All installed DNA databases Dnadfdb emgdb security db_xaction Dirdb SiteX Pmglocks auxXpmg siteXpmg
All will be used, if -D is omitted Note: X indicates the site number.
Capacity and Limitations

This backup/restore utility cannot be stopped while the operation is in progress. It can only be executed on the same machine where Microsoft SQL Server 7, Microsoft SQL Server 2000, MSDE or MSDE 2000 is installed. During the restore process, the target database should not be accessed or connected by other processes or applications.
167
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
Log Files
The D.N.A. installation program creates two logs that can be used to troubleshoot installation problems. The Detail log contains all operations performed during the installation process. The Summary log contains the final status (success or failure) for each installed component. These ASCII text files can be viewed with Windows Notepad.
D.N.A. Server Installation Logs

Located at: <dna installed directory>\dna_s\detail.log and \dna_s\summary.log
D.N.A. Client Installation Logs

Located at: <dna installed directory>\dna_c\detail.log and \dna_c\summary.log
ACA Installation Logs

Located at: <eca installed directory>\eca_install.log
ACC Client Installation Logs

Located at: <ecc installed directory>\install.log
Mobile Executive Installation Logs

Located at: <mobileexec installed directory>\mobileexec.log
PPMLite Installation Logs

Located at: <ppmlite installed directory>\ppmlite.log
168
Troubleshooting
Event Log Messages

D.N.A. applications utilize the event logging facility to record error messages returned from the SQL server and generated by D.N.A.. If you encounter application or database operation difficulties, you can use the Windows Event Viewer to display information for events related to the problem and assist in problem isolation. Event Viewer displays system events registered by Windows and application events recorded by the various applications. Event Viewer can also display events for other PCs on the same network. Refer to the "Windows System Guide" for information about using Event Viewer. Application D.N.A. Applications Error Message Corrective Action
1 CPBXLINK: Fix PC hardware. InputHandler() cannot get timer capabilities. 2 CPBXLINK: Unable to contact the telephone. 3 Check phone, connection cable, and proper ELU initiation. N/A
4 Unable to open registry Check and correct Registry and user key. permissions. 5 No response from PBX port. Check all TAU connecting cables and cycle power on the TAU. This message ONLY appears when Operator Workstation is explicitly configured to use a TAU. Check all TAU connections and COM port assignments. Check connection to the PBX jack on the TAU. Check connection to PHONE jack of the TAU.
6 Unable to detect a terminal adapter on the PBX port. 7 The terminal adapter reports no PBX connection. 8 The terminal adapter reports no phone connection.
9 CPBXLINK: Restart Operator Workstation. This SendSignal(%1!s!) failed. usually appears if the program is GetLastError returned %2! aborted unexpectedly. s!. 10 Error reading registry value. RegEnumValue() returned %1!s!. If the returned value is 234, there is a Registry value of type REG_SZ longer than 80 characters. Shorten that value.
169
Troubleshooting
Application
Error Message 11 13 14 SetCommState() Failed. GetLastError returned "%1!s!". 15 CreateFile(%1!s!) failed. GetLastError returned "%2!s!".
Corrective Action N/A Fix COM port configuration or hardware problem. Fix COM port assignment problem. This can also occur if Operator Workstation is configured to use a non-existing port.
16 CreateThread() for Reinstall Windows. If error recurs, CCommLink::InputHandler contact system administrator. failed. GetLastError return "%2!s!". 17 18 No response from the Operator Workstation keyboard port. 19 Failed to connect to directory server. N/A Check Operator Workstation keyboard connection and COM port assignment. Verify that both the SQL server and D.N.A. Server are installed and running on the server PC.
20 Failed to open directory Verify that both the SQL server and database. D.N.A. Server are installed and running on the server PC. 21 Failed to retrieve subscriber user-defined fields. 22 ODBC Error: SQLState: "%1!s!", ODBCError: "%2!s!", NativeError: "%3!s!". 23 ODBC Information: SQLState: "%1!s!", ODBCInfo: 2! s!",NativeInfo: "%3!s!" 24 Warning physical memory is running low. 25 Warning Virtual memory is running low. Correct database setup using the Directory Configuration utility. Check SQL and ODBC driver using SQL utilities.
None (information message)
Either increase memory or close (exit) non-essential programs. Increase the paging file size via the Windows Control Panel. Select System and virtual memory.
26 Equipment status Replace the telephone. signal reports telephone is
170
Troubleshooting
Application
Error Message faulty. 27 Warning Signal Buffer has exceeded 90%
Corrective Action
Signals from the PBX and/or the phone are not being processed fast enough. This is usually due to some other process consuming most of the available CPU time. Use the Task Manager to determine which process is at fault and end it. Re-install the D.N.A. Server client software.
28 Warning Operator Workstation will not try to connect to Database. ODBC driver is not installed in registry. 29 Error Signal Buffer Overflow Count
Signals from the PBX and/or phone have been lost. This is an increase of the severity of the problem indicated by event 27. Take the same corrective action. The signal buffer pointer has advanced beyond its upper boundary. It is unlikely that this would occur in the absence of more serious operating system problems. There is a problem with one or more services on the server or the client, or a network problem. Try to stop and restart the Ericsson LFS service on the local machine. Verify that RDS and SDS on the server are running. Verify that the server is reachable over the network. This event is obsolete and not used in D.N.A. 4.0 or later.
30 Error Signal Buffer Overflow Loop Count
31 Department diversion database connection disconnected.
32 External search database connection disconnected.
33 Message and Diversion Same as event 31. If these two database connection events (31 and 33) occur disconnected. independently, there may be an installation related problem. 34 Department diversion database connection complete. None. This is an information message. The absence of this message indicates a service or network problem similar to events 31 and 33. This event is obsolete and not used
35 External search
171
Troubleshooting
Application
Error Message database connection complete.
Corrective Action in D.N.A. 4.0 or later.
36 Message and Diversion None. This is an information database connection message. The absence of this complete. message indicates a service or network problem similar to events 31 and 33. 1001 E1001 - Database Server Error(37000): [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server]Cannot open user default database. Login failed. There is a problem connecting to SQL Server. Check if SQL Server is running. If not, start SQL Server. Note: When using Microsoft Desktop Engine (MDE) and rebooting the PC, there may be an instance of this message logged. This is due to Desktop Engine starting after RDS. RDS will enter reconnect mode and will connect to Desktop Engine when Desktop Engine is started. Initialization error. Verify that the cloksync.lll is in the same directory as the service. %1 = file name Initialization error. Lack of system resources. Reduce the number of running applications and start the service again. Initialization error. Lack of system resources. Reduce the number of running applications and start the service again. Initialization error. Verify the permission level of the service. Restart the service. %1 = Registry key name.
ClockSync
1001 Could not load resource library: %1
ClockSync
1001 Could not duplicate thread handle.
ClockSync
1002 Could not create event handle.
ClockSync
1003 Could not open registry key %1, using defaults.
ClockSync
1004 Client is enabled, but Initialization error. server machine name is Restart the service. invalid. Client disabled. 1005 Receive broadcasts Initialization error. is enabled, but server Restart the service. machine name is invalid. Receive disabled.
ClockSync
172
Troubleshooting
Application ClockSync
Error Message 1006 Could not open process token, client disabled.
Corrective Action Initialization error. Lack of system resources. Reduce the number of running applications and start the service again. Initialization error. Lack of system resources. Reduce the number of running applications and start the service again.
ClockSync
1007 Could not enable time set privilege for process, client disabled.
Installation
0 %1 unable to connect to Refer to database manual for database %2. detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and redo the installation. %1 = Application name. %2 = Database error message. 0 %1 error inserting application %2. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and redo the installation. %1 = Application name. %2 = Database error message. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and redo the installation. %1 = Application name. %2 = Database error message. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and redo the installation. %1 = Application name. %2 = Database error message.
Installation
Installation
0 %1 error inserting elements %2.
Installation
0 %1 error inserting sites %2.
Installation
0 %1 number of licensed Refer to database manual for elements does not match detailed information of database element table. error. Correct the problem per database manual and redo the installation. %1 = Application name. %2 = Database error message.
173
Troubleshooting
Application Installation
Error Message
Corrective Action
1000 %1 number of Refer to database manual for elements in element table detailed information of database does not match site table. error. Correct the problem per database manual and redo the installation. %1 = Application name. %2 = Database error message. 1001 %1 error updating number of element licenses %2. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and redo the installation. %1 = Application name. %2 = Database error message.
Installation
Installation
1002 %1 the element type Refer to database manual for was not defined. detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and redo the installation. %1 = Application name. %2 = Database error message. 1000 Could not load resource library. Initialization error. Verify that the lfs.lll is in the same directory as the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error.
LFS
LFS
1001 Failed to initialize application.
LFS
1002 Failed to duplicate thread handle.
LFS
1003 Failed to open named pipe acceptor.
LFS
1004 Failed to initialize database.
LFS
1005 Failed to set low water mark.
LFS
1006 Failed to set high
174
Troubleshooting
Application
Error Message water mark.
Corrective Action Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service.
LFS
1007 Failed to push module on Ustream.
LFS
1008 Failed to open reactor.
LFS
1009 Failed to set security Initialization error. attributes. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. 1010 Failed to create message queue thread. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service.
LFS
LFS
1200 Failed to retrieve Initialization error. security data server name Restart the service. from registry. 1201 Failed to initialize Initialization error. security data server client. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. 1200 Cannot retrieve the Run-time error. password format data from Neither the primary nor the backup the local database. Notify databases are available. Password the system administrator. cannot be changed with this condition. Contact your system administrator. 1201 Cannot retrieve the Run-time error. password format data from Cannot retrieve data from the the server database. primary database. Password cannot Notify the system be changed with this condition. administrator. Contact your system administrator. 1202 Cannot retrieve the user data from the local database. Notify the system administrator. Run-time error. Neither the primary nor the backup databases are available. Password cannot be changed with this condition. Contact your system administrator.
LFS
LFS
LFS
LFS
LFS
1203 Cannot retrieve the Run-time error. user data from the server Cannot retrieve data from the
175
Troubleshooting
Application
Error Message database. Notify the system administrator.
Corrective Action primary database. Password cannot be changed with this condition. Contact your system administrator.
LFS
1204 Cannot save the new Run-time error. password. The server Cannot store data to the primary database is unavailable. database. Password cannot be changed with this condition. Contact your system administrator. 1205 Cannot save the new Run-time error. password. Unable to Cannot store data to the primary connect to the security database, due to communication data server. problems with the security data server. Password cannot be changed with this condition. Contact your system administrator. 1206 Cannot retrieve the Run-time error. user data from the server Verify that the application is installed. database. The application Reinstall the application, if needed. may not be installed. Notify the system administrator. 1207 Cannot retrieve the Run-time error. user data from the local Verify that the application is installed. database. The application Reinstall the application, if needed. may not be installed. Notify the system administrator. 1500 Failed to close Shutdown error. message queue normally. Notify the system administrator. 1700 Out of memory. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Verify that the sds.lll is in the same directory as the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running
LFS
LFS
LFS
LFS
LFS
SDS
1000 Could not load resource library.
SDS
1001 Failed to initialize application.
SDS
1002 Failed to duplicate thread handle.
176
Troubleshooting
Application
Error Message
Corrective Action applications and restart the service.
SDS
1003 Failed to open named pipe acceptor.
Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service.
SDS
1004 Failed to initialize database.
SDS
1005 Failed to set low water mark.
SDS
1006 Failed to set high water mark.
SDS
1007 Failed to push module on Ustream.
SDS
1008 Failed to open reactor.
SDS
1009 Failed to set security Initialization error. attributes. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. 1010 Failed to create message queue thread. Initialization error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Initialization error. Refer to the database manual for information on database error. Correct the problem per database manual and try again. %1 = Database error message
SDS
SDS
1200 Database server error: %1.
SDS
1201 Failed to connect to Run-time error. database server. Retrying Check whether database server is in %1 seconds. running and restart, if necessary. %1 = Database error message 1202 Failed to create database server connection thread. Run-time error. Reduce the number of running
SDS
177
Troubleshooting
Application
Error Message
Corrective Action applications and restart the service.
SDS
1203 Failed reading the database source from the registry. Application type = %1.
Run-time error. Check the content of the Registry setting with RDS configuration. Check the access permission to the Registry entries with the Registry Editor. %1 = Application type
SDS
1500 Failed to close Shutdown error. message queue normally. Notify the system administrator. 1700 Out of memory. General error. Reduce the number of running applications and restart the service. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. %1 = Database error message. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. %1 = Database error message. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. %1 = Database error message. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and try again. %1 = Database error message. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and try again. %1 = Database error message. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and try again.
SDS
UserConfig
1000 Cannot connect to database server %1.
UserConfig
1001 Cannot open user table %1.
UserConfig
1002 Cannot update the user %1.
UserConfig
1003 Cannot delete the user %1.
UserConfig
1004 Cannot reset the users password %1.
UserConfig
1005 Cannot access the privilege/authority codes %1.
178
Troubleshooting
Application
Error Message
Corrective Action %1 = Database error message.
UserConfig
1006 Cannot update the password properties %1.
Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and try again. %1 = Database error message. Refer to database manual for detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and try again. %1 = Database error message.
UserConfig
1007 Cannot load the application table %1.
UserConfig
1008 Cannot load the site Refer to database manual for table %1. detailed information of database error. Correct the problem per database manual and try again. %1 = Database error message.
Error Messages for SNMP Agent

GetAppSuiteRegInstalled: RegOpenKeyEx failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite Registry key actually exists and that System account has permission to read it. Make a note of the error code, 0xnnn. GetAppSuiteRegInstalled: RegQueryValueEx failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite\InstalledAppSuiteComponents
Registry key actually exists and that system account has permission to read it. Make a note of the error code, 0xnnn. GetAppSuiteRegState: RegOpenKeyEx failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite Registry key actually exists and that System account has permission to read it. Make a note of the error code, 0xnnn. GetAppSuiteRegState: RegQueryValueEx failed: name 0xnnn Make sure that the HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite\"name" Registry key actually exists and that System account has permission to read it. Make a note of the name and error code, 0xnnn. SetAppSuiteRegInstalled: RegCreateKeyEx failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write Registry key HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite. Make a note of the error code, 0xnnn. SetAppSuiteRegInstalled: RegSetValueEx failed: 0xnnn
179
Troubleshooting
Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write Registry key
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite\InstalledAppSuiteComponents.
Make a note of the error code, 0xnnn. SetAppSuiteRegState: RegCreateKeyEx failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write Registry key HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite. Make a note of the error code, 0xnnn. SetAppSuiteRegState: RegSetValueEx failed: name 0xnnn Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write to Registry keys under HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite\"name". Make a note of the name and error code, 0xnnn. AddAppX: GetAppSuiteRegInstalled failed Make sure that the HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite\ Registry key actually exists and that System account has permission to read it. AddAppX: SetAppSuiteRegInstalled failed Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write Registry key
AddAppX: SetAppSuiteRegState failed Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write to Registry keys under HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite. RemoveApp: GetAppSuiteRegInstalled failed Make sure that the HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite\ Registry key actually exists and that System account has permission to read it. RemoveApp: SetAppSuiteRegInstalled failed Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write Registry key
Init: AddApp failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write Registry key
Make a note of the application id, 0xnnn. SetAppState: Can't find app: 0xnnn The function SetAppState was called with an invalid application id. Make a note of the application id, 0xnnn. SetAppState: SetAppSuiteRegState failed Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write to Registry keys under HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite. SetModified: Can't find id: 0xnnn The function SetModified was called with an invalid application ID. Make a note of the application id, 0xnnn.
180
Troubleshooting
CheckPID: SetAppSuiteRegState failed Make sure that the System account has permission to create and/or write to Registry keys under HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\DMI\AppSuite. GetApps: Map is empty A list of known applications has been requested and the list was empty. This might or might not be an error. GetEventType: Can't find id: 0xnnn The function GetEventType was called with an invalid application ID. Make a note of the application id, 0xnnn. GetEventSeverity: Can't find id: 0xnnn The function GetEventSeverity was called with an invalid application ID. Make a note of the application id, 0xnnn. GetAppStart: Can't find id: 0xnnn The function GetAppStart was called with an invalid application ID. Make a note of the application id, 0xnnn. GetAppSuiteServerName: RegOpenKeyEx failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\CurrentVersion\ Registry key actually exists and that System account has permission to read it. GetAppSuiteServerName: RegQueryValueEx failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\CurrentVersion\ServerName Registry key
actually exists and that System account has permission to read it. GetAppSuiteServerID: RegOpenKeyEx failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\CurrentVersion\ Registry key actually exists and that System account has permission to read it. GetAppSuiteServerID: RegQueryValueEx failed: 0xnnn Make sure that the HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\CurrentVersion\ServerID Registry key actually exists and that System account has permission to read it. GetAppVer: Can't find id: 0xnnn The function GetAppVer was called with an invalid application ID. Make a note of the application id, 0xnnn. GetAppState: Can't find id: 0xnnn The function GetAppState was called with an invalid application ID. Make a note of the application id, 0xnnn.
181
Troubleshooting
Technical Support
The Troubleshooting book contains information needed to resolve most problems that can occur with the D.N.A. applications. However, situations may occur in which you are unable to resolve problems using troubleshooting information. For additional technical assistance, contact your Aastra representative.
Before Contacting Technical Support

In order to help restore your productivity as rapidly as possible, Aastra engineers will need the following information. Versions for: Windows + Service Pack Level SQL Server + Service Pack Level D.N.A. + Service Pack Status + Hot Fix Status TAU or CT Adapter Revision Level Type of LAN and LAN configuration
Local Area Network: System size:
Number of: OWS clients DMG clients Names in subscriber database MD110 or MX-ONE nodes
If Hotfixes loaded:
Version of "fixed" .exe files (To view, use the Windows Explorer to select and right-click the .exe file, select Properties from the pop-up menu, click the Version tab. PBX software release CNI version or Service Pack Status Any special OWS patches System size (i.e., nodes, extensions, etc.) A detailed description of the problem. Although it is not necessary, it will also be helpful if you can try to guess the source of the problem and then try to provide Aastra engineers with detailed information relating to that part of your system.
PBX setup:
Include:
Reporting Your Problem

To assist our support staff, please obtain the following information before contacting technical support. You should include as much information as is available on system specifications, applications, and the problem itself.
182
Troubleshooting
Problem Description
State each problem description clearly and include any available details relating to the problem, including: Time-of-day problem occurred Operations in progress when the problem occurred Applications and/or databases involved General type of failure (i.e., transitory, repeatable/non-repeatable, application halt, system halt, etc.)
PBX
PBX Type ______________ Version ________________ No. of Nodes ____________ IPU Revision _____________ ICU Revision _____________ NIU Revision _____________
Operating System Information (mark all that apply)

Windows Workstation ____ Version ________________ Windows Server _________ Language _______________
Configuration
Workgroup______________ Stand Alone_____________ FAT ___________________ Domain _________________ File System______________ NTFS___________________
Network Protocol (mark all that apply)

NetBEUI _______________ IPX/SPX _______________ None __________________ TCP/IP __________________ Other ___________________ Software ________________
PC
Manufacturer ____________ CPU __________________ Memory (RAM) __________ Model __________________ Clock Speed _____________ Hard Disk _______________
183
Troubleshooting
D.N.A. Applications
Report each application that was running when the problem occurred. Include the version/release level and which national language the application supports. Application Directory Manager (DMG) ________________________ ________________________ Extension Manager (EMG) ________________________ ________________________ Operator Workstation (OWS) ________________________ ________________________ Performance Data Manager (PDM) ________________________ ________________________ Performance Presentation Manager (PPM) Aastra Communication Assistant (ACA) Aastra Communication Client (ACC) Other ________________________ ________________________ Version/Release Level Language Supported
________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________
Directory Manager
When using Directory Manager (DMG) on the D.N.A. server to add a department name containing a comma (,), the following error message appears: The following characters are reserved by CAAPI and cannot be used in name, phone and cost centers fields: , ; DIRPOP will also generate an error if there is a comma (,) in the department name. However, using DMG or DIRPOP on a D.N.A. client (i.e., a computer other than the D.N.A. server) works without receiving any error message. The reason is as follows. The Registry settings for CAAPI reside on the D.N.A. server along with the CAAPI application. When DMG is run on the D.N.A. server, DMG will check to ensure that CAAPI delimiters are not used in the department names. On a D.N.A. client however, the Registry settings do not exist for CAAPI, so DMG cannot check for the CAAPI delimiters. DIRPOP exhibits this same limitation.
184
Troubleshooting
Before any of the following procedures are used, close all D.N.A. applications (DMG, DIRPOP, DirLink, LDAP, etc.) to avoid a potential database mismatch. Note: The values for FieldMark and RecordMark may be changed to other values, provided there is no conflict with subscriber or department names. Ensure that the values for FieldMark and RecordMark are always synchronized between the D.N.A. server and its clients. The following procedure is used on a system where CAAPI is not used and department names with comma are used: 1. On the D.N.A. server open the Registry key Software\Ericsson\MRS\CAAPI under the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE hive. 2. Change string value FieldMark to $ (dollar sign). FieldMark is the divider between the data within one subscriber or department. 3. Change string value RecordMark to | (vertical pipe, or upper-case backslash symbol on QWERTY keyboard). RecordMark is the divider between the subscribers or departments. The following procedure is used on a system where CAAPI and department names containing commas are used: 1. On all D.N.A. client machines where DMG or DIRPOP is run, open the Registry key Software\Ericsson\MRS under the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE hive. 2. Create sub-key CAAPI. 3. Create string value FieldMark under the CAAPI sub-key. FieldMark is the divider between the data within one subscriber or department. 4. Set the value of FieldMark to $ (dollar sign). 5. Create string value RecordMark under the CAAPI sub-key. RecordMark is the divider between the subscribers or departments. 6. Set the value of RecordMark to | (vertical pipe, or upper-case backslash symbol on QWERTY keyboard). Change the corresponding Registry values on the D.N.A. server to match the values set on the D.N.A. clients The following table lists error messages displayed by the Directory Manager application that may indicate a setup problem. Problem Corrective Action
An error occurred while closing Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote the database. Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Cannot get user ID for transaction register entry. Could not add a new department to the database. Verify that the D.N.A. Server utilities are running and that Remote Data Server is set up correctly. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data
185
Troubleshooting
Problem
Corrective Action retrieval and update requests.
Could not add extension.
Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests.
Could not add the external directory entry.
Could not connect to the Extension Manager database.
Could not connect to the transaction database.
Could not delete subscriber.
Could not delete the department.
Could not delete the external directory entry.
Could not get a valid record ID A record in the delete_id table is locked. from IDMSC. Could not retrieve authorization code from the logging services. Could not retrieve database source information from the logging services. Could not update extension data. Verify that the Management Repository Server utilities are running and that Remote Data Server is set up correctly. Verify that the Management Repository Server utilities are running and that Remote Data Server is set up correctly. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests.
186
Troubleshooting
Problem Could not update external directory data.
Corrective Action Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests. A record in the delete_id table is locked. Verify that there is a connection to RDS (Remote Data Server) and the SQL server, and verify that RDS and the SQL server are responding to data retrieval and update requests.
Could not update subscriber.
Data for the selected department could not be retrieved. Data for the selected external directory entry could not be retrieved. Data for the selected subscriber could not be retrieved. See your Database Administrator. The department could not be updated.
Aastra Communication Client

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Stop IIS (allowing up to 30 seconds to completely stop). Delete all the files in dna_c\dirb\data. Reboot your PC. Insure that all the files are populated. Run the command from the browser or ACC again. Error message Multiple H.323 clients running Modify the Registry value Unable to log on to If running ACC on a DNA DNA from an ACC Client, there might be client. instances when the local data on the DNA Client becomes faulty or corrupt.
187
Troubleshooting
Problem "Failed to Init Radvision" displayed when ACC client starts.
Possible Cause simultaneously.
Corrective Action
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECC\C urrentVersion\PortCallSignal
to a value other than 1720, which is the default, to avoid a conflict. Restart ACC.
ACC fails to register with the gatekeeper
Gatekeeper configuration is incorrect
Confirm the settings in the Gatekeeper tab of the Setup property sheet
Failure to connect to the RAS Modify the Registry value port due to network limitation HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECC\C urrentVersion\PortRAS to a port (the port is restricted). number that is unrestricted by the network to avoid a conflict. Restart ACC. Multiple Network Cards installed Security policy is set in Service Node Confirm that the correct network card is selected on the Network tab of the Setup property sheet. If the security policy is set in Service Node, remove it or else change the security exception of the extension to YES and then try to register again. Modify the Registry value
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECC\C urrentVersion\PortRTP to a port
When a call connects, there is no speech path.
Failure to connect to the RTP port to send voice data packets due to network limitation (the port is restricted).
number that is unrestricted by the network to avoid a conflict. Restart ACC.
Multiple sound cards installed. Make sure the sound card selected on the General tab of the Setup property sheet is correct.
188
Troubleshooting
Problem The state Error appears in the ACC Monitor window for monitored extensions.
Possible Cause Only extensions that are on the same PBX node as the ACC users extension may be monitored by ACC. If the state Error is displayed for an extension in the ACC, it could indicate that either the ApplicationLink information is improperly configured, or the monitored extension is on another PBX node.
Corrective Action Confirm that ApplicationLink information was setup properly during ACC installation. This can be found in the Windows Registry at
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECC\C urrentVersion. There should be
a pair of values for each PBX node (e.g., Node1Name, Node1Port, Node2Name, Node2Port). If the ApplicationLink information is correct, it may be the case that the users extension is defined on a different PBX node than the monitored users extension. Since ACC can only connect to a single ApplicationLink server, it will not be possible to monitor that extension, and Error will display as the state for the extension. If the ApplicationLink information is incorrect, reinstall the ACC Server. This will update the ApplicationLink configuration information in the ecc.cfg configuration file on the server, and clients will automatically retrieve this updated information the next time ACC is run.
Wave files for incoming and outgoing calls (i.e., ring and ringback tones) are not played out the selected sound card.
The selected sound card is This is a limitation in the not the active (default) system application. The wave files sound card. configured will not be affected by the sound card selected by the Audio Devices list. If you override the default system sound card, only the speech path for your calls will be affected. Wave files will be played using the system sound card.
189
Troubleshooting
Problem Personal Number errors: Failed to delete choice Failed to change choice data Failed to initiate choice Failed to activate the profile
Possible Cause 1. Personal number data is out-of-synch between PBX and SQL database. 2. Backend component is not configured properly.
Corrective Action 1. Re-synchronize extension data for the faulty extension via the MD Support utility. 2. EMG connection with PBX will fail if configuration is not set up properly. The administrator must ensure that EMG can be logged onto with the System account and can connect with PBX successfully. Please refer to Configuration for Personal Number access section for details. Note: The administrator can also turn on the log for more information. Refer to Trace in the Personal Number problems section for Aastra Communication Assistant.
Extension Manager
Problem Cannot access database at this time. Synchronization is currently running. (Message Box) Possible Cause Another user is using Extension Manager or MD Support to access the database, or database remained locked when MD Support application terminated abnormally. Corrective Action Use Access Control option on Application menu to display information about user accessing database. If the other user is still accessing the database, try to access the database again later. If it is suspected that the other user is not still accessing the database, the record in the database which is blocking access to other users can be deleted manually. Restart the network.
Cannot connect to database server. (Message Box) Cannot get database server information. (Message Box) Cannot open database. (Message Box) Cannot connect to
Network is down.
Data source points to Setup the data source. the wrong PC. Server database is down. Restart the server database.
Telephone number to Verify that MD110 telephone
190
Troubleshooting
Problem MD110.
Possible Cause access MD110 unavailable or incorrect.
Corrective Action number is correct and available.
Cannot connect from the All Telnet ports are Telnet server to the serial occupied. port. No connection from the Telnet server to the MD110 IPU port. Cannot connect to the Serial Communication Service. Cannot connect to the Telnet server. Connection attempt has failed. Access agent is not running. Incorrect Telnet server address, User ID, or password.
Make sure there is a port available. Verify there is a functioning cable connection between the Telnet server and the MD110 IPU port(s). Verify the SCS is running.
Make sure the access agent is running. Verify that the Telnet server logon information is entered correctly. Restart the network. Restart the database server. Close the other application using the communication device or wait until the communication device is available.
Cannot get Telnet Network or SQL address from the server is not running. database. (Message Box) Cannot open communication device. Communication device is being used by another application.
Specify a valid communication Selected device. communication device does not exist. Cannot retrieve PBX error Server database is messages from database. down. (Message Box) Required entry in EMGDB database MDERR table does not exist. Cannot synchronize with PBX. Restart the server database. Reinstall the EMGDB database.
Logon to PBX not Verify that the connection to the PBX completed due to is good and verify that the PBX is problem with operating properly. connection to the PBX or the PBX itself. Problem with Verify that the connection to the PBX connection to the is good and verify that the PBX is PBX or the PBX itself. operating properly.
Communication line blocked. Communication line failure. Communication line not
191
Troubleshooting
Problem available. Connection to this site is not allowed. Please synchronize this site before reconnecting. Data source retrieved from Logging service for node database is undefined. Data source retrieved from Logging service for transaction database is undefined. (Message Box)
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
Extension Manager Run MD support utility to MD database table is synchronize MD data. empty. Data source set up incorrectly. Setup the data source.
EMG client is killed when This occurs by RDS restarts. design. During startup, RDS kills all EMG instance(s) in order to allow the extension Link function to function properly. Error communicating with Network is down or the Remote Database the RDS is down. Server. Error disconnecting from the Telnet server. Error initializing the modem. Error resetting the modem. Error loading the template file from the server. Make sure the Remote Data Server is running. Also make sure that the Registry contains the correct path to the D.N.A. directory structure. Problem with connection to modem/TAU or modem/TAU itself. Network is not operating properly. Remote Data Server is not running. Incorrect entry in Registry for path in server for template files. Verify that the connection to the modem/TAU is good and that the modem/TAU is operating properly. Restart the network. Run RDS. Contact technical support. Restart the network and verify RDS is running.
Error initiating extension. There is no space Not accepted. Equipment available for the position already assigned. corresponding ISDN extension. When the Dual access extension interface is provided, 32 time
When initiating the Dual access extension you select the Equipment position for the digital extension among the first 16 time slots, the remaining 16 time slots are used for the corresponding ISDN extension (Example: digital extensions
192
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause slots are required in the switch for each ELU 28/3 board.
Corrective Action equipment position was 1-0-40-3, the ISDN extensions equipment position will be 1-0-40-19). Restart the network. Setup the data source. As soon as the synchronization stops, (by letting it finish or by "breaking" it) restart the synchronization. Set up the communication parameters to match the communication device.
Failed to ...
Network is down. Data source set up incorrectly. A command was sent to the PBX while synchronization was running.
Incorrect communication settings.
Communication parameters for the communication device are not set up correctly.
Invalid authorization to Telnet Access Agent. Invalid client path. Please Directory set for Contact technical support. check with your system TargetDirectoryClient administrator. in Registry does not exist. Invalid path to the log files. Extension Manager log sub-directory for the specific site does not exist. Online help subdirectory does not exist. Site sub-directory under client path does not exist. The D.N.A. Database has not received updated license information. Create emg\log sub-directory under the site directory.
Invalid path to the online help parameter description. Invalid site path. Please contact your system administrator. Licenses in EMG do not match the licenses in the MD.
Create emg\help sub-directory.
Create the site sub-directory.
If you have modified a license file in the MD with new values for certain objects (e.g., updating a Personal Number license from a Trial license of 0 to 100 new licenses), use MD Support to synchronize the D.N.A. Database with the updated license information. A full synchronization is not required, only the feature that includes the updated license information (e.g., Operator Message Diversion).
193
Troubleshooting
Problem Logon rejected.
Possible Cause Logon attempt rejected by MD110 after three unsuccessful attempts. Time limit for MD110 feedback too short.
Corrective Action Restart the MD110 as described in the MD110 Operation and Maintenance manuals.
No character received from MD110 within time limitation.
Increase time limit.
Problem with Verify that the connection to the connection to the MD110 is good and verify that the MD110 or the MD110 MD110 is operating properly. itself. Problem with TAU/modem. All Telnet ports are occupied. No password assigned for user ID. Restart/reset the TAU/modem.
No dial tone received from the communication device. No free MML session is available. No password assigned.
Verify that there is a port available. Request that system administrator add Extension Manager access password to the user ID.
No prompt received from PBX.
Logon to PBX not Verify that the connection to the PBX completed due to is good and verify that the PBX is problem with operating properly. connection to the PBX or the PBX itself. Incorrect MD110 password entered. Enter correct password, or use MD Support application to assign a new password. Verify that the device is available. Resend command. Try to connect again. If the attempt fails, try again after intervals of several minutes. Request that system administrator add Extension Manager access privilege to the user ID.
Password unknown.
SCS device is not available. Serial line not available. The dialup number is busy.
The SCS device is occupied. Command to MD110 temporarily blocked. The destination directory number is unavailable due to current activity. User ID not authorized for Extension Manager.
The logged in user is not allowed to run Extension Manager.
The number of extensions The reason could be available for initiation that during the
Run the DNA server installation and select Resize Database. Any value
194
Troubleshooting
Problem reaches the maximum allowed.
Possible Cause installation of the DNA server, the value set per node was lower than the number of extensions you actually have in the node, and after synchronization of all extensions, you exceeded the maximum allowed for that node in the database.
Corrective Action in the Total Number of Extensions, and the Extensions for each node, can be used. These values have no impact towards the license value in ELM, as ELM is the master.
The site for the current transaction is different from the selected site.
You are attempting to Disconnect the current site and process a transaction reconnect to the site required for the for a different site transaction. than the site currently connected. Extension number is Run MD support and re-synchronize not a member of any "Directory Information" and "Number known number series Series". currently in the database. Network is down. Site security information does not exist in logging local database. Logging facility service is down. Restart the network. Run RDS on the server.
Unable to get the site for the current transaction.
Unable to retrieve site security information from logging service.
Run logging facility service on the client.
Unable to retrieve the TargetDirectoryClient value from the Registry. Please contact your Administrator. Unable to retrieve transaction data source from Logging service.
TargetDirectoryClient Contact technical support. entry for Aastra does not exist in Registry.
RDS not running. Logging facility service is down. Data mismatch between RDS and logging facility service.
Run RDS on the server. Run logging facility service on the client. Restart logging facility service on the client.
Unknown communication The system does not error. recognize a communications
Contact Aastra Technical Support.
195
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause failure.
Corrective Action
Operator Workstation
This table lists problems that may occur during Operator Workstation operation. It provides an explanation of the probable causes and recommended remedies. Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Use the Windows Performance Monitor to check the exchng32.exe and mapisp32.exe processes. See E-mail Integration for OWS, in the Configuration section.
Cannot deliver (send) OWS may not have e-mail messages to successfully attached D.N.A. subscribers to a MAPI session. from Operator Workstation.
Cannot send mail via System default locale is Force an update to the system default SMTP with localized not set to the localized locale. Run the windows Control Panel, versions of OWS. version. and select the Regional Options applet. Click the Set default button, choose your language, and click OK. If you are not prompted to restart the system, select a different language and restart the system. After the system restarts, set your language again and restart once more. Error dialog box displayed when starting Operator Workstation. Database settings configured incorrectly. PBX interface problem. Perform the suggested corrective action and restart Operator Workstation. If the problem recurs, verify the RS-232C connection between the TAU and the PC by using a breakout box, and verify the line by initiating the line as a digital station and verify that the D3 works on that line. IRQ conflict or I/O address problem. Multiple ports or devices assigned the same IRQ (interrupt request), or address settings improperly configured. Use the winmsd.exe utility in the system32 directory for Windows to view IRQ and address settings. Reassign IRQs and/or address settings to resolve conflicts. Check D.N.A. Server installation and restart Operator Workstation after correcting database configuration.
Operator Workstation Line initiation or cabling Verify the RS-232C connection between starts, but cannot get problem. the TAU and the PC by using a any on/off duty breakout box, and verify the line by
196
Troubleshooting
Problem indications.
Possible Cause
Corrective Action initiating the line as a digital station and verify that the D3 works on that line. Check the class of service and call origin group for this operator interface in the MD110.
Operator Workstation Setup problem. starts and you can go "on duty" but cannot make or answer calls. OWS hangs at Problem with Vista OS startup on a Vista while configuring User Business machine Account Control. with User Account Control (UAC) enabled, but when UAC is disabledOWS starts up with out any problems. The account that tries to run the OWS is the Administrator.
Switch the windows user to Administrator account and start the OWS, it should start ok. Switch back to the account which has admin privilege and try launching OWS. Problem could occur if the Administrator account has no password.
197
Troubleshooting
OWS Supervisor
Use the following table to correct problems found when running OWS Supervisor. Error Message Possible Cause Failed to find The user ID on the client Connection cannot logon to the D.N.A. Point in Server server. Or "Failed to advise the connection point" is displayed when starting OWS Supervisor. Extra security running on Windows XP (with Service Pack 2 or higher). Corrective Action Verify that the user ID logged on at the client has correct authority to logon at the D.N.A. server. This can be done by using domain rather than local accounts when the machines are in the same domain. When in separate domains or in a workgroup, the easiest solution is to create a local account on the server with the same user ID and password as the local account on the client. In addition to DCOM and Windows account permissions, SP2 adds a Firewall control panel. The exact steps necessary to enable OWS Supervisor depend on the network and security setup, i.e. whether clients and servers are in a domain or workgroup, and domain or local accounts being used. Troubleshooting is aided greatly by enabling Security Auditing (in Local Security Policy) and D.N.A. auditing (in the D.N.A. User Manager under the Application menu).
198
Troubleshooting
Error Message Possible Cause
Corrective Action The minimum requirements are: 1. The Windows account in effect for OWS Supervisor must have administrative privilege on the DNA server. 2. DCOM Access and Launch permissions for OWS Supervisor (the client application) and DNASupervisorServer (the server service) must include that account or a group to which it belongs. 3. The Firewall control panel must show OWS Supervisor checked (enabled). 4. Port 135 has to be opened through the Windows firewall for OWS Supervisor over TCP. 5. The DNA user account must have Access permission to OWS Supervisor.
"Access is denied"
The windows account for OWS supervisor does not have administrative privilege on the DNA server.
Verify that the Windows account in affect for OWS Supervisor has administrative privilege on the DNA server.
Deployment Scenario 1:
DNA Server Connected to a Domain Controller. Operating System logged with Domain Administrator account. DNA Client Connected to a Domain Controller. Operating System logged with Domain user priviledge account. Problem: OWS users logged with Windows Domain user privilege are not listed in the OWS Supervisor.
199
Troubleshooting
Corrective Action: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. From the Start Menu, select Run and then type dcomcnfg. Click OK. The Component Services dialog box displays. In the Component Services dialog box, select Component Services. Traverse to the path Component Services>Computers>My Computer>DCOM Config. In the DCOM Config folder, select the component DNASupervisorServer. Right click to view properties of DNASupervisorServer and click the Security tab. Under Launch and Activation Permissions, select Customize and click Edit. Add the Windows User logon that is going to launch the OWS Application.
9. Set permissions to allow Local Launch, Remote Launch, Local Activation and Remote Activation. Now when OWS is launched by a Windows user with DOMAIN User privilege, they are listed in the OWS Supervisor.
Deployment Scenario 2:
DNA Server Deployed as a Workgroup. Operating System logged with Local Administrator account. DNA Client Connected to a Domain Controller. Operating System logged with Domain user priviledge account. Error Message: Failed to advise the Connection Point Corrective Action: For the message above, perform these settings: Firewall should be set to Off on the client machine.
The Domain User that logs in to Win XP Client should be added on to the DNA Server using Component Management > System Tools > Local Users and Groups > Users. (Do not use Administrator UserID since the DNA Server also has this ID). The UserId and the Password should match the Client Windows Operating System logon UserID and password. Perform the following steps using the Component Services of the Win XP Client: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Start Menu, select Run and then type dcomcnfg. Click OK. The Component Services dialog box displays. In the Component Services dialog box, select Component Services. Traverse to the path Computers>My Computer. Select the My Computer and right click to view Properties of My Computer.
200
Troubleshooting
6. 7. 8. Access. 9.
Click the COM Security tab. Under Access Permissions click Edit Limits. Under Permissions for ANONYMOUS LOGON allow Local Access and Remote Click Apply. Now when OWS is launched in Win XP Client with Windows Domain user, OWS Supervisor will work correctly.
Performance Data Manager

Use the following table to investigate problems identified in PDM error messages. Error Message Possible Cause Corrective Action
Cannot connect Telephone number to access Verify that MD110 telephone to MD110. MD110 unavailable or incorrect. number is correct and available. Cannot open Communication device is being Close the other application using communication used by another application. the communication device or device. wait until the communication device is available. Selected communication device Specify a valid communication does not exist. device. Communication to this node is rejected because of mismatch in system identity. PBX system identity has been changed and does not match with the one stored in the database. Resynchronize data. If synchronize system identify only, you can synchronize Numbering Series.
Or, wrong communication node Check node configuration is defined. settings. Telnet is set for communication. Check the connection list via However, there is no IP Communications -> Define list. address set in the connection list.
No default attempt connection list is defined. DNA application will not be able to connect to MD with Telnet setting.
Cannot Logon to MD110 not completed Verify that the connection to the synchronize with due to problem with connection MD110 is good and verify that MD110. to the MD110 or the MD110 the MD110 is operating properly. itself.
201
Troubleshooting
Corrective Action
Communication Problem with connection to the Verify that the connection to the line blocked. MD110 or the MD110 itself. MD110 is good and verify that Communication the MD110 is operating properly. line failure. Data format error. Possibly caused by MD110 file system error. MD110 file system problem. Contact MD service personnel. Consider skipping data for that day (unrecoverable error).
Data format Noise in the communication line Retry the operation at a later error. Possibly between the PC and MD110. time. caused by noise. Data sequence error during data transfer. Database No SQL server connection operation failed available. or there was an error connecting to database server. SQL server is down or network connection is down. Data source is not set up correctly. Check event log for more specific error messages provided by the SQL server. Restart PDM. Verify that at least two connections are available. Verify that SQL server is up and network connection is OK. Verify that the data source is set up properly. Verify that the connection to the modem/TAU is good and verify that the modem/TAU is operating properly.
Error initializing Problem with connection to the modem, or modem/TAU or modem/TAU an error itself. resetting the modem. Failed to allocate memory. Not enough system memory.
Close unnecessary applications and restart PDM.
Failed to create No disk space available on the Delete unneeded files from the temporary file. local drive. local drive to make space Failed to write to available. temporary file.
202
Troubleshooting
Corrective Action
Failed to get Network is down, or RDS is not Restart the network, and run data associated running. RDS on the server. with PMG from the logging server. Incorrect Communication parameters for Set up the communication communication the communication device are parameters to match the settings. not set up correctly. communication device. No character received from MD110 within time limitation. Time limit for MD110 feedback Increase time limit. Maximum is too short. 300 seconds (5 minutes). Time limit should be increased to reflect the size of the PABX switch (the larger the switch, the longer the time limit). Problem with connection to the Verify that the connection to the MD110 is good and verify that MD110 or the MD110 itself. the MD110 is operating properly. No prompt received from MD110. Logon to MD110 not completed Verify that the connection to the due to problem with connection MD110 is good and verify that to the MD110 or the MD110 the MD110 is operating properly. itself. Command to MD110 temporarily blocked. Resend command.
Serial line not available.
203
Troubleshooting
Error Message Possible Cause Unable to connect to database server. Unable to establish connection to database server. No SQL server connection available.
Corrective Action Check event log for more specific error messages provided by the SQL server, restart PDM, and verify that at least two connections are available.
SQL server is down or network Verify that SQL server is up and network connection is OK. connection is down. Data source is not set up correctly. Verify that the data source is set up properly.
User for database is not set up Verify that the user ID and password for database is set up correctly. correctly. Not enough space for the auxiliary database. Reinstall the database for PDM. Increase the size for the auxiliary database. You may want to back up the databases and restore them after reinstallation. Retry the operation later.
Unable to lock Database has been locked by database. PDM running on another PC. Database is used exclusively by other process.
Performance Presentation Manager

There are two troubleshooting tables and a description of the ppm.ini file to help you identify and resolve problems for Performance Presentation Manager. The first troubleshooting table describes troubleshooting for general problems, and the second table describes troubleshooting for specific messages displayed by PPM.
Essential Requirements
PPM, like Microsoft Excel 2000, Excel 2002, or Excel 2003, requires an installed printer driver to function when connected to a printer.
204
Troubleshooting
Report Limitations
Although all traffic measurement data collected on the hard drive is stored in the SQL database, only objects related to Operators, Trunk Routes, Voice Extensions, PCM lines, PBX Hunt Groups, Cordless Extension Common Fixed Part, Cordless Extension Traffic and Mobility Function and IP Network Interface are available in pre-defined traffic measurement reports for PPM. Because PPM Lite is only a subset of PPM, only objects related to operators, Trunk Routes, and PBX Hunt Groups are available to PPM Lite. All traffic measurement reports generated from the Query Measurements panel are write-protected. You must save edited report worksheets under new filenames to preserve their contents and to distinguish them from the original files.
General PPM Problems

Use the following table to analyze Performance Presentation Manager problems. Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Start Excel, select Macro from Tools menu, select Security, then change to Medium in the Security Level tab. Start Excel, select Macro from Tools menu, select Security, then change to Medium in the Security Level tab.
Excel 2000 and Excel The macro security level is 2002 - Launch PPM set too high. but only Excel is started Excel 2003 Launch The macro security level is PPM with Excel set too high. message Macros are disabled because the security level is set to High
Auto-formatted charts Incorrect print driver selected Use the Printers option for the do not print properly. or print driver not set up Windows Control Panel to properly. select a different printer or modify the printer setup. Cannot access SQL database. ODBC data source not set up Set up ODBC again. properly. PPM does not have access rights to one or more databases. Server goes down and the connection is damaged. Incorrect site database. Make sure that all databases set up by PDM and the different site databases grant the proper access to PPM. Exit and restart PPM to reestablish the connection. Use PPM Switch Sites option to select the correct site and database (primary or auxiliary).
205
Troubleshooting
Remote Data Server

Symptom RDS fails to execute a scheduled task. Probable Cause Corrective Action Security settings on Set security attributes so the return handle can each machine be inherited by child processes/threads. differ, therefore the default security Change the value of the following Registry key: HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\RemoteDS\ attributes conflict Manager\UseSAForScheduledProcess with the parent process. Format: N/A Value: [REG_DWORD] 0=no (default value); new processes will not inherit security attributes from parent process. 1=yes; new processes will inherit security attributes from parent process.
Mobile Executive
The following table contains recovery information for phone error codes. Symptoms Failed to load Mobile Executive URL Error on Phone WAP ERR-500 Internal server error Possible Cause Make sure the MobileDNAObject.dll and CallEvetn.dll have been registered and assigned the correct permission (read + execute). Make sure the session.mdb has the correct permission (read + write), and the Mobile Executive logged on user's phone number is assigned in the DMG database. Make sure SQL server and RDS are running. Make sure SQL server is running
Failed to Logon
WAP ERR-500 Internal server error
Failed to Logon
WAP ERR-408 Server timeout WAP ERR-408 Server timeout Error code: xxxx Failed to activate profile!
Failed to access Personal Number Failed to update the Personal Number
Make sure EMG is not running in the foreground on the same machine where Mobile Executive is installed, the MD connection is OK, and the SYSTEM user has been added in DNA User Configuration with EMG privileges.
206
Troubleshooting
Symptoms Search results always empty
Error on Phone
Possible Cause Make sure RDS is running and LDB files exist in \DNA_C or DNA_S\DDB\DATA.
Wrong device (message only) Failed to make call
Call feature will not be available Wrong device
No call handling license or IPService is not enabled The extension is not a mobile extension

For debugging purposes, you can use RegEdt32 to configure the Aastra Communication Assistant Log at:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\ERICSSON\ECA\IPService
The following values are recommended. CSTAEVENT (= 0) ENTERINGMETHOD (=1) events sent from AppLink to ACA. Stored if = 1, = 0 not stored LEAVINGMETHOD (=1) service requests sent from ACA to AppLink. Stored if = 1, = 0 not stored LOGFILE specifies where the log file is stored and the name of the log file (defaults to <eca directory>\bin\eca.log) PORTID (= 1f92 in hex, and 8082 in decimal) TRACE (= 1)
Call Handling problems

Use the following table to investigate call handling problems. Error Message Cannot establish communication to the Call Event Service Possible Cause IP Service is not started Corrective Action Start the service. Also change the startup type to automatic if set to manual. Make sure IP Service is running Make sure AppLink is running. Make sure the OAS settings have been defined with correctly information in ACA Configuration.
Extension xxxxx in node Request has failed due to x cannot be monitored AppLink is not running
207
Troubleshooting
Error Message Function unsuccessful
Possible Cause Failure event received from AppLink. If getting this message continuously, check the ACA log for details. The connection between ACA client and IP Service has broken. This is usually due to the connection between IP Service and AppLink being broken.
Corrective Action Make sure AppLink is running. Find the failed event in eca.log. Also suggest to trace in CSTA log. Make sure AppLink is running. After problem is fixed, the ACA client should receive Communication to Call Event Service restored message.
Unable to communicate with ApplicationLink
Personal Number problems

Problem Causes
There are two common causes for Personal Numbers problems. 1. Data out-of-synch The personal number data that ACA presents is retrieved from the SQL database. You may encounter the following errors if personal number data is out-of-synch with the PBX. Failed to delete choice Failed to change choice data Failed to initiate choice Failed to activate the profile
To correct the problems, please re-synchronize extension data for the faulty extension through MD Support. 2. Backend component not configured properly The other possible cause is because EMG connection with PBX fails. The administrator must make sure EMG can be logged on with SYSTEM account and can connect with PBX successfully. Please refer to Configuration for Personal Number access section for details.
Trace
The administrator can turn on a log file to capture the errors if needed. Perform the following steps to turn on the log. Define the full path of the log file Specify the full path of the log file for Registry HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECA\CurrentVersion\DlinkLog E.g., c:\dna_c\eca\bin\Dlink.log Set the value of the following Registry keys to 1
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECA\CurrentVersion\DlinkDebug HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECA\CurrentVersion\DlinkEntering HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECA\CurrentVersion\DlinkLeaving HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECA\CurrentVersion\DlinkWarning
208
Troubleshooting
Restart IIS Go to the command prompt and enter iisreset Use the following table to investigate the errors. For any errors not listed, send the log to support personnel for analysis. Error Message DnaLink.ocx CoCreateInstance Failed. Failed to create DnaLink.ocx object. Possible Cause Dnalink.ocx is missing or not registered. Corrective Action Check the file in \share\bin. Reinstall D.N.A. if file is missing. Register the file using Regsvr32 if file exists. Check the file in \share\bin. Reinstall D.N.A. if file is missing. Register the file using Regsvr32 if file exists. Make sure EMG is installed on D.N.A. Server and EMG can be lauched with System account. Turn on SQL Trace to get detail information from SQL Server side.
Dnalink.ocx is missing or not registered.
EmgMdConnect DnaLink.ocx failed to connect to EMG, node=XX ConnectToEmgDb() DnaLink.ocx failed to connect to EMG database. OCX_Error=XX, Node=XX GenerateTask failed OCX service stopped, TaskType=XXXX All other errors
Dnalink.ocx failed to connect to EMG. Check if EMG is installed. Dnalink.ocx failed to connect to database.
Dnalink.ocx is missing or not registered.
Check the file in \share\bin. Reinstall D.N.A. if file is missing. Register the file using Regsvr32 if file exists. Send the log to support personnel for analysis.
Service
IP Service is installed on the D.N.A. Server. Since this service interfaces with AppLink, it should be restarted if call handling becomes a problem.
Header Error
If you get a Header Error when attempting to access the Assistant Log from a client browser, make sure buffering is enabled on the D.N.A. Server. To enable buffering 1. Run Internet Information Services by selecting Start4Programs4Administrative Tools4Internet Services Manager.
209
Troubleshooting
2. In the Internet Information Services window directory tree, expand the server directory to display its subdirectories. 29. Expand the Default Web Site directory. 30. Click on the eca directory and click the Properties icon on the toolbar.
210
Troubleshooting
31. Click the Configuration... button in the eca Properties dialog box. 32. In the Application Configuration dialog box, go to the App Options tab.
33. Make sure Enable buffering is checked.
Fields are Disabled

Aastra Communication Assistant requires the Java Virtual Machine software on your computer. You can download it from http://java.com. If not installed, the fields associated with Java will be disabled: Quick Search in the main page Quick Dial/Search in the main page after logon Quick Dial in the Call Handling window Start Date/Time and End Date/Time in the Message Diversion page Activate Date/Time and End Date/Time in the Active Profile page.
211
Troubleshooting
Slow to logon
It will take longer to logon for the first ACA logon request. This is due to the backend EMG process which will be started by the first logon request if EMG/Personal Number flag is turned on by the administrator. However, if backend EMG connection to PBX failed, the logon will take even longer because ACA has to wait until the EMG connection request has returned. If EMG connection with PBX fails, the request will not return until time-out. The administrator must make sure EMG can be logged on with System account and can connect with PBX successfully.
Outlook Integration & Lotus Notes Integration

Outlook or Lotus Notes Integration would not start
This problem is caused because Outlook or Lotus Notes was not installed on the system or there is no Outlook profile created in the logged on user's account. Make sure Outlook is installed and able to run under the logged on user's account.
Outlook or Lotus Notes Integration would not logon to the DNA Server
This problem is caused when there is no subscriber entry found with the current computer name (or User ID) defined in the D.N.A. Directory. Make sure you added the computer name(or User ID) to the subscriber's entry in the D.N.A. Directory.
Diversion information does not match between Outlook or Lotus Notes Integration and DNA
This problem is caused when the current desktop extension does not match the primary extension of the D.N.A. subscriber entry that has the computer name (or user ID) defined for that subscriber. Make sure the subscriber entry in the D.N.A. directory has the correct primary extension with the correct computer name (or user ID).
DNA Outlook Integration and Calendar Conflicts

When you have 2 Outlook Calendar appointments on the same day and time, a problem in DOI might arise. If a problem does occur, DOI will not know how to handle this and will report this as an error. The error message when you start the DOI program will give you the following message: One or more Items in the folder you synchronized does not match. To resolve the conflicts, open the items, and then try this operation again. Users who have conflicting appointments in their Calendar can solve this problem by clearing ALL of the conflicting appointments manually in Outlook. The following steps are used to find and solve the conflicting appointments: 1) Open a table view in the Outlook Calendar. 2) Go to the View menu, select Current View and then choose By Category.
212
Troubleshooting
3) Identify the conflicting appointment(s). The conflicting appointment(s) will be displayed with a crossed-swords icon ( ). 4) Clear the conflicting appointment(s). Double click on each conflicting appointment to bring up the "Conflict Message" Dialog Box, and follow the instructions to clear the conflicting appointment.
Troubleshooting with Remote Data Monitor

Use the Remote Data Monitor to help determine if the correct messages are transferred between Outlook Integration and RDS. This utility reports Remote Data Service events. You can run RDM by double-clicking on DNA_S\SHARE\BIN\rdm.exe.
213
Chapter 12 Application Data

Report Generation
Although D.N.A. applications can be used to display and report a wide variety of information, you may want to extract data directly from the application databases and use other applications to manipulate the data or generate reports.
To Generate Reports Using Access

1. Click the Attach Table tool on the Access toolbar to attach the SQL Database. 2. After selecting SQL Database, Access prompts you for a data source. Select the data source pointing to the SQL server with MD110 data. 3. Login to the SQL server by entering thirdpty as the user ID and password. Click on the Options buttons to select a database. 4. Select a table from the list and attach all tables that you want to use for your reports. 5. Click on the Query tab, and then on the New button to define a New Query. In order to correctly set the table relations, you should refer to the technical documentation for the specific D.N.A. application. 6. After setting the table relationships, run the query and check the results to see if the data is coming back correctly. Click on the ! tool on the toolbar to run the query. 7. Once you are satisfied with your query, click on the Report tab and then click on the New button. Access prompts you with the Database dialog box. Select the query that you defined in the previous steps, and then click on the Report Wizard button. 8. The report wizard guides you through the steps of defining a report. 9. Select the fields and the sort order that you want to include in your report, and define the report style and page orientation. 10. The Report Wizard asks you for a report title. After you have entered the title of the report, you can choose to run the report or go to report design view to further customize the report layout.
214
Application Data
Directory Manager Database Organization

The following table lists the directory database tables used by D.N.A. applications and utilities. Table Name subscriber Field Name recID middle_name absent first_name honorary last_name options primary_extension primary_nodeID record_type sort_priority main_department_recID picture_resid middle_name_alt1 middle_name_alt2 middle_name_alt3 middle_name_alt4 first_name_alt1 first_name_alt2 first_name_alt3 first_name_alt4 last_name_alt1 last_name_alt2 last_name_alt3 last_name_alt4 udf1_recID udf2_recID udf3_recID udf4_recID udf5_recID udf6_recID udf7_recID udf8_recID udf9_recID udf10_recID udf11_recID udf12_recID udf13_recID udf14_recID udf15_recID udf16_recID udf17_recID udf18_recID udf19_recID udf20_recID Field Type int varchar bit varchar varchar varchar int varchar int tinyint tinyint int varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int Max Characters 30 30 30 30 30 Description record ID middle name subscriber alert first name honorary last name ext. number node ID print priority dept record ID picture file name alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling alternative spelling UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
subscriber
215
Application Data
Table Name subscriber
Field Name udf1_field udf2_field udf3_field udf4_field udf5_field udf6_field udf7_field udf8_field udf9_field udf10_field udf11_field udf12_field udf13_field udf14_field udf15_field udf16_field udf17_field udf18_field udf19_field udf20_field recID name dept_type_recID parent_recID child_recID sibling_recID udf1_recID udf2_recID udf3_recID udf4_recID sort_priority recID nodeID directory_number options primary_user_recID nodeID sitename nodename remote_nodeID remote_server options recID nodeID start_extension end_extension type options recID
Field Type varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar int varchar int int int int int int int int int int int varchar int int int varchar varchar int varchar int int int varchar varchar int int int
Max Characters 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 60
Description Personal UDF value
department
dept. record ID dept. name parent record ID child record ID sibling record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID sort priority ext. record ID node ID directory number user record ID
extension
site
50 50 30
node ID site name node name remote node ID remote server record ID node ID start extension end extension
numser
30 30
keyword
record ID
216
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name value
Field Type varchar int int varchar varchar varchar int int int int int int int tinyint varchar tinyint varchar varchar tinyint int varchar int int int int varchar int int int int int int int int int int varchar varchar int int varchar int int varchar
Max Characters 45
Description text value record ID dept. record ID address phone number name UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID UDF record ID record ID
external_directory recID department_recID address listed_number name udf1_recID udf2_recID udf3_recID udf4_recID udf5_recID udf6_recID field_ definition recID SQL_type field_name field_type field_resid label_name record_type options table_name display_sequence UDF_number max_data_length char_fields recID value def_char_recID share_count department_recID subscriber_recID extension_recID subscriber_recID keyword_recID subscriber_recID recID nodeID trunkID trunk_name options groupID name access_codes recID nodeID exchangeID
160 30 50
30 30 30 20
field name field type label display
display sequence personal UDF max length 45 record ID text value
sub_dept sub_ext sub_key trunks
dept. record ID sub. record ID ext. record ID sub. record ID keyword record ID sub. record ID record ID node ID trunk number trunk name display global group ID global name Table "access codes" for multiple tenants
20 30 30 30
global_name
20
217
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name access_code nodeID_connection remote_server
Field Type varchar int varchar varchar int int varchar int varchar varchar varchar varchar int int varchar datetime datetime varchar varchar varchar it datetime datetime int int varchar varchar int int tinyint int int int int int int int int int int datetime int varchar
Max Characters 20 30 20
Description
deleted_id dept_recid_tmp
table_name recID recid terminal
deleted table record ID temporary department record ID table extension dialing information
16
dial_extension_inf recID o country_code area_code prefix suffix options numser_recID dirdb_info schema_ver_no created_date released_date database_server database_server_ver_n odbc_ver_no recID start_time end_time duration reason_code reason_text cancel_text counter options status is_diverted_recID diversion_type dept_diversion_recID link_diversion_recID owner_appID repeat_type repeat_every repeat_type_day_0 repeat_type_day_1 repeat_type_day_2 repeat_type_day_3 repeat_end_time oper_div_recID
10 10 10 10
30 30 30 30
Directory database version and release information
diversion
Message diversion
160 80
218
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name operatorID
Field Type
Max Characters 60
Description
divr
nodeID pbx_reason_code dna_reason_code pbx_description dna_description tdn duration reference method options priority
int int int varchar varchar varchar int varchar varchar int int int varchar varchar varchar tinyint datatime int int int varchar int varchar varchar varchar int int int varchar varchar int int varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar int varchar varchar int varchar varchar varchar int int
10 30 1 40 30
Message Diversion Reason Table (Synchronized from extension database by RDS)
message
recID msg_text cancel_text phone status when_received oper_msg_recID received_recID options operatorID recID userID external_extension sub_extension sub_recID status options name
160 80 30
Message Waiting (incl. E-mail) indication
60 20 30 30 OWS Outbound Dialer dynamic log
outbound_dialer
60 20 reserved table record ID time system translation codes
reserved_id_table table_name reserved_flag ts_trans_codes portID ts_reason_code reason_code diversion_flag tdn ts_reason_text portID ts_msg_byte msg_byte
4 1 1 1 80 1 1 20 20 1
ts_msg_convert
time system message conversion time system card number range
ts_card_no_range portID start_card_no end_card_no diversion_flag ts_message recID received_recID
time system
219
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name msgID card_no portID
Field Type varchar varchar int int varchar int int varchar varchar varchar int int int varchar int int varchar varchar int datetime datetime int varchar int int int varchar int
Max Characters 10 20
Description message waiting
user_search_acce recID ss userID department_recID vs_mail_box_no_r portID ange start_mail_box_no end_mail_box_no diversion_flag vs_message recID received_recID msgID mail_box_no portID
20
logged-in user search access voice system mailbox number range
20 20 1
voice system message waiting 20 voice system reason codes
vs_reason_codes PortID reason_code reason_text sub_activation_ex subscriber_recID piration activation_time expiration_time options description vs_diversion rec_ID is_diverted_recID divID mail_box_no portID
1 80
subscriber to be activated time to activate time to expire 80 description of activation voice system diversion
20
Extension Manager Database Organization

Table Name accnt Field Name accountcode description cust Field Type varchar varchar varchar Max Default Characters 15 60 3 null
220
Application Data
Table Name acdpam
Field Name acdnum acdval acdmisopt
Field Type smallint smallint smallint varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint smallint varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar
Max Default Characters
null null 5 5 null null 11 10 5 3 20 20 20 2 null null null null null null null null null null 5 5 5 null null null 5 null 8 8 9 6 1 11 1 null null null null null null null null
acdsup acgrp
extno groupno traffic limno queuelen service selcat qindchannel cust name1 name2 info pres sat aveconvtime bkgroupno
acmem
groupno extno clericaltime qpriority qpritype
adn
extno catno traffic service calldivcat routingcat transcat addcat callalt
221
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name cust name1 name2 info pres datype
Field Type smallint varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar smallint smallint smallint smallint smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar smallint varchar smallint varchar smallint int varchar varchar smallint smallint
Max Default Characters null 20 20 20 2 null null null null null 5 null null null null null null 4 20 20 64 5 5 10 20 64 null null null null null null null null null null
ancdgrp
ancd lim serv sel traf cust sat maxtim name1 name2 pres status
ancdmbr
ancd sat node distno string startTraf status
anndesc
annnum annname
60
null null
apppam
pamnum pamval
authcode
authcodeno calllogcode comcat checkcode
7 6 null null null
222
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name dir cust csp
Field Type varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar smallint smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar int char varchar varchar varchar smallint
Max Default Characters 5 null null null 7 6 null null null 5 null null null null 5 5 5 8 9 9 6 9 4 1 20 20 20 2 null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null
authcode2
authcodeno calllogcode comcat restrt dir cust csp newcust
auxana
extno prianano auxananext cat traffic service calldivcat routingcat addcat icat transcat cust name1 name2 info pres
bcrelease bpos callbyname
bc id dir name1 name2 type
9 20 20 20
null
223
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name aux
Field Type varchar varchar smallint smallint smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar smallint varchar smallint varchar int smallint varchar varchar int varchar varchar
Max Default Characters 10 5 null null null null 20 20 20 2 null null null null null
cbgrp
groupno traffic service queuelen cust name1 name2 info pres
channel
icuind node cho status
null null 64 5 5 26 4 null null null null 5 60 null null 5 null
chgrp comabb
groupno comabbno transno class cust
comabbdesc
comabbno description cust
comabbinfo
comabbno status
comdiv
comdivno divtype cust
10
null null null
compg
pageno searchcode speechsrcarea pagecat
5 5 3 5 null null null
compgm
pageno
224
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name psano
Field Type smallint int varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar int smallint tinyint varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar int
Max Default Characters
comsrvprf
cspno traf serv cdiv roc npres desc
10 12 8 6 3 60 5 8 13 48
null null null null null null
cordless
extno access authkey ipei authpar
null null null null null
corg
operator_id corg_id primary_f
cpagrp
cpgrpno cpagrpno
5 5 5 null 11 5 5 5 3 3 14 11 null null 14 14 null null null null
cpgrp
groupno limno
csta cstagrp
equ cstano odnno adnno odnkey adnkey
cstaiodev
iodevice equ devtype
cstalgrp
linkgroupid iodevice
custinfo
custno
225
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name
Field Type
Max Default Characters 30
custname custmusic custno parkedann queuedann dat extno tau datcat traffic service termcat transcat routingcat devtype modgrp addcat datapool dpnum dpgrp dptype dayn route type extno trunk dcat catno traffic service termcat transcat routingcat descp deftfunc insttype keyno
varchar smallint smallint smallint varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint smallint smallint varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar int varchar 3 8 2 10 14 2 30 5 6 8 2 10 14 2 10 5 6 5 5
null null null null
null null null null null null null null
null null null null
null null null null null null null
226
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name ktype kvalue
Field Type varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar int varchar varchar smallint varchar smallint varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar
Max Default Characters 3 5 5 null null 2 4 5 null 5 5 3 5 null null null null null null
dgrp
groupno traffic service modemgrpno disturbinfo
dgrpstatus
groupno used
dirpg
dirpgm
pageno psano
dnisnums
dnisnum used
5 null 5 5 null 20 20 20 2 null null null null
dnisused
dnisnum servgrp servtype name1 name2 info pres
emdev emdevname
emdevnum dmdevnum devname
60 11 60 5 255
null
equloc
equpos location
null
extdesc
extno description
null
227
Application Data
Table Name extinfo
Field Name extno type status
Field Type varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar int varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar int smallint int int varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint smallint smallint smallint varchar smallint smallint smallint smallint varchar varchar
Max Default Characters 5 null null 5 5 3 5 null null null
extpg
extpgm
pageno psano
gdgrp generic
groupno extno csp cust lim type name1 name2 info pres
5 5 null null 20 20 20 2 5 null null null null null 5 null null null null 9 3 null null null null null null
grprva
grpno welno queno reqrueno cidreqno ewta
hgrp
groupno traffic queuelen limno trunkcat service selcat
228
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name cust name1 name2 info pres
Field Type smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar int int int varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar int smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar
Max Default Characters null 20 20 20 2 null null null null
histtaskinfo
taskid batchid procid procinfo status resultdesc
2048 null 255 5 26 2 null null null
hot
hotfrom hotto hltype
icuequ
icuind equ
11 5 10 5
null
idiv
idivfrom idivto
null
indabb
extno indabbno type transno
null 26 5 30 20 2 2 5 null 8 8 9 null null null Null null null
ipext
extno password bckpos insttype secexc
isdn
dir cat traf serv cdiv
229
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name roc adc acctyp cust name1 name2 info pres da
Field Type varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar smallint int int int varchar varchar int smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar
Max Default Characters 6 8 null null null null 20 20 20 2 5 5 5 2 2 2 5 11 2 5 16 null null null null null null null null null null
ivmbox
vsdno extno vcat pergr lang
lvmsys
vsdno equpos sideno
lang
idx name
lim marker
id taskid batchid procid primkey1 primkey2 viewname marked
32 32
null null
mdmgrp mdn
id odnno mdnno keyno callalt
5 5 3 1 null
230
Application Data
Table Name memgrp
Field Name grpno grpmem type initorder
Field Type varchar varchar smallint int varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar
Max Default Characters 5 5 null 5 5 20 5 5 null null 5 null 9 8 9 6 1 11 1 3 20 20 20 2 null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null 5 5 3 5 3 3 null null null
mns
odnno mnsno dig
msgint
extno term typeintserpos
odn
extno catno traffic service calldivcat routingcat transcat addcat callalt insttype cust name1 name2 info pres datype lang
odnadn
adnno odnno keyno
odnfunc
extno keyno ktype
231
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name value dig
Field Type varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar int char varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint varchar smallint smallint smallint smallint smallint smallint varchar smallint varchar varchar smallint
Max Default Characters 5 20 5 5 3 null null
odntaut
tautno odnno keyno
operator
id equpos
11 5 5
null
pgagrp
grpcodeno pageno
pgchl
channelno psano equ
11 11
null
phyequ
equpos boardid status prodno rev
null null 20 8 5 null null
pninfo
extno profile position answerno timeout busygoto frinternal froperator frpublic useonce
20
null null null null null null null
pnstatus
extno profile
5 null 5 5 null null
priana
extno auxno cat
232
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name traffic service calldivcat routingcat addcat transcat insttype icat cust name1 name2 info pres
Field Type varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint smallint char char smallint smallint smallint int int smallint smallint varchar varchar
Max Default Characters 8 9 9 6 9 1 4 4 20 20 20 2 null null null null null null null null null null null null null
psarea
searchareano blockingtime repetitionno signaldiagtype signaldiagvar holdingtime
null null 3 10 6 8 2 null null null
rfp
bpos rpn
route routrunk
id id equpos route_id
11 11
null null
rvadata
annnum rvanum annfrom annto devtype
null null null
rvamsg
msgnum msgname
60 5
null null
satgrp
sat
233
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name
Field Type
Max Default Characters 5
ancd node oflno inftyp ofltim ovflow sms extno msgserver iodevice sms1 extno msgserver lim ip port spext extno specexttype taskinfo taskid batchid procid procinfo status resultdesc taufunc extno keyno value dig usedext extno type equpos vcat catno traffic
varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar int varchar varchar int int varchar varchar varchar int int int int varchar smallint varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar smallint varchar smallint varchar 8 11 255 5 3 5 20 5 2048 14 5 1 1 20 5 5 5 10 1 4
null null null null null null
null
null null
null
null null
null null
null null
null
234
Application Data
Table Name
Field Name service calldivcat routingcat descp
Field Type varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar
Max Default Characters 9 9 6 30 5 5 2 null null null null null
vmport
extno portno infocomind
PDM Database Organization

Table busy c_bell cfp code_r code_s confer cxnmob cxntrf datext dialdy extens ipbrd keyc_r keyc_s measinfo modgrp opcorg opindi opmann Includes Data For Busy hour Common bell group Cordless Extension Common Fixed Part MFC code receiver MFC code sender Conference Cordless Extension Mobility (for BC11 or later) Cordless Extensions Fixed Part (for BC11 or later) Data extension Dial tone delay Voice extension IP Extensions Key code receiver Key code sender Measurements initiated by the user Modem group Call origin groupfor PBX operator Individual PBX operator PBX operator manned time
235
Application Data
Table
Includes Data For
pagext pagsar pbxgrp pcmlin roubwy rouddi roudio rouinc rouout tone_r Trunks
Paging number Paging search area Internal group hunting group number PCM line Both way (incoming and outgoing) route Direct indialing route Direct indialing outgoing route Incoming route Outgoing route Tone receiver Individual trunk
Operator Workstation Data

Directory Assistance Databases
You must use the Directory Configuration Utility to set up directory data structures before using Directory Manager. After using this utility to create directory assistance data structures, you can add contents using Directory Manager or the Directory Import utility. Application/Utility D.N.A. Directory Import Utility Description The Directory Import Utility can initialize your directory database with subscriber extension information extracted from MD110 hard disk tables or from appropriately formatted ASCII text files.
D.N.A. Directory Manager Directory Manager is a day-to-day administrative Application application for both populating and managing the contents of Operator Workstation subscriber records.
Operator Workstation Configuration

The following notes explain how and where Operator Workstation configuration settings are stored.
236
Application Data
How Settings Files are Created

Operator Workstation user configuration and directory configuration settings are stored on Operator Workstation server and client machines. User and directory configuration files are not included with the initial installation of the Operator Workstation application. Instead, these files are created either when a user first makes changes to Operator Workstation settings, or when the user accepts the default settings and logs off Operator Workstation the first time.
Permissions for Changing User and Directory Settings

D.N.A. user permissions, which are controlled by the D.N.A. Server User Configuration Utility, are stored in the security database on the SQL Server. Note that one of the permissions for Operator Workstation is Preferences. The Operator Workstation application checks this setting to determine of the logged user is permitted to make changes to the Operator Workstation settings found under the Options menu.
Where to Find Settings Files

User configuration settings are stored in the username.ows file, and the directory configuration settings are found in the username.stg file. These files are located in the \Dna_s\Ows\Data or Dna_c\Ows\Data sub-directories, for server and client PCs, respectively.
Operator Console Settings

Operator Console Configuration settings are stored in the Windows Registry under the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\OPI\CurrentVersion key.
237
Chapter 13 MML Commands

Extension Manager
The Extension Manager Application uses the following MML commands in its communications with the PBX. Note: Only a subset of these commands are available in the MX-ONE. Please consult the MX-ONE O&M for details. Consult the EMG Users Guide for a list of functional differences between the MD110 and the MX-ONE. Functional Grouping Automatic Call Distribution Commands ACGCC ACGMC ACGME ACGMI ACGRI ACPAC ACGRE ACBGI ACBGE NCNOI NCNOE NCICI NCICE NCCOI NCCOE NCGRI NCGRC NCGRE NCSGI NCSGC NCSGE NCGMI NCGMC NCGME NCGTI NCGTE NCGSP ADCOE ADCOI ADINE ADINI AOCOE AOCOI
Automatic Network Call Distribution
Abbreviated Dialing Account Code
Application System Parameter ASPAC Authorization Code System Time Common Bell Group Call Diversion Charging Cordless Extension CSTA Data Group AUCOE AUCOI CATII CBCAC CBELI CBGME CBGMI CDCOE CDCOI CDINE CDINI CHGME CHGMI CXAKE CXAKI CSTPE CSTPI CSTLE CSTLI DGCAC DGGME DGGMI DGGRE DGGRI
238
MML Commands
Functional Grouping
Commands
Data Extension DNIS Analogue Extension Generic Extension Group Do Not Disturb Internal Group Hunting Group Call Pickup Common Service Profile Data Category Voice Category Integrated Voice Mail
DTCAC DTCCS DTEXC DTEXE DTEXI DTFUI ACTNI ACTNE EXCCS EXCAC EXCUC EXDPC EXTEE EXTEI GEDIC GEDIE GEDII GDNDE GDNDI GHCAC GHGME GHGMI GHGRI GPAGE GPAGI GPGME GPGMI GESPC GESPE GESPI DTCCS EXCCS IVBOI IVMAI IVMAE IVBOE
Interception Service & Message ISEPE ISEPI Waiting ISDN Terminal Digital Key System Telephone ITCAC ITCUC ITNUE KSANE KSANI KSCAC KSCAP KSCUC KSDDP KSEXE KSEXI KSFKC KSMDE KSMDI Name Identity/Call By Name Night Service Paging NIINE NIINI NSCOI NSCOE PAALE PAALI PACAC PACHE PACHI PAGIE PAGII PASAE PASAI PEALC PELPC PELPE PELPI RODNE RODNI SPEXE SPEXI
Personal Number Route Data Special Purpose Extension
239
MML Commands
Functional Grouping
Commands
Voice Mail
VMPOE VMPOI
Recorded Voice Announcement RADSE RADSI RAGAI RAGAE RAGAC RAMDE RAMDI Music On Hold Per Customer IP Extension Mobile Extension Short Message Service CUMHI CUMHE IPEXI IPEXE IPEXC REEXI REEXP REEXE NUTRI NUTRE BC12: CXSYI CXSYC CXSYE MSCOI MSCOE BC13: MSCOI MSCOE MX-ONE 3.1: sms_server_initiate sms_server_end Note: PELCS command is not supported in EMG.
MD Support Utility
The D.N.A. Server MD Support Utility uses the following MML commands in its communications with the PBX. Note: Only a subset of these commands is available in the MX-ONE. Please consult the MX-ONE O&M for details. Functional Grouping Calendar Data and System Identity Digital Extension Analog Extension Data Extension ISDN Extension Number Series Name Identity Commands CADAP
KSCAP KSDDP KSTSP KSFKP KSMDP EXCAP EXDDP EXCCP DTCAP DTCCP DTDDP DTFUP ITDAP NADAP NIINP
240
MML Commands
Functional Grouping Group Hunt Automatic Call Distribution Automatic Network Call Distribution Common Bell Group Operator Data Group Modem Group Charging Group Group Call Pickup Group Do Not Disturb Account Code
Commands GHDAP ACGMP ACGCP ACPAP ACBGP NCNOP NCICP NCGRP NCGMP NCGSP NCSGP CBDAP OPDDP OPCGP OPRSP DGDAP MGMGP CHGMP GPDAP GDNDP AOCOP account_code_print (for BC release greater than MX-ONE 2.0)
Authorization Code
AUCOP auth_code_print (for BC release greater than MXONE 2.0)
Intercept Computer
ICFUP
Recorded Voice Announcement RAGAP RAMDP Special Purpose Extension Trunk Paging Abbreviation Call Diversion SPEXP RODNP ROCAP ROEDP RADSP RADNP PAEDP PADAP PAALP ADCDP ADIDP CDIDP CDCDP
241
MML Commands
Functional Grouping Voice Mail Message Interception Computer Support Telephony Applications
Commands VMPOP ISEPP CSTPP CSTLP
Application System Parameters ASPAP Configuration System Data Group Junction Lines Program Correction Log Print System User Information Generic Extension Cordless DNIS Personal Number Number Conversion I/O-Data Integrated Voice Mail Customer Music On Hold IP Extension Mobile Extension Short Message Service CNPIP CNLIP CNBIP SYEDP SYEVP GJLCP PCLOP SUDIP SUSIP GEDIP GESPP CXAKP ACTNP PELPP NUTRP IONCP IVMAP IVBOP CUMHP IPEXP REEXP BC13: MSCOP MX-ONE 3.1: sms_server_print
242
MML Commands

The Performance Data Manager (PDM) application uses the following MML commands in its communications with the MD110. Functional Grouping Common Bell Groups Conference Units MFC Code Receivers MFC Code Senders Dial Tone Delay List active measurements in MD110 Data Extensions Extensions Cordless Extension Common Fixed Part Key Code Receivers Key Code Senders End individual active measurement in MD110 Modem Groups PBX Operator Manned Time PBX Operator CORG Internal Group Hunting (PBX) Group Number Paging on Search Area PCM Lines Direct In dialing Outgoing Route Trunks Commands TRCBI TRCOI TRCRI TRCSI TRDDI TRDIP TRDXI TREXI TRCFI TRKRI TRKSI TRMEE TRMGI TROMI TROPI TRPBI TRPGI TRPLI TRROI TRTLI
243
MML Commands
Functional Grouping Tone Receivers Read traffic measurement data from MD110 HDU
Commands TRTRI FIFCP
Specify Cordless Extension Common Fixed Part TRCFI Cordless Extension Traffic for BC11 or later IP Network Interface for BC11 or later TRCFI TRIPI
MD Support Command Line Synchronization

You can control the MD Support utility from the Windows command line. With this new release, you may specify: which individual node to synchronize, extension(s) or range of extensions to synchronize, or, LIM(s) or range of LIMs to synchronize, or features (e.g., digital, analog, ACD group) to synchronize. This means MD Support can be scheduled to synchronize the MD110 on a regular basis via a scheduling utility such as RDS Scheduler.
Command Line Syntax

Command line syntax for MD Support is: MDS /site:<site#> [/sync:{ext=(digit,..,digit-digit..)} | {digdual,ana,...} | {lim=(digit,..,digit-digit..)} ] The /site parameter is required, while the following settings are optional: Individual extensions or range of extension Individual LIMs or range of LIMs
Supported PBX Features

Note: Only a subset of these features is available in MX-ONE. Please consult the MX-ONE O&M for details.
digdual - Digital and Dual Access isdn - ISDN ana - Analog data - Data genext - Generic Extension dirinfo - Directory Information cbn - Call By Name opequ - Operator Equipment ocorg - Operator Call Origin Group
244
MML Commands
cb - Common Bell Group dg - Data Group mg - Modem Group ch - Charging Group gh - Hunt Group ad - Automatic Call Distribution ancd - Automatic Network Call Distribution rvagnac - RVA Group Announcement rvamdat - RVA Message Data
custmoh - Customer Music On Hold

dnis - Dialed Number Information Service gcp - Group Call Pickup gdnd - Group Do Not Disturb accnt - Account Code auth - Authorization Code spext - Special Purpose Extension daynig - Day/Night Position page - Paging cabb - Common Abbreviation idiv - Individual Diversion cdiv - Common Diversion vm - Voice Mail msgint - Message Interception pn - Personal Number csta - Computer Supported Telecom. Appl. route - Route trunk - Trunk vcat - Common Voice Category dcat - Common Data Category csp - Common Service Profile equ - Equipment Position numse - Number Series pcm - System PCM/LIM msgdiv - Operator Message Diversion
245
MML Commands
loc - Location Code numconv - Number Conversion lim - Line Interface Module pripubpref - Private/Public Prefix
Examples
To synchronize all information in node 1: MDS.EXE /site:1
To synchronize a range of extensions in node 1: MDS.EXE /site:1 /sync:ext=(1000,1004-1005)
To synchronize a range of LIM in node 1: MDS.EXE /site:1 /sync:lim=(1-3)
To synchronize digital and number series in node 1: MDS.EXE /site:1 /sync:digdual,numse
To set up RDS Scheduler to run MD Support

1. Assign MD Support privilege to a D.N.A. account, e.g., Ericsson. 2. Log into RDS Configuration using the account in step 1. Set up a schedule job running MDS, e.g., mds.exe /site:1. RDS will save the current account into the Registry.
Make sure to check the option Activate Using the Current Logged-In DNA Account. 34. When RDS Schedule invokes MDS, it will pass to MDS the schedule identifier that MDS uses to retrieve from the Registry the account identification. Internally, MDS uses this account to log in to D.N.A.
To set up other schedule utilities to run MD Support

1. Set up an account in DNA having the same name as the Windows account. Assign the MD Support privilege to this account. 2. Scheduled a synchronization job running MDS. For example: mds.exe /site:1
246
Chapter 14 Frequently Asked Questions

Directory Manager
Question: Directory Manager supports the following checkbox options. Show in Visitor Registration OCX Show in DNA Directory OCX How are these controls implemented? Answer: The DNA Directory OCX file (i.e., DNA_S\Share\bin\DNADir50.ocx or DNA_C\Share\bin\DNADir50.ocx) is used by many DNA and Non-DNA applications, including Operator Workstation, CCA, PSC, etc. It can also be used by third-party vendors or Web based applications. When used by third-party vendors, the Show in DNA Directory OCX option will enable/disable this display capability for the selected Directory Manager entry. Question: How do I change the starting day of the week for the calendar in the Activation tab, when adding or updating a user? Answer: You can change the starting day of the week by changing the CalendarFirstDay value under the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Ericsson\DMG\CurrentVersion Registry key. Use the following values: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday
Question: What does the extension category in Directory Manager stand for? Answer: In Directory Manager, the extension category is shown in the Subscriber window. When you select an extension from the Extension to Add list box, the category is shown in the Category list box. If you add a new extension, you may choose a category for it by using the Category list box. Categories apply to all extensions, not just primary extensions.
247
Frequently Asked Questions
The extension category was implemented to integrate Directory Manager and Operator Workstation with PSC. Directory Manager and Operator Workstation treat the extensions the same regardless of their categories. Since Directory Manager or Operator Workstation does not use the extension category, it is not shown at all in Operator Workstation, and it is not shown prominently in Directory Manager. Directory Manager just provides an easy way to assign a category to a new extension so that PSC can use the category.
D.N.A. Server
Question: Why do I repeatedly see the warning "PBX watchdog timed out" in the event log? Answer: This warning shows up if the PBX Service is running but does not have a connection to the MD110 via a CT-adapter. If you do not plan to use OWS on your D.N.A. Server you can stop the messages by running the OWS / PBX Extension Line control panel program and set the com port to none.
Extension Manager
Question: How do I configure programmable/nonprogrammable buttons, LEDs and text strings for buttons on the phone layout to be displayed in EMG? Answer: A data file is used to store information about the phones characteristics, which include the phone size, programmable/nonprogrammable buttons, LEDs, and text strings for buttons. Phone data files are stored on the client machine in DNA_S\EMG\DEF. The following rules are used to describe the phone: 1 Comment line An entry start # is a comment line 2 Dimension of the instrument (single entry) Format: s w h where w, h are width and height of the instrument in pixels. 3 Pure text object (multiple entries) Format: t x y, string where (x, y) is the coordinate to draw the string 4 Non-programmable button (multiple entries) Format: n x y w h, string where (x, y) are coordinates and w, h are width/height of the object. String is the text to be displayed on the button.
248
5 Non-programmable button with round LED (multiple entries) Format: nl x y w h, string where (x, y), w, h and string are the same as those described in 4. 6 Non-programmable button with rectangular LED (multiple entries) Format: nr x y w h, string where (x, y) w, h and string are the same as those described in 4. 7 Programmable button (multiple entries) Format: i x y w h x2 y2, string where (x, y), w, h, and string are the same as those described in 4. (x2, y2) are the coordinates to draw the function name assigned to the button. 8 Programmable button with round LED (multiple entries) Format: il x y w h x2 y2, string where (x, y), w, h, (x2, y2) and string are the same as those described in 7. 9 Programmable button with rectangular LED (multiple entries) Format: ir x y w h x2 y2, string where (x, y), w, h, (x2, y2) and string are the same as those described in 7. 10 Pure rectangular LED (multiple entries) Format: l x y where (x, y) is the coordinate to draw the LED.
Question: What kind of local databases does Operator Workstation use? Answer: The LDBs have *.DAT and *.NDX files (like FoxPro) but they are in an Aastra specific format. The local database files are a binary tree based design implemented by Aastra. It is not based on any commercial products. You cannot read it with any 3rd party applications. To refresh the local databases try to delete the following files: \DNA_C\OPI\DATA\ *.DAT and *.NDX and restart Operator Workstation. Do not delete the *.OWS and the *.STG files because they are the configuration files for each user account in Operator Workstation. If the *.DAT and *.NDX files are not rebuilt again you will have a problem with your network or your RDS Service.
To refresh the local databases

1. Delete the files \DNA_S\OPI\DATA\ *.DAT (or \DNA_C\OPI\DATA\ *.DAT) and *.NDX 2. Restart the Operator Workstation.
249
35. Do not delete the *.OWS and the *.STG files because they are the configuration files for each user account in Operator Workstation. If the *.dat and *.ndx files are not rebuilt again you have some problem with your network or Remote Data Server. Problem: Operator Workstation application crashes (fails) within 5 hours of startup in a configuration where an English language Windows server is running with a Norwegian Windows workstation. Solution: The problem is in the default configuration of the Norwegian Windows Workstation and the English Windows Server. When installed, they default to Disable Distributed COM. To solve this problem: 1. Login as the Windows Administrator. 2. Run DCOMCNFG.EXE. You should find this file under the WINNT\System32 directory. 36. In Default Properties, select Enable Distributed COM. Enabling this flag eliminates this Operator Workstation crash problem.
Digital Telephone Set

Question: What are the key assignments for managing calls via the Digital Telephone Set (DTS)? Answer: This is the key configuration for handling calls via a DTS in D.N.A. DTS Key Prog Clear Speaker Access 1 Access 2 Inquiry Transfer OWS Function On/Off Duty Clear Left and Right Answer incoming call Speech left Speech right Both-way speech Extend
Question: How does the receipt function in the Operator Workstation messaging dialog box work? Answer: If a MAPI session has been established, the Snd Rcpt key sends the message with a request for a return receipt. If the recipient's mail system honors the request, the operator's mailbox receives a message when the recipient opens the message from the operator. If sender and receiver both use the same mail server or post office (i.e., Microsoft Exchange Server or Microsoft Mail with a work group post office) return receipts are quite reliable. If one or both parties use SMTP mail, the results are less reliable.
250
If the receiver is using Outlook with preview, it is possible for the message to be read without being opened. In that case, the return receipt is not sent until the message is either opened or deleted. If it was read in a preview and then deleted, the return receipt will say that the message was deleted without being read! Question: What is the function of the Operator Workstation meter key? Answer: Call metering requires hardware support on the MD110. If the MD110 is equipped with pulse counters and the public exchange uses metered trunks, then the operator can request that trunk calls be metered and get the pulse count (which represents time and charges) when the call ends. The count is displayed in the dial box. If the system does not support metering, pressing the meter key just displays Meter in the dial box, and then VACANT in the speech window. In this case, it is better to program some other function for the key.
Operator Workstation LAN

Question: How much bandwidth is needed for a good performance in the Operator Workstation? Answer: This is impossible to say without knowing how many subscribers, UDFs, keywords, etc. your database has. Each time your Operator Workstation starts up, it copies the LDB of the server to the clients. If you have the size of the LDB, you know how much data will be copied over the network (only at startup of Operator Workstation and by default at 0200 Hours). For normal operation, during the day, Operator Workstation does not use much network traffic. This is of course depending on how many changes they do in Directory Manager during the day (changes will be send to the LDB of Operator Workstation client). Factors other than bandwidth are more likely to cause network performance problems. In particular, be careful about the operating system security setup and the DNS and/or WINS servers. If possible, keep the D.N.A. client machines in the same Domain as the D.N.A. server. Whether your network uses a WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server or DNS (Domain Name Service) for address resolution, try to insure that an outage on that server does not adversely affect the D.N.A. machines. Problems with WINS/DNS do not affect Operator Workstation directly, but can become a factor if other applications are used concurrently. For example, something as simple as expanding a subdirectory in the Explorer or the Network Neighborhood can take a ridiculous amount of time if the primary WINS server is offline. Similarly, the logon and load of the user profile can be delayed as much as 15 minutes when the primary domain controller is down. The only time when bandwidth may be an issue is immediately after RDS has finished a database repopulation. It then pushes all the new local tables and indices to all its registered clients. Depending on the size of the database and the number of clients, the network (and RDS) can be very busy for a few minutes. RDS repopulation can be controlled via the RDS configuration utility. Its activity can be monitored (and recorded if desired) with the RDM utility. Both should be available in \DNA_S\MRS\BIN on the DNA server.
251
Remote Data Server

Question: What is the LOGDB? Answer: In the \DNA_S\MRS\DATA\RDS directory there is a part of the local database called LOGDB. This part of the database is getting bigger and bigger. It seems that RDS is sometimes very busy updating this file resulting in problems on the Operator Workstation clients. What is this LOGDB used for and why is it getting so big? LOGDB is the transaction log for RDSs local databases. All the updates to the local databases will be registered in this transaction log, and it is quite natural that it grows as new subscribers are added, deleted, or updated. Also, updates from messages and diversions are also logged. RDS uses this transaction log to synchronize all the D.N.A. clients. This transaction log gets cleaned up on a nightly basis. Please refer to RDS Configuration Utility SCHEDULE 2 - Local Database Clean Up Scheduled Audit. Question: Why is RDS so busy after using Dirpop? Answer: If you (for example) use dirpop.exe and close Dirpop before it changed anything, you may experience RDS active for about 20 minutes or so and take up substantial CPU time. Each change in Directory Manager is updated in the LDBs (local databases). These LDBs are mainly used by Operator Workstation (plus EMG and LFS). When Dirpop updates the database, these changes are not transferred to the LDBs during the importing. This would take to much CPU and Network resources. This is why Dirpop gives the command to populate the local databases to RDS when you exit. When you have used Dirpop, RDS has to make sure that the LDBs have the same information as the SQL database. This does take some time and resources, but Dirpop and RDS do not provide any notice to whether you actually changed something or not. Question: What does "Enable Automatic Data Synchronization from Extension to Directory D.N.A. Database" mean? Answer: This is a checkbox on the RDS Options tab. The Extension Manager database has three tables that need to be queried by RDS for internal purposes. However, since RDS only has access to the Directory Manager database, these three tables should be kept synchronization between Extension Manager and Directory Manager databases. If this is checked, RDS performs database synchronization with Extension Manager by copying Site, Divr, and Numser tables from EMGDB (Extension Manager side) to DIRDB (RDS side) at startup time. The Site table contains information on sites, the Divr table diversion reason codes, and the Numser table number series. It is checked by default and we highly recommend you to keep it checked. Question: How does the Standby Remote Data Server work? Answer: If (for example) RDS crashes, it switches over to the standby side and generates a DrOhan.log crash dump file under WINNT directory. You will also get the following message in the Event Log.
252
E1186 - Remote Data Server Unexpectedly Terminated - Switching Over To Standby Remote Data Server This log entry indicates that the standby Remote Data Server has taken over the RDS business. The new active RDS spawns for another standby process to monitor it. Unfortunately, the new active RDS is now running as a process and not as a service. This is because it is not possible to run two instances of the same service simultaneously. However, starting from Windows 2000, the operating system provides support for restarting failed services. This provides equivalent functionality as the Standby Remote Data Server and is the preferred alternative. Open the RDS service properties in Windows Service Control Manager and display the tab called Recovery. Set First, Second, and Subsequent failures to Restart the service. Set reset failure count after 1 day and restart the service after 0 minutes. Save the configuration. Open RDS Configuration and disable Standby Service. Question: How does the Standby Remote Data Server work? Answer: If (for example) RDS crashes, it switches over to the standby side and generates a DrOhan.log crash dump file under WINNT directory. You will also get the following message in the Event Log. Question: Why do some MD110 PBXs fail to properly clear and/or update active diversions, even when the RDS service has been verified as running? Answer: In BC11 SP2 and later, a new code (04) exists in the GICI protocol. The 04 will trigger a 54 response from the MD110 (DIM clears active diversions before sending 54). Check for presence and proper value of the following Registry key:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\RemoteDS\Manager\ EnableDNAGICIInitiateUpdateRequestToPBX
Format: N/A Value: [REG_DWORD] 0=disabled (default value); 1=enabled For a previously installed D.N.A. server, the administrator needs to start the RDS service at least once for the Registry key to be created (with the default value). If the Registry key value is subsequently modified, the RDS service must be stopped and restarted for the changes to take effect. Note that this Registry key supercedes:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\MRS\RemoteDS\Manager\EnableDNAGICIUpdatesTo PBX If EnableDNAGICIInitiateUpdateRequestToPBX is set to 1, then EnableDNAGICIUpdatesToPBX will be ignored, since it is no longer relevant.
Serial Communications Server

Question: Can I run two different diversion systems on one GICI port? Answer: It could be practical to run two different diversion programs on the same GICI port when introducing a new diversion program. Then you can have old and new running in parallel for a period before switching.
253
The optional SCS service (a.k.a. GICI Server) in D.N.A. was designed for that purpose. It allows multiple D.N.A. servers to share the same GICI port and it also allows a third party Interception Computer to share the same GICI port. It is however not recommended to run multiple diversion and directory systems due to the overhead in work with updating two systems instead of one.

Question: How do I change the polling time for PDM? Answer: You can change this download time by adding a Registry-value.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ERICSSON\
You need to add the value: Ba tc hTi m e , DWor d , and enter the hour in hexadecimal. Example: Enter Ba tc hTi me =0 A if you want to start PDM downloading at 1000 Hours. Question: How does PDM work in BATCH mode? Answer: Is it possible, in a multi node environment, to extract data from only a certain node? For example, in a two-node system the second node is created for future use. When PDM.EXE BATCH is scheduled, PDM is also trying to extract from node two, witch results in errors because there is no MD110 to connect to. However, it is possible to select the desired node to poll.
To select a node to poll

1. Create a key with the DNA Server machine name under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\PMG\
Example:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\PMG\<computer name>Siten
2. Add the key Sk i pSi te s with the string of the nodes you want to skip separated by commas (",") under the key created in Step 1. Example: If there are 5 nodes and only nodes 2 and 4 should be polled, set the Registry string to 1,3,5, (end with a ",") Question: Which account is used for PDM in batch mode? Answer: In User Configuration you can allow or disallow a User to use PDM for a certain node. PDM polling however bypasses this D.N.A. security feature.
D.N.A. Application Suite

Question: What different releases for D.N.A. exist? Answer: The following table contains the releases of D.N.A. that are supported.
254
Version DNA 5.3 DNA 5.4
Release Information General release version of DNA 5.3 and BC12.1, and MX-ONE support. General release version DNA 5.4 and MXONE Telephony System Telephony Server (TSE). General release version DNA 5.6 and MXONE Telephony System Telephony Server (TSE).
DNA 5.6
MD110
Question: What ASPAC parameters are available for operator functions? Answer: The following table list ASPAC parameters. ASPAC 2 9 Format PARNUM=2,PARVAL=DDDDD PARNUM=9,PARVAL=DDDDD Range 0 - 32768 seconds 0 - 32768 seconds Description Time before recall to PABX operator from a parked party. Time before a PABX operator is recalled, after a call is extended to a busy extension. Time before a PABX operator is recalled on no answer, after a call is extended to a free extension. Time before a call in the common operator queue is indicated by a flashing common queue counter on an alphanumeric console. Time before calls in the individual PABX operator queue will be indicated as delayed. Time before a PABX operator is marked as absent after automatic call acceptance. Time before a PABX operator is marked as absent automatically when an indicated call is not answered. PABX operator call extending by means of Loop keys. Automatic and manual recall of the PABX operator after parking an external call Intrusion on a party with an external call. Maximum time a PABX operator can reserve an extension after conversation is complete.
10
PARNUM=10,PARVAL=DDDDD
0 - 32768 seconds
14
PARNUM=14,PARVAL=DDD
10 - 100 in 0.5 second units
15
10 - 100 in 0.5 second units 100 - 10000 in 0.2 second units 50 - 6000 in 0.2 second units
16
17
PARNUM=17,PARVAL=DDDD
33 34
PARNUM=33,PARVAL=D PARNUM=34,PARVAL=D
0 - not allowed, 1 allowed 0 - manual, 1 automatic 0 - not allowed, 1 allowed 0 - 32768 seconds
36 38
PARNUM=36,PARVAL=D PARNUM=38,PARVAL=DDDDD
255
ASPAC 39
Format PARNUM=39,PARVAL=DDDDD
Range 0 - 32768 seconds
Description Time before a PABX operator is recalled, when a call is extended before answer to a paged extension. Maximum time a PABX operator can reserve an extension before ringing. PABX operator forced release of third party after intrusion. Request for camp-on busy facility for PABX operator calls over public ISDN. Choice of clock format on PABX operator console and DTS. Manual and automatic ringing for Operator Workstation. PABX operator can extend to busy extension without call waiting category. Common PABX operator call queue size.
40
0 - 32768 seconds
57 76
PARNUM=57,PARVAL=D PARNUM=76,PARVAL=D
0 - not allowed, 1 allowed 0 - not allowed, 1 allowed 0 - 12 hour, 1 - 24 hour 0 - manual, 1 automatic 0 - yes, 1 - no
101 102 175
PARNUM=101,PARVAL=D PARNUM=102,PARVAL=D PARNUM=175,PARVAL=D
195
99 - 255 calls in queue
Registry
Question: What are the following Operator Workstation Registry keys used for? Answers:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\OPI\CurrentVersion\Number
This key holds a prefix number that will be dialed before the directory number of the subscriber selected in the directory list box. A typical use is to enable an easy way to override diversions.
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\OPI\CurrentVersion\UseAltSpelling
This key is intended to control the display of the closest matched names in the directory. Previous versions of Operator Workstation showed only the first and last names in the directory list box, even when the name that caused the match was an alternate spelling. The default is now to show the name that matched, surrounded with pairs of asterisks. By setting this Registry value to 0, the name display reverts to the pre-D.N.A. 4 method.
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\OPI\CurrentVersion\Secrecy
This key holds the feature access code for the Business Phone secrecy feature.
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\OPI\CurrentVersion\ActivateMapiDialog
When this value is set to 1 and MapiResolveName fails the MAPI dialog is displayed to permit the user to choose an email address.
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\OPI\CurrentVersion\SendMessageOnCancel
256
The default value for SendMessageOnCancel is 1. When set to 1, a message is sent when the MAPI Resolve Name dialog box is displayed and the user clicks the Cancel button. The ActivateMapiDialog Registry item must also be set to 1 to display the MAPI Resolve Name dialog box.
ClockSync
Question: Does anyone know what happens if you have more than one ClockSync Server running on the network? How does a specific client know which ClockSync Server it needs to read? I do not see a computer name in the ClockSync part of the Registry. When you have both a CCM and a D.N.A. server present in one Windows domain, how will the CCM clients know that they need to use CCM server ClockSync, and vice versa for D.N.A. clients? Answer: It is OK to have multiple ClockSync servers on the network. The ClockSync server on which they were installed will update the clients. This is defined in the Registry in:
HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\ClockSync\Parameters \ServerMachineName
The use of Windows named pipes means that the time request event is directed. ClockSync does not use TCP/IP Broadcast packets to send out the time. If you have two servers (CCM and D.N.A.) each with a ClockSync Server process (EnableServer in the above key is 0x1), you could change one to be a client of the other. For example, change CCM server machine to be a ClockSync client of the D.N.A. server, and then change all the CCM client machines to ask the D.N.A. server for time updates. If you change the CCM server and not the CCM clients, then they will not get the updates. Note: A ClockSync client cannot also act as a server.
SNMP
Question: I started one or more of the services that are flagged as manual start but they didn't show up in EVM, what's wrong? Answer: EVM, SNMP and DMI don't know which services are installed until they are started for the first time, due to a limitation in DMI that won't be propagated to EVM if the DMI runtime is already running. The solution is to briefly stop and then restart the CIMgr service. From that point on, all components will be aware of its existence whether it's running or not.
Export
Question: When will Export.exe export the confidential UDF fields? Answer: Export.exe will export confidential UDF fields when it's running in: Interactive mode Batch mode with the "/c" switch (e.g., from the command prompt, enter export batch /c). The only case when Export.exe will not export the confidential UDF fields is when it is running in: Batch mode without the /c switch (e.g., from the command prompt, enter export batch).
257
Note: A confidential UDF field is a UDF field defined in the Confidential tab in Directory Configuration.

Question: What settings do my Internet Explorer 5.5 or 6.0 browser need to run ACA properly? Answer: Under "Internet Options" Security tab you need to set "Allow cookies that are stored on your computer" to enable. Question: Why do I get the error message "PBX dialing information is not completely defined"? Answer: In order to make TAPI format dialing work the system administrator need to define country code and area code for the D.N.A. system. Please have the administrator run RDS Configuration and select the "PBX Dialing Extension Information" tab to define those settings. Question: I changed the "Place call from" setting in "Personal Options" but when I log on next time ACA will still use my primary number for call handling? Answer: After a new logon ACA will always use the subscriber's primary extension as the call handling number. The setting "Place call from" does only apply to the current session and is not saved after logoff. Question: Can I use favorites or bookmarks to access pages inside ACA? Answer: No. Due to the fact that you always need to logon first to be able to use ACA, you can not use favorites or bookmarks that bypass the logon screen. You can of course bookmark the first page of ACA to easily access the application. Question: When first displaying the ACA log on page my simplified Chinese characters do not show up, why? Answer: Make sure that your encoding in Internet explorer is not set to "Auto Select". This setting is found under View / Encoding. Question: Can I use Netscape 6.0 and the simplified Chinese version of ACA? Answer: No. Netscape 6.0 does not have a Chinese version and can therefore not support ACA Simplified Chinese. Question: What extension types can be used with ACA call handling features? Answer: Digital phones, analog phones, cordless phones, IP phones, and Mobile Extension. To make a call on an analog phone, you must pick up the handset first.
258
Chapter 15 Configuration
Networking (SNMP) Access Agent
The SNMP Agent for MD110 consists of two functional elements: Access Agent SNMP Agent This guide only explains the Access Agent, the only element used by the D.N.A. Application Suite. (The SNMP Agent element is used in D.N.A. Node Manager.)
To configure the access agent device

1. Connect the supplied female RS-232 cable to COM4 (COM4 can only be used for programming the agent device, not for communications) 2. Configure your communication program to: 9600,8,n,1 3. Press the agent device's Reset button 4. Set the appropriate settings for the agent, Expect a system response similar to: Base System BOOT, RYS 109 004/1 R6A V1.4.8 Dec 23 1998 Copyright (c) 2009, Aastra Technologies Limited Restart due to power-up reset 5. To change the agent configuration, press any key within five (5) seconds: 6. (M)odify any of this, (C)ontinue or (A)bandon changes? [M] 7. For each of the following questions, you can press Enter to select the value shown in braces, or you may enter a new value. Ho w d o I ru n SO FT ima ge ? 0 . Do n 't ru n SO FT ima ge , sto p in B OO T she ll 1 . Ru n th e S O FT imag e Wh ich on e d o you wa nt ? [1 ] 1 S e cu rit y: Ch an ge u se r I d an d/ o r pa sswo rd? [ N] n Cha ng e th is t o Y if you wa nt t o h ave a n ew lo g in _ na me /p a sswo rd HA RDWA RE P A RA ME TE RS : B au d ra t e f o r se ria l ch an n e ls [9 60 0] Do yo u wan t to ch a ng e t he b oa rd 's MA C ad d re sse s? [ N] Use Et he rn e t in t e rfa ce? [ Y] Th is bo a rd 's E th e rn et I P a dd re ss? = RA RP ) [ 16 4 .4 8 .7 1. 1 66 ] S ub ne t ma sk f o r Et he rn e t?
259
Configuration
(0 . 0. 0 .0 fo r n on e ) [2 55 . 25 5 .2 55 . 19 2 ] E th e rne t Ma ximu m Tra n smissio n Un it ? [1 50 0] Do yo u wan t a P PP int e rf a ce ? [ N] S ho u ld t he re be a d ef au lt ga te wa y f o r p a cke t rou t ing ? [Y ] Wh a t is it s I P a dd re ss? [ 16 4 .4 8. 7 1. 1 29 ]
To check for Telnet access

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Go into Telnet somewhere on a network PC Type in the IP-address of the Agent Type in Login name (name you gave to your Agent host) Type in your password (password you gave to your Agent host) Now you should get a $-sign. This means you are in the Unix operating system of the Agent. Type after $-sign: ls -l. This will give you the directory of the UNIX RAM-disk . Check the configuration of COM-ports with CAT comport.cnf. D.N.A. will try to access the IPU via the mml-port (see mml-entry in comport.cnf) 8. Type after $-sign: tncom mml and then send your SSSSS as a normal synchronization. You should be able now to synchronize with the MD110. 9. If you want to go back out of your session: type CTRL-D twice until you have the $-prompt again.
To Configure D.N.A. Agent Box Access

To link each D.N.A.-TELNET session with the IP-address of your agent, you need to setup TELNET in MD Support: 1. Set the Connection Type selection for each D.N.A. application to Telnet. The D.N.A. applications will select the mml-entry by default (see comport.cnf in Agent). Now setup the GICI-link via Agent Box. 2. In RDS Setup, you need to configure the GICI link to the Agent. Remember to enter a GICIentry in the comport.cnf file. Connect with an FTP application into the Agent. 3. Login with your login_name and password. 4. Type bin for binary download 5. Type get comport.cnf, and the file will be downloaded to your local disk 6. Change the comport.cnf file to your demands (i.e., add entry GICI): (Sample comport.cnf file) #------------------------------------------------------------------# Lines starting with '#' are comment lines. # # FILENAME: comport.cnf # Configuration file for the command tncom. # tncom is used for a telnet-to-V24 connection. # This configuration file gives the COM-port setting for a special # TELNET connection. # # PARAMETERS:
260
Configuration
# A configuration row has the following format, and the items must # be separated by space: # # <symbol> <comport> <baudrate> <databits> <parity> <stopbits> <flow> # # <symbol> : Any symbolic name (maximum 50 character). Used to identify # a port configuration. # <comport> : Communication port COM1,COM2 and COM4. # COM3 may be used but are reserved for MD110 or BIM. # <baudrate>: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 # <databits>: Number of databits; 7 or 8 # <parity> : e = even, o = odd, n = no parity # <stopbit> : Number of stopbits; 1 or 2 # <flow> : Software or hardware flow control; XON/XOFF, CTS or NONE # # EXAMPLE: # Configuration:mml COM1 9600 8 n 1 XON/XOFF # Start tncom:tncom mml #------------------------------------------------------------------mml COM1 9600 8 n 1 XON/XOFF mml COM2 9600 8 n 1 XON/XOFF gici COM3 9600 8 n 1 XON/XOFF 7. Type put comport.cnf to overwrite the file in your Agent with the updated version. Note: "mml" and "gici" must be lower-case!
Features in Agent
Agent has the ability to work with more than one login account. The default login account with version 1.0.x was "agent/spectre". Administrator Agent Box account is "root/sysadmin". You cannot delete the Administrator Agent Box account; you can only add new accounts. There is a possibility to change the root/sysadmin account, but we do not recommend this. If you want to change the configuration of the Agent box, you can also do this remotely via Telnet (without the need of connecting to COM4). You can do this by typing the command "CONFIG" after the $ prompt. Note: You must use <Ctrl> + J instead of <Enter> !
261
Configuration
TCP/IP Protocols and Port Number Assignments

Service netstat ftp-data ftp telnet smtp nameserv nicname nicname login domain domain tftp gopher gopher finger finger www-http kerberos kerberos pop3 sunrpc sunrpc Port 15 20 21 23 25 42 43 43 49 53 53 69 70 70 79 79 80 88 88 110 111 111 Type ? TCP TCP TCP TCP ? TCP UDP ? TCP UDP UDP TCP UDP TCP UDP TCP TCP UDP TCP TCP UDP Description What is the network status File Transfer (Default Data) File Transfer (Control) Telnet Simple Mail Transfer (email) Host Name Server Who is Who is Login Host Protocol Domain Name Server Domain Name Server Trivial File Transfer Gopher Gopher Finger Finger World Wide Web HTTP Kerberos Kerberos Post Office Protocol - Version 3 SUN Remote Procedure Call SUN Remote Procedure Call
262
Configuration
Service
Port
Type
Description
auth auth ntp nntp ntp netbios-ns netbios-dgm Netbios-ss sqlsrv snmp snmp snmptrap snmptrap bgp imap3 imap3 exe login who cmd syslog
113 113 119 123 123 137 137 150 156 161 161 162 162 179 220 220 512 513 513 514 514
TCP TCP TCP TCP UDP ? ? ? ? TCP UDP TCP UDP ? TCP TCP TCP TCP UDP TCP UDP
Authentication Service Authentication Service Network Transfer Protocol Network Time Protocol Network Time Protocol NetBIOS Name Servicer NetBIOS Datagram Service NetBIOS Session Service SQL Server SNMP SNMP SNMPTRAP SNMPTRAP Border Gateway protocol Interactiv Mail Access Protocol Interactiv Mail Access Protocol Remote process execution Remote login Remote who (rwhod) Remote command (rsh) System Log Facility
263
Configuration
Service printer talk talk ntalk ntalk router uucp uucp uucp-rlogin uucp-rlogin klogin klogin pmd pmconsole radius radacct
Port 515 517 517 518 518 520 540 540 541 541 543 543 1642 1643 1645 1646
Type TCP TCP UDP TCP UDP UDP TCP UDP TCP UDP TCP UDP TCP TCP UDP UDP
Description lpd spooler Terminal to terminal chat Terminal to terminal chat Newer version of terminal to terminal chat Newer version of terminal to terminal chat RIP UNIX to UNIX Copy UNIX to UNIX Copy a different variant of UNIX to UNIX Copy a different variant of UNIX to UNIX Copy Kerberized login Kerberized login PortMaster daemon in.pmd PortMaster Console Protocol Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS Accounting
Web Site Security

If you have installed D.N.A. Web-based applications such as PPMLite, Aastra Communication Assistant, Mobile Executive, or Personal Assistant, you may want to set up SSL security for the Web site. This involves the use of Certificate Authorities (CA). There are several CAs on the Internet that will issue certificates and Verisign (www.verisign.com) is one of the largest. If you are also running Certificate Server, you can issue your own server certificate. To request a certificate from a CA, you need to generate a New Key Request from the Key Manager and send it to the CA. To use Key Manager you must have Internet Service Manager and Internet Information Server installed. This feature is standard in Windows 2000 and later.
264
Configuration
Note: Client-side browsers will not automatically trust the certificate that you generate since it is not a well-known CA such as Verisign, however they will still work.
Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003

Please refer to the following Microsoft site for SSL setup with IIS 5.0 or 6.0: http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;Q298805&sd=tech With SSL security, you prefix your URL with https:// instead of the usual http://. For example, change http://www.mysite.com/ppmlite to https://www.mysite.com/ppmlite.
Setup D.N.A. Web Applications on Windows 2003 and IIS 6.0

Configurations setup automatically by D.N.A. installation
The following settings are configured by D.N.A. Web Application installations automatically and D.N.A. Web applications will run properly with these configurations.
Enable the ASP Web Service Extension in IIS 6.0

IIS 6.0 is installed in a locked-down state. It can only serve static content (plain HTML pages, text, etc.) with its default configuration. For IIS 6.0 to be useful and serve dynamic content, the Active Server Pages and Server Side Include web service extensions should be allowed. These settings are configured by any of the D.N.A. web applications installation.
Enable the parent path property in the virtual directory

Many ASP applications (such as the D.N.A. ACA web application) require the use of parent path notation to access include files, images, etc. In Windows 2003 Server, parent paths are turned off by default. This will cause certain applications to show an Internal Server Error when the Web application is accessed. This setting is per virtual directory.
NTFS Permissions
The NTFS permissions needed for D.N.A. web applications files and directories are also granted to the IUSR account during D.N.A. installation. The NTFS permissions set are: Directories \dirb\data NTFS permission Modify D.N.A. Applications Aastra Communications Assistant, ACC, and Mobile Executive Mobile Executive PPMLite
\mobileexec\bin \ChartJPEG
Modify Modify
Configurations to Run D.N.A. Web Applications in Worker Process Isolation Mode

You can follow the procedures below to manually configure the D.N.A. Web Applications to take advantages of IIS 6.0 new features. These steps are optional.
265
Configuration
D.N.A. Server and Web Application on the Same Machine

These are the steps to setup ACA when it is on the same machine as the D.N.A. server, either in a workgroup or a domain.
Create Custom User Identity

1. In the Computer Management console, click on the Local Users and Groups section on the left tree, right-click on the Users folder, and select New User.
2. Configure according to the following screenshot. (Enter your own password and remember it!) Once configured, the AastraWeb account can be used for other Aastra Web applications as well.
266
Configuration
3. Assign the AastraWeb account to the proper groups, Administrators, Users and IIS_WPG. IIS_WPG is a Windows 2003 account group that allows the user privilege to run an IIS 6.0 application pool, called a service account.
267
Configuration
Assign NTFS Permissions

The AastraWeb service account will need to have the proper privileges to read/write/modify files and directories that Aastra Web Applications use. Refer to the table listed in section NTFS Permissions of Configurations setup automatically by D.N.A. installation for details.
Create New Application Pool

1. In the IIS Manager, right-click on Application Pools, Select New, then Application Pool.
268
Configuration
2. It will pop up a dialog prompting you for the application pool ID. Enter AastraWebPool and select the first radio button that uses the default settings.
3. Once the application pool has been created, right-click on AastraWebPool and select Properties. In the Identity tab, select the second radio button and specify the AastraWeb account that was created earlier. Enter in the correct password. Click OK. It will then ask you to reconfirm your password. Type in your password and click OK again.
269
Configuration
4. Make sure that the application pool has been started by refreshing the IIS Manager view (i.e., click on the Action menu and then Refresh). A started application pool will have an icon with green arrows overlaid on top. A pool that has not been started will have a red x overlaid on top of the icon (possible cause could be that an incorrect password was entered). Please make sure it is running properly.
Assign Virtual Directory Application Pool (per Virtual Directory)

1. In the IIS Manager, configure each of the Aastra Web Application virtual directories by rightclicking the name such as Ericom and selecting Properties. Under the Virtual Directory tab, in the Application Settings section, select the AastraWebPool option from the Application Pool dropdown list.
270
Configuration
271
Configuration
Assign Virtual Directory Anonymous Identity (per Virtual Directory)

1. Go to the Directory Security tab. Under the Authentication and access control section, click on the Edit button. An Authentication Methods dialog will pop up. Check the Enable anonymous access checkbox and select the AastraWeb user that was created earlier. Enter the correct password as well. Also ensure that the bottom checkboxes are unchecked.
2. Click OK until all dialogs have disappeared.
Reset IIS
Go to the command prompt and enter iisreset. Wait until it is finished and then test the D.N.A. Web applications to make sure they are working as expected.
D.N.A. Server and IIS 6.0 Server on Different Machines

D.N.A. Server and IIS 6.0 Server in the Same Domain
The D.N.A. Web Application will need to access data on the D.N.A. server, which means the D.N.A. Web Application needs to be properly authenticated on the D.N.A. server with a domain user account that has the correct privileges.
272
Configuration
1. The AastraWeb account created in section D.N.A. Server and Web Application on the Same Machine is a local account on the ACA Server. For this scenario, the AastraWeb account needs to be created as a domain account. Instead of creating the account on the IIS 6.0 server, create it on the domain controller. For example, on the domain DNA, the user would be accessed by specifying DNA\AastraWeb. 2. Once the domain account has been created, on the IIS server, add DNA\AastraWeb to the IIS_WPG account group. 3. Follow the steps in Create Custom User Identify and Assign NTFS Permissions sections and specify the domain account DNA\AastraWeb as the user identity for the application pool and the anonymous identity. Again, make sure the correct permissions are assigned to the data directories for this new domain account. 4. Verify that D.N.A. Web Applications are working properly.
D.N.A. Server and ACA Server in Workgroups

For the D.N.A. Web Application to access the D.N.A. server, they need to have a shared account. Perform the following steps: 1. The AastraWeb account created in section D.N.A. Server and Web Application on the Same Machine is a local account on the IIS server. The AastraWeb account must be authenticated on the D.N.A. server as well. For this to work under workgroups, the D.N.A. server must have the same local AastraWeb account and password. On the D.N.A. Server, follow the steps in Create Custom User Identify and Assign NTFS Permissions sections so that there is an AastraWeb account on the D.N.A. server and an AastraWeb account on the ACA server. 2. Verify that D.N.A. Web Applications are working properly.
D.N.A. Port Assignments

D.N.A. 5.6
Windows named pipes (referred to as NP herein) use the following default port assignments: TCP 139 and 445 UDP 137 and 138 System Component Logging Facility Service (LFS) Shot Message Service (SMS) Clock Sync ACA Scheduler MD110 Time Port NP --NP 23 23 Comment Uses Windows named pipes. Port value is set in RDS Configuration. Uses Windows named pipes. Default value. Telnet session. Default value. Telnet session. Potential Clients SDS MD110 D.N.A. Client applications MD110 MD110
273
Configuration
System Component IP Service PBX Service Security Data Service (SDS) Remote Data Service (RDS) GICI SMTP Time System Service (TSS) Voice System Service (VSS) Service () Ows Supervisor Service Local Data Service (LDS) Serial Communication Service (SCS) LDAP Service
Port 2555 --NP NP --25 NP NP NP --NP NP 389
Comment Default value (can be changed via CSTA GUI). Uses COM-port (not connected to the network). Uses Windows named pipes. Uses Windows named pipes. Port value is set in RDS Configuration. Default value (port value is set in RDS Configuration). Uses Windows named pipes. Uses Windows named pipes. Uses Windows named pipes. Uses DCOM (i.e., ports in the range 1024 to 65535) Uses Windows named pipes. Uses Windows named pipes. Default value (can be changed via LDAP Server Configuration). Default value. Telnet session. Default value. Telnet session. Default value. Telnet session. Default value (can be changed via GUI). (Serverport) Default value Multicast Default value (can be changed via GUI). Call control and Intercept calls.
Potential Clients Application Link (via CSTA client) CT-Adapter D.N.A. Client applications (via LFS) RDS, LDS, D.N.A. client applications. MD110 SMTP E-Mail Server RDS RDS RDS OWS Supervisor application, RDS RDS RDS LDAP Server
Extension Manager (EMG) MD110 Support (MDS) Performance Data Manager (PDM) Enterprise License Manager (ELM)
23 23 23 2580
MD110 MD110 MD110 SDS
11740 DNA Mobile Executive (DME) 8082
SDS IIS
274
Configuration
System Component
Port 80
Comment Default value (can be changed via GUI). Logon and Search, using HTTP. Default value (can be changed via GUI). Logon and Search, using HTTPS (SSL). Uses Windows named pipes. Default value (can be changed via GUI). Call control and Intercept calls. Default value (can be changed via GUI). Logon and Search, using HTTP. Default value (can be changed via GUI). Logon and Search, using HTTPS (SSL). Microsoft CDO Uses Windows named pipes. Default value Uses UDP. Default value (can be changed via Registry or ACC.CFG configuration file). Uses UDP (PortRAS). Default value (can be changed via Registry or ACC.CFG configuration file). Uses TCP (PortCallSignal). Default value. ESSP communication with MD110. Uses UDP. Default value. Dynamically allocated (can be changed via Registry or ACC.CFG configuration file). RTP packets, using UDP. (PortRTP) Default value. Dynamically allocated. RTCP packets, using UDP.
Potential Clients WAP Device
443
WAP Device
NP Aastra Communication Assistant 8082
RDS ACA Clients
80
ACA Clients
443
IIS
135 NP Aastra Communication Client 1718 1719
Exchange Server RDS H.323 Gatekeeper Discovery H.323 Registration and Status
1720
H.323 Call control
9200
ESSP Control
2326 2444
H.323 Media Data
2327 2445
H.323 Media Data Control
275
Configuration
System Component
Port 80
Comment Default value. Can be changed via GUI. Logon and Search, using HTTP. (PortDNAIIS) Default value. Can be changed via GUI. Uses HTTP. Default value. Can be changed via GUI. Uses HTTPS (SSL). ADSI Logon. ADO TM data retrival Default value. Can be changed via GUI. Search, using HTTP. Default value. Can be changed via GUI. Search, using HTTPS (SSL).
Potential Clients IIS
Performance Presentation Manager Lite (PPM Lite)
80
Web browser
443
Web browser
389 1433 Personal Assistant P900 80
ADSI provider SQL Server Personal Assistant clients
443
Personal Assistant clients

To setup end users Web browser
Internet Explorer
Do not set Internet security in Internet Explorer to High. When you set Internet security to High, cookies and session variables are disabled. ASP session management requires the client browser to have cookies enabled to support sessions. Without sessions, the IIS server and hence the ASP application cannot store state information and will not work properly.
To setup Aastra Communication Assistant user account

The two fields with data types USER ID and USER PASSWORD must be setup with the Directory Configuration utility to enable administrators to create Aastra Communication Assistant accounts in Directory Manager. Refer to User ID and Password for ACA, ACC, and DME for details.
To configure Aastra Communication Assistant Server

There is an ACA Configuration Tool that is used to define the ACA Server configuration settings. To access this tool, Start the ACA Configuration utility by selecting Start4Programs4D.N.A. Application Suite4Administration Tools4ACA Configuration.
276
Configuration
Configuration for Call Handling and Diversions

To define ApplicationLink connection information 1. To configure AppLink, press the Add... button. The Application Link Information dialog is opened.
2. Enter the Node ID that will be used for call handling and/or diversions. Enter the AppLink Server that is the name of the PC where AppLink is installed for the selected node. Enter the Port number used for AppLink connection. It defaults to 2555. Click OK to save your configuration. To set up IP Service settings Turn on ACA log
277
Configuration
1. Specify the log file name and full path. Defaults to <D.N.A. directory>\eca\bin\eca.log. It is used to trace the events between the IP service, the browser, and AppLink events. 2. Define IP Service port number The default port number is 8082. To set up Access Code Define the leading dialing codes for Local, Long distance, and internal calls for outbound dialing use.
Configuration for other ACA Server settings

Press Option button to open Options dialog for defining other ACA Server settings.
Free Seating This feature allows user to logon to an extension other than his/her primary extension during the current session. This means user will be logged with primary extension next time. This feature is off by default. Show node number This feature allows showing node number in addition to extension number. It is on by default. Wait Time after Diversion response from Data Server
278
Configuration
ACA Server interfaces with Data Server i.e either LDS or RDS for message diversion. After ACA Server receives message diversion response from Data Server, it needs to wait for enough time to ensure that the Data Server processes the message diversion request on the switch. After this wait time, ACA Server will send the proper message diversion details to the ACA client. This wait time depends on various parameters like performance of Data Server, connection between Data Server and the switch, and performance of switch. ACA Server will rely on the wait time specified here in seconds. The default is 5 seconds. User defined information page Administrator can create a page to provide information for users having logon problems. In the Aastra Communication Assistant Configuration utility, enter the link to an information page in the User defined information page edit box. When it is defined, a link entitled "Having trouble logging on?" appears on the Logon page. Default language Administrator can choose the default language. This language will be used for the ACA pages without logging on and first time logon. User can choose his/her own desired language after logging on. The selected language will be the language used each time you log on. The language is set to English by default. Show diversion notes This feature allows ACA users to view diversion notes, if available. It is off by default. EMG is installed and Personal Number is used ACA personal number features is handled by the backend EMG process. Do not turn on this feature unless EMG is installed on the D.N.A. Server and personal number feature is used. Otherwise, the ACA logon process will be slowed. If this feature is on, refer to Configuration for Personal Number access. Internal directory name Administrator can define the preferred directory name for Local D.N.A. internal directory. This name will be used for Directory drop-down list for search. External directory name Administrator can define the preferred directory name for Local D.N.A. external directory. This name will be used for Directory drop-down list for search. Personal Directory ACA supports personal contact search for Outlook only. If Personal Directory is set to none, personal contact will not be available in the Directory drop-down list.
279
Configuration
Configuration for Personal Number access

The Personal Number feature is supported via backend Extension Manager to send MML command to the appropriate PBX. The backend EMG runs under a fixed D.N.A. user SYSTEM, on the D.N.A. server. To create a SYSTEM user Run the D.N.A. User Configuration Utility to create user ID SYSTEM with password SYSTEM (capitalized, as shown). Grant Extension Manager privilege to System account. Select Extension Manager from the applications drop-down list, then select the PBX node from the Element drop-down list, select Access from the privilege drop-down list, and then select Full from Settings drop-down list. Note: The following Registry value is created by ACC Server installation on the ACC server: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECC\CurrentVersion\EmgAndPersonalNumber with REG_SZ type, and default value = 0. The user has to change this value to 1 to enable Personal Number feature for ACC.
To test EMG communication with PBX It is important to make sure EMG, running on the D.N.A. server, can connect with the node(s) on the ACA Server. Launch EMG and logon with SYSTEM Setup Communications and connect to all the nodes grant to System account Note: If a user credential, such as NIU Login User Name and Exchange Password, for connecting to a node from MD Support is changed, it is mandatory to connect to the node and synchronize at least one feature. Close all ACA and ACC clients and make sure that EMG is not running in Task Manager on the DNA server. Launch ACA and ACC clients and make sure that EMG is launched in Task Manager on the DNA server.
Configuration for IP Service to use HTTPS

If SSL security is used for ACA, you can also make IP Service to use HTTPS instead of HTTP. Please be aware that enforcing SSL has no impact to call handling features. There are two Registry settings used by IP Service to determine if SSL is enforced or not. HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECA\IPService\UserSSL DWORD 1 This value is used to determine if SSL is enforced and send with HTTPS HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECA\IPService\PortToIIS DWORD 443 This value is used to determine which port to use
Personal Contact Search

ACA Personal Contact search supports multiple Exchange servers.
280
Configuration
To support Personal Contact search, Aastra Communication Assistant uses WebDAV protocol to interface with an Exchange Server. Currently the versions of Exchange Server which support WebDAV protocol are 2000 and 2003. This means that Personal Contact search is only supported on 2000 and 2003 versions of Exchange Server. By default, Exchange Server 2000 and 2003 installs a default HTTP Virtual server which provides support for WebDAV. However, you should ensure that default HTTP server is installed before using this search feature. The existence of IIS virtual directory Exchange confirms that the default HTTP server is installed. HTTPS connection with the Outlook Personal Contact search integration using WebDAV on the Exchange Server is not supported. The Office version on the ACA server must be Office 2000. In addition, MSXML 4.0 SP2 needs to be installed on the ACA Server to perform the Personal Contact search from ACA. By default on Windows 2003 server, the Internet Enhanced Security Configuration option is on, this security feature must be turned off on the ACA Server if installed on Windows 2003 server.
To configure interface parameters with Outlook

Each individual Aastra Communication Assistant user must configure his / her "Personal Options" settings to make the searching of Outlooks personal contacts work. For an end user it can be quite tricky to get all this information correct. The recommended practice is that the Aastra Communication Assistant administrator provides this information to each user in some way before the users first logon attempt. Look at the following illustration.
281
Configuration
The following parameters must be entered on the Aastra Communication Assistant Personal Options page in order to perform Personal Contact search: Exchange Server Domain name NT User name and password Exchange Mailbox: To know exact mailbox name, logon to Outlook Web Access, and place your mouse pointer over the Inbox icon. The Exchange Server Mailbox will be shown in the URL displayed in the status bar between "http://ExchangeServerName/exchange/" and "/Inbox/" folder." Exchange Server name
Procedure for configuring the above parameters 1) Create a Windows User account in the domain of the Exchange server. 2) Create an Exchange mailbox for that user. 3) Configure the Outlook client to work properly on the ACA server (The Outlook client does not need to be logged on at all times, only enabled and configured so the MAPI client can be used later on when searching). 4) Install CDO: Verify/Install the "Collaboration Data Objects" feature under the Microsoft Outlook. (This can be done using Add/Remove Programs). 5) Configure the ACA server's DNS settings to also point towards the Domain Controller where ACA server is joined. This allows "ACAuser" (created for use with the COM object) to be added to the Local Security Policy. 6) Enable the Personal Contact option in the ACA Configuration. 7) After everything is installed and configured, reboot the ACA server. The administrator of Aastra Communication Assistant has several options as to how to communicate this information to the end users. The administrator can just send an email containing the following information: Aastra Communication Assistant login name and password Exchange users domain name:The domain where the Exchange server is located NT username and password:The domain user in the Exchange server domain and the domain users password Exchange mailbox: Either the Display Name or Alias of the Exchange users mailbox, connected to the domain user Exchange Server name:The Exchange server machine name After the parameters have been set, end-users can search contacts by performing the following: 1) Click the Update button. 2) Go to the Search Page, select and search for the Contacts.
282
Configuration
Aastra Communication Client

ACC Port Usage
ACC uses the following ports by default for H.323 telephony communication. Note that it is possible to modify the default values during ACC Server installation, by modifying the Ecc.cfg configuration file. Reference the ACC Installation section for more details. H.323 Call Control 1719 (for Gatekeeper registration and status, using UDP) 1720 (for call signalling, using TCP/IP) 9200 (for ESSP communication with the MD110, using UDP) 2326 to 2444 (for RTP packets, using UDP) 2327 to 2445 (for RTCP packets, using UDP)
H.323 Media Data
H.323 Gatekeeper Discovery 1718 (using UDP)
Changing the default language setting for ACC

ACC will automatically detect the Regional Setting configured by Windows and load the appropriate language file based on that setting. All language files are installed by default with ACC, so no additional installation is necessary to switch to another language. To change the language in Windows, select the Regional Options applet from the Windows Control Panel. Select the desired language, and press OK. Restart ACC. It will automatically load the selected language, if supported.
Using ACC with a Virtual Private Network (VPN)

The following information is for connecting ACC to the PBX Gatekeeper via a Virtual Private Network, for remote users. There are three scenarios: Case 1: The VPN does not use Network Address Translation (NAT) In this case, the IP address assigned by the VPN client is set as the machine IP address. In this case, initialization of the H.323 interface and registration with the PBX gatekeeper is done with the VPN IP Address. No further input is necessary. Case 2: The VPN uses Network Address Translation (NAT) In this case, the IP address assigned by the VPN client is not set as the machine IP address. Initialization of the H.323 interface must be done with the original machine IP address, but registration with the PBX gatekeeper must be done with the VPN IP address. To handle this case, check the box "Using VPN with Network Address Translation (NAT)" in the Network property page of the ACC Setup property sheet. If the IP address assigned by the VPN provider is known, it can be entered in the VPN Client Address field. If the complete IP address is not known, the first two or three octets can be entered.
283
Configuration
When ACC attempts to register with the gatekeeper, it will use the IP address entered in the VPN Client Address field. If registration fails, the ACC user will be prompted to enter the IP address assigned by the VPN provider. The prompt will display the IP address entered in the VPN Client Address field by default, so the user can just edit this field to enter the correct address. To avoid waiting for a registration timeout, you can check the box "Always Prompt for VPN Address." In this case, ACC will display the prompt for the IP address immediately, before attempting to register with the gatekeeper. Case 3: The VPN uses Tunneling via the WAN In this case, the IP address assigned by the VPN is bound to the network card, so there are two IP addresses displayed when using the command "ipconfig", the original machine IP address and the VPN IP address. In this case, the H.323 interface must be initialized with the VPN IP address. To handle this case, make sure you select the WAN address in the Network tab of the Settings options. Select the WAN address from the "Use Selected Network Adapter" drop-down list.
Monitor Feature Access for ACC

The Monitor feature is only available to the users with the proper access rights. The Monitor menu item in ACC will be disabled if the user does not have the access rights. Set up the access rights as described in the following section.
D.N.A. User Configuration

From the D.N.A. User Configuration Utility, enter the User ID of the account to which you want to add permission for the Monitor feature. Select Aastra Communication Client from the drop-down list of applications, then select Monitor from the list of privileges and set Allow from the drop-down list of settings. Note: The User ID entered in the D.N.A. User Configuration Utility must be the USER ID UDF defined for ACC (see the section User ID and Password for ACA, ACC, and DME for more details). This is the User ID that is used to logon to ACC. Also note that the User ID entered in the D.N.A. User Configuration Utility is case sensitive, so it must be entered in the same case as it is defined in Directory Manager.
Restricting Display of External Numbers

By default, when a monitored subscriber makes or receives a call to or from an external party, the number of the external party will not be displayed in the "Other Party" field of the Monitor dialog box. This is for privacy reasons. To override this, and display the external party's number (when available), you must add the following Registry value, and set it to 1:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ECC\CurrentVersion\Display
Type:
DWORD
Value: 1 to enable display of external parties Note: This Registry value is not created by default, to avoid legal issues in exposing this feature to end users.
284
Configuration
User ID and Password for ACA, ACC, and DME

Both USER ID and USER PASSWORD are used for ACA, ACC, and DME. If you change a user ID or a user password it will reflect on all applications.
D.N.A. Directory Configuration

In the Profile tab, add a Data Type called "USER ID" with the desired Field Name. Making the user ID Searchable is optional. If set as searchable, it will be available for search in ACA. In the Confidential UDF tab, add a Data Type called "USER PASSWORD" with the desired Field Name.
D.N.A. Directory Manager

From the main display, select the desired user and bring up the View/Update Subscriber dialog box. In the Profile tab, enter the user ID in the predefined USER ID field. In the UDFs tab, enter the user password in the predefined USER PASSWORD field.
User ID
When creating a User ID, Profile, Person, and Confidential UDF can be used. Confidential UDFs are the only ones that can be excluded when exporting directory data via batch mode. The USER ID field is also used for other D.N.A. applications. The D.N.A. Outlook Integration (DOI) and D.N.A. Notes Integration (DNI) are using the data type to validate the Windows user with a subscriber. They can also use COMPUTER name (which is the default) to validate the subscriber. DOI and DNI are used to send message diversion information between the users Calendar and D.N.A.
Password
When creating a password, the Confidential UDF is recommended but Profile and Person UDF can also be used. Confidential UDFs are the only ones that can be excluded when exporting directory data via batch mode. Since user passwords are stored as plaintext in the database, they become visible in the export file when defined as Profile or Person UDF.
Improving the Performance of OWS
1. Run LDS on the OWS PC. This helps RDS synchronize the directory replications locally to the OWS. Use the following procedure to install LDS. Note that you must have logged in with a Windows administrator account to be able to perform the first step successfully. 1. Run the Windows Control Panel and start Services. Set the "StartUp" of the LDS entry to Automatic. Then start the LDS Windows service.
285
Configuration
2. Run LDS Configuration Utility from the D.N.A._C\SHARE\BIN directory and configure the LDS Replication Subscription and Publication items as you have done in RDS Configuration Utility when configuring the D.N.A. server. 3. Run the Registry Editor (REGEDT32.EXE) on the OWS client, and modify the following Registry key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\LocalDS\LDSServerName and. set this key to the client computer name that the LDS service and OWS is running on. Also modify HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\LocalDS\UseLDS and set this key to 1. This will force OWS to connect to LDS on the client OWS PC rather than on the SP D.N.A. Server. Now the OWS is ready to use LDS.
E-mail Integration
The Operator Workstation (OWS) application, which is a part of the Dynamic Network Administration (D.N.A.) suite, enables operators to take messages and deliver them via electronic mail systems. Operator Workstation employs Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) functions for preparing and sending messages. Operator Workstation can obtain e-mail addresses from an external messaging system or from the D.N.A. subscriber database. Due to the variety of e-mail systems and their associated security requirements, a number of factors can prevent Operator Workstation from sending e-mail. It is the intent of this document to explain the requirements that must be met for successful integration of e-mail with Operator Workstation.
Operator Workstation E-mail Requirements

Operator Workstation will send e-mail when it can: Load the MAPI library Perform a null logon Obtain an e-mail address Loading the MAPI library Operator Workstation can load the MAPI library if a MAPI-compatible e-mail system has been installed. Microsoft Mail from Windows and Microsoft Exchange satisfy this requirement. Look for C:\WINNT\system32\mapi32.dll, or use the Task Manager to determine if the MAPISP32.EXE process is running. There may be other MAPI-compatible e-mail systems, but they have not been tested. Performing a Null Logon A Windows user ID and password may (or may not) be needed to make a network connection to the work group post office. (If the connection is mapped in the Windows Explorer, be sure to check the "Reconnect at Logon" box.) The most reliable way of getting the Operator Workstation MAPI logon to succeed is to assign the same user ID to all the accounts an individual operator will use and to start the e-mail client program before Operator Workstation.
286
Chapter 16 VSI and TSS

Voice System Interface
VSI is an ASCII protocol used to establish the serial (RS232) communication between the D.N.A. Serial Communications Server (SCS) and the Host connection of the Integrated Voice Response System (or IVR system). The VSI retrieves or updates Operator Workstation messages and message diversions. This level of integration between Operator Workstation allows Message Diversion Reason and Return Times to be presented by the IVR, without operator intervention.
Setting Up Communications and Configuration Parameters

The VSI user interface allows the system administrator to setup configuration parameters necessary for VSI to establish connections with the IVR (Voice) System. The user interface is similar to that of the Serial Communications Server (SCS) utility. VSI supports a protocol similar to that of TSS or GICI. In the D.N.A. system, subscribers VSI number and/or TSS number should be entered through the UDF fields. In order to have these fields visible in the users UDF tab, you must define those fields via Directory Configuration under the Person UDF tab.
The VSI Protocol

As with GICI and TSS, the STX and CR LF characters are used, respectively, for triggering and ending message packages. STX CR LF 0 MMMM RRR T Start of Text Carriage Return Line Feed End of text msg Voice Mailbox Number Diversion Reason Diversion Type ASCII 02 ASCII 13 ASCII 10 ASCII 48 1-10 characters 000-999 0 - Non Passive (Divert Phone)
287
VSI and TTS
1 - Passive (Do Not Divert Phone) SSSS Start date/time* 12 character format (YYMMDDHHMMSS) 12 character format (YYMMDDHHMMSS) 00-99 00-80 0-160 characters 0-9 2-5 characters 00-99 ASCII 49 000-999 ASCII 32-127
EEEE
End date/time*
DD KK TEXT V XX NN 1 PPP Y
Record ID Length of Message text Message text** Voice Reason *** Terminal number Number of msgs/div. First part of text msg PBX Node ID Check Sum Byte****
* If the Start and End date/time contains YYMMDD000000 then only the date is specified. If it contains 000000HHMMSS then only the time is specified. If it contains 000000000000 then the default or indefinite date/time is specified. ** Even though the message text maximum is 160 characters, Max field length VoiceDesigner can handle 132 characters. Long messages must therefore be split into two parts. Max (actual) text in one message is 80 characters. *** 0 = Unknown, 1 = Message Diversion, 2 = Direct forwarding, 3 = Busy, 4 = No answer. These values are configured using VSI Configuration Utility. **** This is the 7-bit arithmetic sum of all the bytes in the message, disregarding the checksum and the final CR and LF. If the sum is smaller than 20H (32 Decimal), then 20H is added to it. All messages sent between VSI Service and the receiver should acknowledge the Voice System. An ACK (06H) must be sent if the received message is correct. A NAK (15H) must be sent if the received message is invalid due to incorrect checksum or missing the end code (i.e., CR LF). In the event the sender did not receive an acknowledgement message within 5 seconds, the sender re-transmits the message.
288
VSI and TTS
Sending of acknowledge messages can be deactivated by using the VSI Configuration Utility. For the VSI protocol, it is required that all parts of each message type are included in order to be acknowledged by the Voice System Interface. The EMDIP protocol (Extended Message Diversion Interface Protocol) is optionally available. If selected, VSI will generate a heartbeat event to the client at 2 minute intervals. The client application is responsible for checking the heartbeat event, but it does not send a response. If two consecutive heartbeat events are missed, the client application should close the current connection and attempt to reestablish a new connection with the server. If the server is shut down normally, the client should receive a server down notification. An abnormal server shutdown (e.g., power loss) will result in the client application closing the connection and attempting a new connection with the server, as described earlier (i.e., after two consecutive heartbeat events have been missed). All messages sent between VSI Service and the Voice System include a checksum byte. The VSI service can disregard the checksum byte if the checksum option is deactivated using the VSI Configuration Utility. Calculating the checksum is done by a 7-bit arithmetic sum of all the bytes in the message disregarding the checksum and the final CR and LF. If the sum is smaller than 20H (32 Decimal), then 20H is added to it. Following is a C-language example to calculate the checksum. int checksum(str, len) char *str; int len; { int sum = 0; while (len-- > 0) sum += *str++; sum &= 0x7f; if (sum < 0x20) sum += 0x20; return (sum); }
Capacities and Limitations

It must be possible to setup communication through at least 4 ports simultaneously towards a single voice system. This enables multiple Voice System callers to simultaneously access D.N.A. services. Note that this capacity may be increased in the future. Also note that more than one voice system may be connected in future releases. In this first version, handling of one Voice System only can be enough. Configuration settings for baud rate, COM port, SCS port etc. should be the same as for the Time System Server (TSS).
289
VSI and TTS
Time System Server

D.N.A. Time System Server (TSS) is an optional D.N.A. service module that connects to an external time monitoring system. TSI allows diversions to be entered in the time monitoring system, transferred to the D.N.A. Directory Manager application, and registered in the D.N.A. Directory database. As well, Message Waiting (MWT) indications can be sent from D.N.A. to the time monitoring system.
Interface
The time monitoring system is connected to a V.24 (RS-232C) port directly on to D.N.A. Server. Several time monitoring systems can be connected to D.N.A. at once. D.N.A. Time System Interface Module can be configured for 256 connections of each protocol type. In practice, the maximum number of connections is limited to the customer's Windows configuration.
Logical Interface
The logical interface between D.N.A. and the various time monitoring systems is defined in CCITT's Rec. V.24. The protocol is defined by a number of signals sent between the time monitoring system and D.N.A. Time System Interface. These signals are composed of a group of characters, each consisting of one start bit, seven to eight information bits, one parity bit, and one stop bit. The information bits are to be coded in accordance with ASCII. Baud rate, seven/eight information bits, parity, XON/XOFF and modem control are selectable.
Protocols
Five different protocols can be applied to the D.N.A. Time System Interface: CTR, GENERAL, FLEXIM, ESMI, and TIMECON. The protocols are grouped into different protocol families: CTR, GENERAL, and TIMECON belong to group 1 and FLEXIM and ESMI belongs to group 2. Asynchronous RS-232C, 8 data bits, no parity, transfer rate select able. The character code is 7 bit ASCII, with the Finnish special characters code as follows:
Finnish Character Coding

{ 7B hex - 7C hex } 7D hex [ 5B hex \ 5C hex ] 5D hex
Message Format
<STX><message type><data><BCC><CR><LF> STX = 02H, Start of message message type = A char which determines how the rest of the message should be interpreted. data = Data space
290
VSI and TTS
BCC = The 7-bit arithmetic sum of all the bytes in the message disregarding the checksum itself and the final CR. If the sum is smaller than 20H (32 dec), then 20H is added to it. CR = End of message LF = Optional
FLEXIM Protocol
The phone switch operator has a FLEXIM info terminal. FLEXIM sends a message to the D.N.A. Time System Interface each time a person logs in or out using his card. The message contains that person's id information (card number, phone number or personal id-number) and in addition the return time (if known), the login/logout time (optional 1) and the validation time (optional 2). The D.N.A. Time System Interface tells FLEXIM if any person has a call request or some other message. The next time such a person logs in or out, this message will be displayed on the FLEXIM console in plain text form in addition to the time and date when it was entered. A person can have multiple messages in the system at the same time - when the login or logout is completed, all read messages are deleted from the system. A message may contain a maximum of ten 16-character lines. In addition, FLEXIM sends Time Sync messages to the D.N.A. Time System Interface. Either end can initiate data transfer. All messages are acknowledged as either correct or faulty. There are two kinds of fault acknowledgement messages: frame error and message error. Frame error means that the receiver has gotten the beginning code of the message but not the end code, or that the checksum is wrong. The sender must send the message again. Message error means the receiver has received a message that has a correct length and a correct checksum, but which contains an invalid message. The sender writes an entry about the faulty message in its own log file and continues by sending the next message in line (if any). The faulty message is not retransmitted. When the FLEXIM send program starts it first sends the status information of all the people in the system to the receiving end, regardless of what data has been previously transmitted. In the event of a frame error (see above), message retransmitting is attempted until midnight. If the frame error persists after 00:00 the message is discarded and the system revert back to sending all of the system status information from the beginning. The same situation forms in the event of a takeout. The system waits 5 seconds for an acknowledgement message before retrying. When the status information for all the people in the system has been successfully sent the program starts sending information on logouts and logins from the program starting time onwards.
Messages sent from FLEXIM to D.N.A. Time System Interface

Login/logout message STX = Start of message X = Reason code
291
VSI and TTS
TAB = Field separator
X = Phone number / Card number / ID number (field length 1-11,bytes) TAB X = Other Reason code (length 0-3 bytes) TAB
DDMM = Return date (4 bytes if specified, otherwise 0) TAB
HHMM = Return time (4 bytes if specified, otherwise 0) TAB DDMM = Login/logout date (optional') TAB HHMM = Login/logout time (optional 1) TAB DDMM = Validation date (optional 2) TAB HHMM = Validation time (optional2) BCC = Checksum CR = End of message LF Optional 1: Configurable when the system is installed. Optional 2: Configurable when the system is installed, contains option I. 2 In 3 Ou t 4 Trip in 5 Trip ou t 6 Va ca t io n o ut 7 S ick o ut 8 Ove rt ime ou t 9 Ot he r Re a so n in 0 Ot he r Re a so n ou t a Lu nch ou t
Reason Code
292
VSI and TTS
Other Reason is a customer-specified function. Pressing a number and the "Other Reason" key on the FLEXIM terminal uses it. This results in either `0' (In) or `9' (Out) being passed to the info system, with the other reason number (`0' ... `199') in the Other Reason field of the message. Return date/time is not checked by the system, it is always sent exactly in the form that the user types it in - it is possible to leave incomplete or impossible return times. The return time must be in numeric form. However, in the FLEXIM system the login/logout information and the return date/time information are given separately, so when the user specifies a return date the D.N.A. Time System Interface receives two messages with the same reason code. The second of these contains the return date/time information. Login/logout time, when sent, is always some time of the on going day. The information is not necessarily sent in a chronological order, however. Validation date/time comes into play when the so-called "double login/logout" feature of the system is in use, in which the user gives information of a future event using the FLEXIM terminal (for example: "Working overtime today, on a trip tomorrow". The validation field gives the time when the second event becomes valid. In a double-login/logout situation, the D.N.A. Time System Interface may receive up to three consecutive "logout" messages for the same person. A logout message-without a validation time or a return time, for example a simple "Out." A message with a double-log field, for example "Trip" with a validation time and date of 8:00 AM the next morning. A message with all of the information in the previous case and the addition of a return time/date field. The interval between these messages may be several minutes, and messages from other people may occur between them, naturally. Examples No rma l L og in <S TX > 2 <TA B > 1 50 34 91 15 E <TA B > <TA B > <TA B > <CR> No rma l L og ou t <S TX > 3 <TA B > 1 50 34 91 15 E <TA B > <TA B > <TA B > <CR> Trip I n <S TX > 4 <TA B > 12 3 <TA B > <TA B > <TA B > <CR> Trip O ut + re t u rn t ime <S TX > 5 <TA B > 1 24 <TA B > <TA B > 15 07 <TA B > 1 53 0 <CR> Trip O ut + re t u rn + lo g t ime <S TX > 5 <TAB > 12 4 <TA B > <TA B > 1 50 7 <TA B > 1 53 0 <TA B > 1 30 7 <TAB > 13 00 <CR> Trip O ut + re t u rn + lo g + va lid a t ion <S TX > 5 <TA B > 1 24 <TA B > <TA B > 1 50 7 <TA B > 1 53 0 <TA B > 1 30 7 <TAB > 13 00 <TAB > <14 07 > <TA B > 0 80 0 <CR> V a ca t ion + re tu rn t ime <S TX > 6 <TA B > 1 25 6 <TA B > <TA B > 1 30 5 <TA B > 0 80 0 <CR> S ick + re tu rn t ime <S TX > 7 <TA B > 1 11 5 <TA B > <TA B > 1 40 5 <TA B > 0 63 0 <CR> O ve rt ime Ou t <S TX > 8 <TA B > 11 15 <TA B > <TA B > <TA B > <CR> O th e r Rea so n + co de + re tu rn <S TX > 0 <TA B > 1 50 3 <TAB > 2 <TA B > 3 05 <TA B > 12 00 <CR>
293
VSI and TTS
O th e r Rea so n + co de (I n ) <S TX > 9 <TA B > 8 90 <TAB > 3 <TA B > <TA B > <CR> Absence deactivate registration STX = Start of message X = Reason code (2 or 4 or 9) TAB X = Card number TAB TAB TAB TAB TAB BCC = One byte checksum CR = End of message D.N.A. has only one absent code while FLEXIM has many. Because of this, the field F sent from FLEXIM with the values 2, 4 or 9 are translated by D.N.A. as deactivate absence. It will delete corresponding diversion in D.N.A. that previously was created by the time system diversion originator. Diversions that were created by other diversion originators will only be deactivated. Absence activate registration: The same as login message. Reason code sent from FLEXIM with the values 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, A or B will all be translated by D.N.A. Time System Interface as activate absence. It will create a diversion for the corresponding subscriber. The D.N.A. Time System Interface absent code that will be used for the diversion will be defined by the configuration command TRANS. Since not all fields in a message are required, a message can be composed in several different ways. See the following examples: <S TX > 2 <TAB > 11 99 9 <TA B > <TA B > <TA B > <CR> Deactivate absence for card number 11999. Note three is the minimum number of < TAB> after the card number, even if the message does not contain any more information after the card number. <S TX > 3 <TAB > 23 56 <TA B > <TA B > 03 12 <TA B > 14 45 Activate absence for card number 2356 with return date and time 3 December 14:45. Reason code 3 will be translated to corresponding D.N.A. Time System Interface absent code and assigned to the diversion. <S TX > 0 <TAB > 44 55 77 <TA B > <X > <TA B > 2 80 6 <TA B > <TA B > 2 10 6 <TA B > 0 73 2 <CR> Activate absence for card number 445577 with return date 28 June and from date and time 21 June 07:32. Other reason code <X> will be translated to corresponding D.N.A. absent code and assigned to the diversion. Time Sync messages STX = Start of message K = `K' is the Time Sync message type TAB
294
VSI and TTS
YYMMDDHHMMSS = Date and time (12 bytes) BCC = Checksum CR = End of message If the D.N.A. Time System Interface does not respond to a Time Sync message, it is not resent. If the D.N.A. Time System Interface responds with a frame error, the sending of the message is retried (max. three times). FLEXIM message acknowledgements Correct: <STX> <A> TAB <id field, as in message> <CR> Message Error: <STX> <N> <CR> Frame Error: <STX> <E> <CR> Note: As has been said before, a "Frame Error" message is sent only in case of an error in the message frame (Start/End codes or checksum). A message with a correct frame but bad contents is acknowledged with a "Message Error" message. If no acknowledgement is received, the message is resent. Retries continue until midnight, at which time a "line down" condition is logged and all status info is resent. The status info is resent until successful, after which normal sending of login/logout messages is resumed.
Messages sent from D.N.A. Time System Interface to FLEXIM

Call requests STX = Start of message S = `S' is the Call Request message type TAB X = Personal ID field (1-10 chars) ' ' = SPACE (optional 3) MMDDHHMM = Request ID (optional 3) TAB message = The message body, max. 16 chars TAB message = A second message (mix. 10 messages) etc. BCC = Checksum CR = End of message Optional 3: Configurable when the system is installed The Request ID is equal to the time and date that the message was entered into the system. Using this field, the D.N.A. Time System Interface can sends messages that have an entry time that is different from the current (real) time. The default if to consider the entry time to be the current real time if this field is missing.
295
VSI and TTS
Removal of messages STX = Start of message P = `P' is the Remove Message type TAB X = Personal ID and optional Message ID as in the Call Request message BCC = Checksum CR = End of message This message causes the removal of all call requests for the given person from the FLEXIM system. If a Message ID is specified, only matching messages are removed. Removal of all messages STX = Start of message P = Remove Message -field type BCC = Checksum CR = End of message This message causes the removal of all call requests sent by the D.N.A. Time System Interface from the FLEXIM system. Init request STX = Start of message I = `I' is the Init Request message type CR = End of message The FLEXIM system acknowledges the message and sends the status of all the people in the system to the info system. D.N.A. Time System Interface message acknowledgements As FLEXIM.
How DNA Handles Date and Time from FLEXIM

In DNA, diversions from the FLEXIM time system is set based on the date and time (Login\Logout, Validation and Return times) sent to it. If the date and time sent are within the past 1day from the current date and time of DNA, then it is considered as past. Otherwise, it is considered as in the future which means next year. DNA does further calculation to determine the end time of the activity to be scheduled. This is based on the whether Validation date and time are sent or not. If Validation time is sent, then the end time is compared with Validation date and time and if it is less, then the end time will be next year. Otherwise the end time is compared with Login date and time and if it is less, then the end time will be next year. For example, assume the current date of the DNA server is 10/08/2006 (dd/mm/yyyy) and the time is 12:00PM: Past activity: If FLEXIM sends the following login and return date and time, 09/08(dd/mm) 01:00PM and 11/08(dd/mm) 08:30AM, DNA considers it
296
VSI and TTS
as the past and schedules a current activity with start time as 09/08/2006 01:00PM and end time as 11/08/2006 08:30AM. Future activity: If the login and return date and time are 08/08(dd/mm) 12:00PM and 09/08(dd/mm) 08:30AM, then this will be scheduled as the future activity by DNA with start time as 08/08/2007 12:00PM to end time 09/08/2007 08:30AM.
General Protocol
Data messages exchanged between D.N.A. Time System Interface and the time monitoring system are composed by ASCII coded characters. The messages are composed of the following fields
Login/logout message
STX = Start of message X = Message type (B or C or D) X = Card number (field length 1-11,bytes) X = Reason code (A-Z, a-z) X = Ignored data (field length 1 byte) X = Return time (the length is depending on the message types ) X = Message waiting indication ETX = Start text BCC = Checksum <STX> Start of Text - A one byte ASCII code denoting the start position of the text. Each message will start with the STX field. Message type - A one-character message type with the value B, C or D. D.N.A. Time System Interface will ignore messages with other message types. The ignored message will also be acknowledged with ACK. Card Number - A unique card number that can be up to ten alphanumeric characters long. Normally this field is set to any number in the range 1 to 9999999999 that is then translated to a subscriber in D.N.A.. The length of the card number is configured at installation. Card number length will be defined by the configuration command CARD. Reason Code - A one-character absent reason code (A-Z, a-z). The translation table for D.N.A. absence codes will be defined by the configuration command TRANS. Ignored data - A one-character long data field ignored by D.N.A. Time Information System. (Could hold any value). Return Time - A four character long number giving the time of return for message type C. This field becomes a six plus four character long number for message type D. See further description of message type D. Interpretation depends on absent reason code given. (DDMM = Day and month. HHMM = Hour and minute.) Message Waiting Indication - A one character long data field specifying if message-waiting indication should be activated or deactivated. <ETX> Start text - A one byte with ASCII character ETX. Each message will start with ETX.
297
VSI and TTS
BCC Checksum - A one-byte check character. The check character is calculated as an XQR sum of all characters from F up to and including <ETX> (<STX> is not included). All messages sent between D.N.A. Time System Interface and the time monitoring system should be acknowledged by the receiver. An ACK must be sent if the received message is correct. A NAK (H15) must be sent if the received message is invalid. Sending acknowledge messages can be deactivated by using the configuration command ACK. For the General protocol it is required that all parts of each message type are included in order to be acknowledged by the D.N.A. Time System Interface.
Messages sent from General Time Monitoring System to Time System Interface
Arrival and Gone Out Registration STX = Start of message B = Message type is set to B X = Card number (field length 1-11,bytes) X = Reason code (A-Z, a-z), lowercase: arrival, upper case: gone out X = Ignored data (field length 1 byte) ETX = Start text BCC = Checksum If the absent reason code is a lower case character, the message is considered to be an arrival message. In this case, D.N.A. Time System Interface deletes all old diversions created from the time monitoring system and deactivates all other active diversions. If the absent reason code is an upper case character, the message is considered to be a gone out registration. D.N.A. Time System Interface creates a diversion with the given absent reason code and a default return time. Example: <STX>B1234a <ETX>? An arrival message (lowercase a), for card number 1234. (The check character is not calculated correct in the example.) Gone Out Registration STX = Start of message C = Message type is set to C X = Card number (field length 1-11,bytes) X = Reason code (A-Z, a-z). absent reason code. X = Ignored data (field length 1 byte) TTTT = Return time (DDMM or HHMM: 4 bytes if specified, otherwise 0) ETX = Start text BCC = Checksum
298
VSI and TTS
This message is always a gone out registration. D.N.A. Time System Interface creates a diversion with the given absent reason code and the return time that is specified. Depending on the absent reason code, the TTTT is interpreted either as a time (HHMM = Hour and Minute) or as a date (DDMM = Day and Month). For the time format D.N.A. Time System Interface will use a default date to create a complete return time. For the date format D.N.A. Time System Interface will use a default time when creating the complete return time. The connection between a certain absent reason code and a time/date format is defined during installation. Gone Out Registration STX = Start of message D = Message type is set to D X = Card number (field length 1-11,bytes) A = Reason code (A-Z, a-z) X = Ignored data (field length 1 byte) DDMMYYHHMM = Return time (the length is 10) ETX = Start text BCC = Checksum This message is always a gone out registration. D.N.A. Time System Interface creates a diversion with the given absent reason code and the return time that is specified. The return time can contain both information about date (DDMMYY) and time (HHMM). If DDMMYY has the value 000000 then no return date is included. D.N.A. Time System Interface will then use the default date for the current absent code. IF HHMM has the value "0000 then no return time is included. D.N.A. Time System Interface will then use the default time. The connection between a certain absent reason code and a default return date/time is defined during installation.
Messages sent from Time System Interface to General Time Monitoring System
Message Waiting Indication STX = Start of message C = Message type is set to C X = Card number (field length 1-11,bytes) M = Set to A if activate, set to B if deactivate ETX = Start text BCC = Checksum To activate the message waiting, the M character is set to "A". To deactivate the message waiting, the M character is set to "B". Using the configuration command WAIT can deactivate sending of the Message waiting indication.
CTR Protocol
Data messages exchanged between D.N.A. Time System Interface and the CTR Time Monitoring System are composed of ASCII coded characters. The messages are composed of the following fields:
299
VSI and TTS
STX = Start of message X = Message type ( 2 digits from 65 to 71) X = Card number X = Absent reason code (0~9) X = Return time (MMDD or HHMM) CR LF <STX> Start Text - A one-byte field with the ASCII character STX. Each message will start with STX. Card Number - A four-character long card number. ("0000"-"9999") Card number length is usually defined by the configuration command CARD, but for the CTR system, the card number length is fixed to 4. Absent Reason Code - A one character absent reason code ("0"-"9"). Translation table for D.N.A. absence codes will be defined by the configuration command TRANS. Return Time - A four character long number giving the return time. HHMM (MMDD = Month and day, HHMM = Hour and minute.) <CR> Carriage Return - A one-byte field with the ASCII character CR. <LF> LF - A one-byte field with the ASCII character LF. Each message sent from the CTR system will end with the combination <CR> <LF>. For the CTR protocol, it is required that all fields of each message are included in order to be acknowledge by the D.N.A. Time System Interface.
Messages sent from the CTR Time Monitoring System to D.N.A.

Arrival Registration (entering office) Upon receiving this message from the CTR system, D.N.A. Time System Interface deletes all time monitoring system diversions and deactivates all other active diversions for the given card number. STX = Start of message 65 = Message type is set to 65 X = Card number CR LF Example: <stx>654444<cr><lf> where card number = 4444 Used to clear diversions for this TSI card. Gone Out Registrations (leaving office) Upon receiving this message from the CTR system, D.N.A. Time System Interface will create a diversion with a default absent reason code and a default return time for the given card number. STX = Start of message 66 = Message type is set to 66 X = Card number CR
300
VSI and TTS
LF Example: <stx>664444<cr><lf> where card number = 4444 Set diversion using the default diversion specified in TSS Configuration. In this case, D.N.A. Time System Interface will create a diversion with the given absent reason code and a default return time. STX = Start of message 67 = Message type is set to 67 X = Card number A = Reason code CR LF Example: <stx>6744442<cr><lf> where card number = 4444 reason code = 2
Set diversion using the selected reason code and end time/duration specified in RDS Configuration. D.N.A. Time System Interface will in this case, update a previously created time monitoring system diversion with the specified return time. D.N.A. Time System Interface will use a default date to create a complete return time. D.N.A. Time System Interface will use the previously set end date, if provided, to create a complete return time. If there is no previous end date entered, then the default end date is used to create a complete return time. STX = Start of message 68 = Message type is set to 68 X = Card number HHMM = Return time (hours and minutes) CR LF Example 1: <stx>6844441830<cr><lf> where card number = 4444 return time = 1830 Update the endtime of the previously set diversion (e.g., 66 or 67) for this TSI card (to 18:30). Here the return date is the default return date associated with the diversion code Example 2: <stx>6944440625<cr><lf> <stx>6844441830<cr><lf> as configured in RDSSetup. If a previously set diversion has a end date (e.g. "69") then sending "68" will update the end time for this TSI card (to 18:30) keeping the end date (June 25) set with "69".
301
VSI and TTS
Update a previously created time monitoring system diversion with the specified return time. D.N.A. Time System Interface will use a default time to create a complete return time. D.N.A Time System Interface will use the previously set end time, if provided to create a complete return time. If there is no previous end time entered then the default end time is used to create a complete return time.
STX = Start of message 69 = Message type is set to 69 X = Card number MMDD = Return time (month and day) CR LF Example 1: <stx>6944440625<cr><lf> where card number = 4444
Update the end date of the previously set diversion (e.g. "66" or "67") for this TSI card (to June 25). Here the end time is the default end time associated with the diversion code as configured in RDSSetup Example 2: <stx>6844441830<cr><lf> <stx>6944440625<cr><lf> return time = 0625 If a previously set diversion has an end time (e.g. "68") then sending "69" will update the end date for this TSI card (to June 25) keeping the end time (18:30) as set with "68".
Messages sent from Time System Interface to CTR Time Monitoring System
Sending of these messages can be disabled in D.N.A. Time System Interface by using the configuration command WAIT. Deactivate Message Waiting Upon receipt of this message, D.N.A. Time System Interface will deactivate message waiting for card number X. STX = Start of message 70 = Message type is set to 70 X = Card number CR LF Activate Message Waiting D.N.A. Time System Interface will in this case, activate message waiting for card number X. STX = Start of message 71 = Message type is set to 71 X = Card number CR
302
VSI and TTS
LF
ESMI Protocol
The ESMI protocol is in the same protocol family as the FLEXIM protocol.
Messages sent from ESMI Time System To D.N.A. Time System Interface
The message format (absence codes): STX = Start of message X = Message type (2 or 3 or A or E) TAB X = Identification number (1 - 10 digits) TAB MS = Reason code for out (1-9: pre-defined. 10-63: free) TAB DDMM = Return date (0 to 4 digits) TAB HHMM = Return time (0 to 4 digits) BCC = Checksum CR Explanation of the records STX Start of message (= ASCII 2) X Message type: 2 = in, 3= out, A = reply message ok, E = reply message error TAB TAB-mark, works as a separator xxxxxx Identification number, Iength 1 - 10 digits MS Reason code for out (1-2 marks if given, otherwise 0 marks). Explanations used: 1=trip, 2=vacation, 3=sick, 4=health care, 5= business, 6=own, 7=overtime, 8=extended working time, 9=Iunch, 10...63 free codes DDMM The return date. 0-4 digits HHMM The return time. 0-4 digits. The date and time of return wouldn't be set if it is not known. BCC Checksum. CR Carriage-Return. In this case the separator won't send anything. Message will re-transmit after 5 S, if TS won't get any reply. Also if TS-system gets error message, re-transmit will be done. Re-transmit will be done only once. If the OK -reply won't come after this, system continues with a new message. Reason codes in TS-system (in case): All messages will be sent by "in" code. Out codes: - All reason codes will be in MS field. Others: Correction message will be sent from TS-system Reply from the TS-system to D.N.A. Time System Interface
303
VSI and TTS
Reply, if the message is OK STX = Start of message A = Message type is set to A TAB X = Identification number (1 - 10 digits) CR Reply, if there is an error in the message: STX = Start of message E = Message type is set to E CR
Messages sent from D.N.A. Time System Interface to ESMI Time System
TS-system terminal setting message: STX = Start of message S = Message type is set to S (S is TS-system message) TAB XXXXXX = Identification number (1 - 10 digits) TAB sss = Message contents TAB sss = Message contents TAB BCC = Checksum CR Explanation of the records STX Start of message (= ASCII 2) X Message type: S = TS terminal message, A = reply message ok, E = reply message error TAB TAB-mark, works as a separator XXXXXX Identification number, length 1 - 6(10) digits ss... s TS Terminal message contents, CR or TAB not included. A message can include up to 10 text rows. Since a message row in D.N.A. Time System Interface can be up to 40 characters, these rows will be divided into several text rows. Words longer than 20 characters will be truncated. Overall, length should not exceed 80 characters. Note: Only the first two ss.. .ss records will be approved as TS-system terminal message, others will not be handled. If ss... ss records are blanks, will the XXXXX persons TS terminal message be removed. BCC Checksum, will be counted by marks (including the STX-mark) sum mod 128, and if the sum is under 20H, there will be added 20H. CR Carriage-Return Reply from the D.N.A. Time System Interface to TS-system if the message is OK:
304
VSI and TTS
STX = Start of message A = Message type is set to A (A is OK) TAB XXXXXX = Identification number CR Reply, if there is an error in the message: STX = Start of message E = Message type is set to E (E is error) CR TSS systems checking and replies: Message should start with STX S TAB -marks and checking sum should be right, otherwise error in message -reply will be sent, In case: error in reply, TS-system won't send any error in message -reply.
TIMECON Protocol
Stamping Message
The stamping message type: "B" and "C", is equal to the stamping message into GENERAL-protocol. However the return time should be interpreted different than in GENERAL-protoco1 (see below).
Return Time
The return time unit is determined in the contents of this field. If position (3 & 4) is 01 - 12, it is treated as a date; otherwise as a time, this means that time contains minutes l to 60 and hours 1-24.
Clock Message
TIMECON has a message called clock message, the clock message is repeatedly sent from time system to TSS as an online check. TSS should answer with an <ACK> if this message is OK. STX = Start of message X = Message type (A or D or Z) HHMM = Time information YYMMDD = Date information EXT BCC = Checksum X - Message type is something else than "B" or "C" TSS algorithm: IF F in ("A", "D", "Z") THEN Intepret_Clock_Message HHMM - Time info HHMM TSS algorithm: IF ABS (HHMM - D.N.A. Time) > 5 min THEN Logg_Warning IF ABS (HHMM - D.N.A. Time) > 15 min THEN Logg_Error YYMMDD Date number starting with a value of 0001 from 76-01-01. TS-system algorithm: None, ignore this field
305
VSI and TTS
The time info from TSU will be check and logged as a Warning if it differs 5 - 15 minutes and an error will be logged if it differs more than 15 minutes, it should only log first time it receives a time zone outside D.N.A. time. It should be possible to change the range value for the invalid time zone, but it will default to 5 min and IS min.
Exchange Interface
The D.N.A. Interface is compatible towards the exchange from ASB50101 R6/1 and later releases of the exchange.
Message Types
There are two types of invalid messages. Frame error - This means that the receiver has received the beginning code of the message but not the end code, or that the checksum is wrong. The sender must send the message again. This is done when the receiver sends a NAK to the sender. Message error - The receiver has received a message that has a correct length and correct checksum, but which contains an invalid message. The receiver sends an ACK message to the sender and writes an entry about the faulty message in its own log file or Windows event log. The sender continues sending the next message in line (if any). The faulty message is not re-transmitted by the sender.
IVR/Voice System to VSI Messages

Show information about extension on Operator Workstation ID in Node Number because of Reason Text Action Request Show information about MMMM on Operator Workstation XX in node PPP because of W Command Example
STX 50 MMMM W XX STX 50 1234 1 99 001 Y CR PPP Y CR LF LF
Initiate Message Diversion Type for extension because of Reason from Start until End with Reason Text. Initiate Message Diversion Type for extension because of Reason from Start until End with Reason Text. Action Request Initiate diversion for MMMM because of RRR from SSSS until EEEE Command Example
STX 60 MMMM RRR STX 60 1234 000 0 T SSSS EEEE KK 961231113000 TEXT Y CR LF 961231123000 15 "Gone To Lunch" Y CR LF
Delete Message Diversion with recID for Extension
306
VSI and TTS
Action Request Delete diversion DD for MMMM
Command
Example
STX 61 MMMM DD Y STX 61 1234 01 Y CR LF CR LF
View Message Diversion(s) for Extension Action Request View diversion(s) for MMMM Command Example
STX 62 MMMM Y CR STX 62 1234 Y CR LF LF
Initiate Message Text for Extension Action Request Command Example STX 70 1234 16 "Call home soon" Y CR LF
Initiate message TEXT for STX 70 MMMM KK MMMM TEXT Y CR LF
Delete Message Text for Extension Action Request Delete message DD for MMMM Command Example
STX 71 MMMM DD Y STX 71 1234 02 Y CR LF CR LF
View Message(s) for Extension Action Request View message(s) for MMMM Command Example
Download all Message Diversions and Messages from D.N.A. Action Request Command Example This message is sent from VOICE System to VSI Service to download all messages and diversions from the D.N.A. Server to VOICE System. This is used to synchronize database information between both systems when VOICE System restarts.
Database Synchronization STX 90 Y CR LF Message
307
VSI and TTS
View (synchronize) D.N.A. system time Action Request Time Synchronization Message Command Example
STX 91 This allows VSI Service to YYMMDDHHMMSS Y check the local date/time of CR LF the D.N.A. Server against the local date/time of the VOICE system. If local date/time deviates more than 1 minute and less than 10 minutes, then VSI Service prompts a warning message in the D.N.A. Server Windows event log. If local date/time deviates more than 10 minutes, then VSI Service prompts an error message in the D.N.A. Server Windows event log.
IVR/Voice System from VSI Messages

Start of showing Message Diversion(s) for Extension that has Number of Message Diversions Action Request Command Example
Start of showing message STX 10 MMMM NN Y See below diversion(s) for MMMM CR LF that has NN diversions
Show Message Diversion with recID for Extension Action Request Show diversion DD for MMMM Command STX 11 MMMM DD RRR T SSSS EEEE KK TEXT Y CR LF Example See below
End of showing Message Diversion(s) for Extension Action Request End of showing diversion(s) for MMMM Command Example
STX 12 MMMM Y CR (1234 has 2 diversions, LF lunch (0) 11:30-12:30 and vacation (7) June 25th until July 12th) STX 10 1234 02 Y CR LF
308
VSI and TTS
STX 11 1234 01 000 0 961231113000 961231123000 15 "Gone To Lunch" Y CR LF STX 11 1234 02 007 0 960625000000 960712000000 25 "Vacation To The Bahamas" Y CR LF STX 12 1234 Y CR LF
Activate Message Diversion for Extension Action Request Activate diversion for MMMM Command STX 13 MMMM DD PPP RRR T SSSS EEEE KK TEXT Y CR LF Example STX 13 1234 01 001 000 0 961231113000 961231123000 15 "Gone To Lunch" Y CR LF
Deactivate Message Diversion for Extension Action Request Deactivate diversion for MMMM Command Example
Start of showing Message(s) for Extension that has Number of Messages Action Request Command Example
Start of showing STX 20 MMMM NN Y See below message(s) for MMMM that CR LF has NN messages
Show Message with Number of characters with recID for Extension Action Request Show message DD for MMMM Command STX 21 MMMM DD KK TEXT 1 Y CR LF or STX 21 MMMM DD KK TEXT 0 Y CR LF Example See below
309
VSI and TTS
End of showing Message(s) for Extension Action Request Command Example
End of showing message(s) STX 22 MMMM Y CR (1234 has 2 messages, first for MMMM LF with 130 characters, second only few) STX 20 1234 02 Y CR LF STX 21 1234 01 80 "This message contains information about this and that, especially that. Please" 1 Y CR LF STX 21 1234 01 50 " remember that this is a very small example only" 0 Y CR LF STX 21 1234 02 15 "Short message" 0 Y CR LF STX 22 1234 Y CR LF
310
VSI and TTS
Indicate that Extension has a Message Waiting Indication Action Request Indicate message waiting indication for MMMM Command Example
Erase the Message Waiting Indication for Extension Action Request Erase message waiting indication for MMMM Command Example
311
Chapter 17 Security
Directory Security
The D.N.A. directories are open to anyone with full control, by default, if FAT is used. If NTFS is used, Read and Write permission is granted to the appropriate users by administrator. The following table contains the directories and the applications/services that require write permission.
D.N.A. Server
D.N.A. Components MRS Directory / File \CAAPI\data Applications / Services / User Call Accounting API (RDS Scheduled job) LFS RDS
\Data\LFS \Data\RDS and subdirectories \Data\SDS \Photo Share \Data\DirChangeLog
SDS RDS Not used today, for 3rd party use only LDS MD Support users Name Identity Conversion users SCS EMG users MD Support users PDM users
\Data\LDS \Data\MDS \Data\NameID \Data\SCS Site1, 2, \EMG and sub-directories \MDS and sub-directories \PMG and sub-directories
312
Dynamic Network Administration Error: Reference source not found
Technical Guide
D.N.A. Components OWS PMG
Directory / File \OWS\Data \PMG\Data
Applications / Services / User OWS users PDM users
D.N.A. Client
D.N.A. Components Share Directory / File \Data\DirChangeLog Applications / Services / User Not used today, for 3rd party use only LDS LFS MD Support users Name Identity Conversion users SCS EMG users MD Support users PDM users OWS users PDM users
\Data\LDS \Data\LFS \Data\MDS \Data\NameID \Data\SCS Site1, 2, \EMG and sub-directories \MDS and sub-directories \PMG and sub-directories OWS PMG \OWS\Data \PMG\Data
313
Technical Guide
Web Server
D.N.A. Components ACA, DME, or Personal Assistant ACA DME Directory / File DirB\data Applications / Services / User everyone
root \ MobileExec\bin\session.m db
IUSER_<machine> everyone (this is done by DME installations automatically)
Services and Accounts/Rights

D.N.A. Server
Service Display Name: The name displayed in Service manager. Service Internal Name: The name listed in Registry,
HKLM\System\CurrentContolSet\Services
Service Display Name ClockSync
Service Internal Name ClockSync
Startup Type Automatic
Logon Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account
Remarks
ACA Scheduler
ACA Scheduler
Manual
IP Service
IP Service
Automatic
LDAP
LDAP
Manual
LDS
LDS
Manual
LFS
LFS
Automatic
314
Technical Guide
Service Display Name MD110 Time
Service Internal Name MD110Time
Startup Type Manual
Logon Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account
Remarks
OWS Supervisor
DNASupervisor Server
Automatic
If OWS installed
PBX Service
PBXService
Automatic
If OWS installed
RDS
RDS
Automatic
SDS
SDS
Automatic
SCS
SCS
Manual
SMS
DNA_SMS
Manual
TSS
TSS
Manual
VSI
VSI
Manual
315
Technical Guide
DNA Client
Service Display Name (in Service Manager) ClockSync Service Internal Name (in Registry) ClockSync Startup Type Automatic Logon Remarks
Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account Local System Account If OWS installed
LFS
LFS
Automatic
SCS
SCS
Manual
PBX Service
PBXService
Automatic
ODBC Connection
The ODBC User Data Source configuration is as follows: Data Source name Server name defined in the D.N.A. Server configuration. E.g., Local DNA Server (default for local server) Data Provider SQL Server name Authentication use SQL Authentication, login ID is oliver. Others Refer to the following screen capture for the remaining configurations
316
Technical Guide
Files Copied to Other Directories

Microsoft introduced Protect Files when the Windows 2000 operating system was released. These files should be installed by Microsoft only. Since D.N.A. previously supported Windows NT 4.0, different sets of files may be copied to the WINNT and System32 directories by D.N.A. installation (depending on the version of Windows operating system).
Windows NT
Destination Directory WINNT System32 Files hh.exe opi_msg.dll owspbxext.cpl Api.dll Cstrain.dll Ossapi.dll Ossdmem.dll Remarks MS redistribution files DNA files DNA files Third party files Third party files Third party files Third party files
317
Technical Guide
Destination Directory
Files Soedber.dll Ossmem.dll Asycfilt.dll Atl.dll Comcat.dll Gapi32.dll Mfcans32.dll Mscal.ocx Mscomct2.ocx Msflxgrd.ocx Msvbvm60.dll Msvcp50.dll Msvcp60.dll Oleaut32.dll Olemsg32.dll Olepro32.dll Stdole2.tlb Ctl3d32.dll Dbmssocn.dll Mfc40.dll Mfc42.dll Msvcrt40.dll
Remarks Third party files Third party files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files
318
Technical Guide
Files Sqlstr.dll Sqlwid.dll Sqlwoa.dll Csh.dll Hhctrl.ocx Itircl.dll Itss.dll Roboex32.dll Sms_rl.dll
Remarks MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files Third party files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files Third party files DNA file DNA files
Program Files\Common files\EricssonShare \ADSI
adsdna.dll
applpy.dll Program Files\Common files\EricssonShare\DM I\CIManger CIMgr.exe
DNA files Intel files
CiMgrLdr.exe DmiProxy.dll Program Files\Common files\EricssonShare\DM I\Mapper Program Files\Common files\EricssonShare\Ser viceProvider Dmi2snmp.dll
Intel files Intel files Intel files
*.*
Intel files
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003

Destination Directory System32 Files opi_msg.dll Remarks DNA files
319
Technical Guide
Files
Remarks
owspbxext.cpl Api.dll Cstrain.dll Ossapi.dll Ossdmem.dll Soedber.dll Ossmem.dll Gapi32.dll Mfcans32.dll Mscal.ocx Mscomct2.ocx Msflxgrd.ocx Msvcp60.dll Olemsg32.dll Csh.dll Roboex32.dll Sms_rl.dll Program Files\Common files\EricssonShare \ADSI adsdna.dll
DNA files Third party files Third party files Third party files Third party files Third party files Third party files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files MS redistribution files Third party files Third party files D.N.A. file DNA files
applpy.dll Program Files\Common files\EricssonShare\DM CIMgr.exe
DNA files Intel files
320
Technical Guide
Destination Directory I\CIManger
Files
Remarks
CiMgrLdr.exe DmiProxy.dll Program Files\Common files\EricssonShare\DM I\Mapper Program Files\Common files\EricssonShare\Ser viceProvider Dmi2snmp.dll
Intel files Intel files Intel files
*.*
Intel files
Databases
Permissions: dbo: Database Owner with full controls SELECT: Read permission Database Permission for User oliver aux1, aux2 db_xaction dnadfdb dirdb emgdb pmglocks security site1pmg, site2pmg site1, site2 dbo dbo dbo dbo dbo dbo dbo dbo dbo Permission for User thirdpty SELECT SELECT No permission SELECT SELECT SELECT No permission SELECT SELECT
321
Technical Guide
Registry
Location
The root of the DNA key is HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson. The primary sub-keys for each individual DNA application is created under \Ericsson by various installations. DDB DMG DMI ACA ACC EMG Integration LocalDS MobileExec MRS OPI PersonalAssistant PMG PPMLite ServicePack Installed by D.N.A. installation Installed if DMG is selected Installed on server only Installed by ACA installation Installed by ACC installation Installed if EMG is selected Installed by Outlook integration and Lotus Notes installations Installed on server and client Installed by Mobile Executive installation Installed on server only Installed if OWS is selected Installed by Personal Assistant installation Installed if PMG is selected Installed by PPMLite installation under \PMG Installed by DNA Service Pack installation
Permissions
Permissions Setup by D.N.A. Installation
Default Permissions By default, the Ericsson Registry key permissions are set as follows by D.N.A. installations:
322
Technical Guide
Administrator Full Control Everyone Special Access. Reference the following screen capture for Special Access permissions.
Deviation from Default Permission Due to special needs by applications, the following specific sub-keys under HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson are granted for Full Control to Everyone by D.N.A. installation. LocalDS MRS ConnectionList DirChangeLog DrOhan HIS LDS RemoteDS SCS Servers SMS
Registry Keys that Require Write Permissions
323
Technical Guide
The following table contains the Registry keys and the applications that require write permission. All the Registry keys are located at \HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson\ D.N.A. Server Registry Key Location HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson MRS\ConnectionList MRS\DirChangeLog MRS\DrOhan MRS\HSI MRS\LDS MRS\MDS MRS\NameID MRS\RemoteDS MRS\SCS MRS\SMS MRS\Servers MRS\TSS MRS\VSI DMG\LDAP EMG PMG MD Support RDS RDS HSI Configuration LDS Configuration MDS Name Identity Conversion RDS Configuration SCS Configuration RDS Configuration DNA Server Configuration, LFS TSS Configuration VSI Configuration LDAP Configuration Extension Manager Performance Data Manager & Performance Presentation Manager Applications
324
Technical Guide
D.N.A. Client Registry Key Location HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson MRS\ConnectionList MRS\DrOhan MRS\LDS MRS\MDS MRS\RemoteDS MRS\SCS MRS\Servers DMG\LDAP ACC EMG PMG
Applications
MD Support RDS LDS Configuration MDS LDS SCS Configuration LFS LDAP Configuration Aastra Communication Client Extension Manager Performance Data Manager & Performance Presentation Manager
Web Server Registry Key Location HKLM\SOFTWARE\Ericsson ACA MRS\LDS
Applications
ACA Configuration LDS Configuration & LDS
325

MD110 Tech Guide Help

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

MD110 Tech Guide Help

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Dynamic Network Administration 5.

EN/LZT 108 3855 R3I2

Chapter 2 Applications Chapter 2 Applications

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Chapter 3 License Administration Chapter 3 License Administration

Chapter 4 Pre-Installation Chapter 4 Pre-Installation

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Chapter 5 SQL Installation Chapter 5 SQL Installation

Chapter 6 D.N.A. Installation Chapter 6 D.N.A. Installation

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Chapter 7 ACC Installation Chapter 7 ACC Installation

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Chapter 8 Performance Chapter 8 Performance

Chapter 9 D.N.A. Server Chapter 9 D.N.A. Server

Chapter 10 Maintenance Chapter 10 Maintenance

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Chapter 12 Application Data Chapter 12 Application Data

Chapter 13 MML Commands Chapter 13 MML Commands

Chapter 14 Frequently Asked Questions Chapter 14 Frequently Asked Questions

Chapter 15 Configuration Chapter 15 Configuration

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Chapter 16 VSI and TSS Chapter 16 VSI and TSS

Chapter 17 Security Chapter 17 Security

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Chapter 1 Key Information

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

D.N.A. Support for Extensions

Dynamic Network Administration Key Information

MD110/MX-ONE TSW Digital Digital POTS Data Dual Access ISDN + + + + +

What You Will Find In This Help Guide

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide

Dynamic Network Administration Key Information

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Dynamic Network Administration Key Information

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Aastra Communication Assistant (ACA) *

Aastra Communication Client (ACC) *

D.N.A. Mobile Executive (DME) ***

Available in GUI and online Help

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

OWS Screen Resolution

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

SQL Server 2008 Security mode

SQL Server 2008 Named Instances

Aastra Communication Assistant

Personal Number Profile Configuration

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

OneBox Mailbox Integration

Integration of OneBox and D.N.A.

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Automatic Mailbox Creation/Deletion

OneBox Database Synchronization

OneBox Compatibility with Other Network Elements

OneBox Integration with D.N.A. Voice System Interface

Dynamic Network Administration Technical Guide

Using Diversion Reasons

OneBox Intercept Capabilities